Home

CubeSuite+ V2.02.00 User`s Manual: RX Build

1. When the sections to be allocated to the same address are enclosed by parentheses the sections within paren theses are allocated to the address immediately after the sections that come before the parentheses C and E in this example The section that comes after the parentheses E in this example is allocated after the last of the sections enclosed by the parentheses Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable Parentheses cannot be nested One or more colons must be written within parentheses Parentheses cannot be written without a colon Colons cannot be written outside of parentheses When this option is specified with parentheses optimization with the linkage editor is disabled R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 553 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE fsymbol lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Section Options gt Format fsymbol lt section name gt Description Outputs externally defined symbols in the specified section to a file in the assembler directive format The file name is lt output file gt fsy This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab The specified section that outputs externally defined symbols to the file in the Section category Examples Outputs externally de
2. Simplified Chi nese character gb2312 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Simplified Chinese character The detailed information on object is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects the type of the output file to be generated during a build This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Object module file output ob Outputs a relocatable file Source file after pre processed out put prep Outputs a source file after preprocessed Source file after pre processed Disables sion line output out put prep noline ztENESAS Disables line output at preprocessor expan Page 249 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Object module file name A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specify the name of the object module file generated after compilation The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 charac
3. Duplicate Rename Select the build mode to be deleted from the build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below opens Figure 2 88 Message Dialog Box Question Q0232001 o Delete build mode BuildMode2 Cox Cowes ie To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode is deleted from the project Caution You cannot delete DefaultBuild 2 12 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 89 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option amp CPU Microcontroller type Rx600 series cpu rx600 Endian type for data Little endian data endian little Rounding method for floating point constant operations round to nearest round nearest Handling of denormalized numbers in floating point constants Handles as zeros denormalize off Precision of the double type and long double type Handles in single precision dbl_size 4 hen es the in De yi z ne To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00
4. My Documents My Computer File name D iles of type Library file lib Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel after selecting the following properties open the Path Edit dialog box by clicking the but ton From the Common Options tab Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Librarian Options tab Using libraries in the Library category And then click the Browse button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 308 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Library file lib Library file Function buttons Button Function Sets the desig
5. 4 C Permit non existent path Placeholder Placeholder Value Description A ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name E 2 _ BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder y gt Function buttons Hep The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 288 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category and Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category and Rule check exclu sion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Link Options tab Using librarie
6. Copy Copies the selected category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are cop ied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected category node Property Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 99 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be changed This also shows the type of the Generate Code button clicked in the Code Generator panel and information about the file selected in the Code Generator Preview panel and changes set tings R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Figure A 3 Property Panel Property x 1 __ A _CCRX Property a l Be 4 Build Mode a Default Build x CPU PIC PID 4 Output File Type and Path Output file type Execute Module Load Module File Intermediate file output folder BuildModeName 4 Frequently Used Options for Compile Additional include paths
7. Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System include paths Changes the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compil ing This corresponds to the include option of the compiler Default System include paths number of defined items How to Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears change when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specifies the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line The string part can be omitted and in this case the macro name is assumed to be defined This corresponds to the define option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 114 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs debugging Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files information This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the com
8. Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge warning Changes all information level messages to warn ing level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge warn ing lt Error Number gt Changes the information level messages with the specified error numbers to warning level mes sages No Does not change the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of infor mation level message Specifies error number of information level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level messages to warning level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level and warning level messages to error level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to chang
9. Division output file Specifies the divided output file Specifies in the format of file name start address end address or file name section name with one file name per line To define multiple sections use a colon to separate each entry written as in file name section name section name example file1 abs sec1 sec2 Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation example file2 abs 400 ffff If the extension is omitted abs is automatically added The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName abs has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Divides load module file property is selected Default Specifies divide output file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified Outputs the external symbol allocation information file Selects whether to output the external symbol allocation information file This corresponds to the map option of the linker Default When Yes Optimi
10. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Compiles within 16 bits branch 16 Compiles the program with a branch width within 16 bits Compiles within 24 bits branch 24 Compiles the program with a branch width within 24 bits No specified branch 32 2tENESAS Does not specify the branch width Page 108 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Base register for ROM Specifies the general register used as a fixed base address throughout the program When base rom register A is specified accesses to const variables are all per formed relative to the specified register A Note that the total size of the constant area section must be within 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes This corresponds to the base option of the compiler and library generator base option of the assembler This property is displayed only when No in the Enables the PID function property in the PIC PID category is selected Default None How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction None Does not specify the base register for ROM R8 base rom R8 Specifies R8 as the base register for ROM R9 base rom R9 Specifies R9 as the base register for ROM R10 base rom R10 Specifies R10 as the base register for ROM R11 base rom R11 Specifies R11 as the base register for ROM R12 base rom R12 Specifies R12 as the base register
11. switch statement branch table C D and B are the section names specified by the section option or pragma section W is the section name spec ified by the section option The data contents allocated to each section are output in the order they were defined except that variables that do not have the initial value are output after those that have the initial value in section C Example int a char b 0 const short c 0 struct char x char y R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 372 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE SECTION C_2 ROMDATA ALIGN 2 glb word 0000H SECTION D_1 ROMDATA glb byte OOH SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 glb blk1 SEC B_1 DATA glb blkb Remarks The stuff option has no effect for sections other than B D C and W R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 373 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nostuff lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format Description When the nostuff option is specified the compiler allocates the variables belonging to the specified lt section type gt to 4 byte boundary alignment sections When lt section type gt is omitted variables of all section types are applicable C D and B are the section names specified by the section option or pragma section W is the section name spec ified by the s
12. Default No novolatile How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes volatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile qualified No novolatile Does not handle external variables as if they were volatile qualified Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Selects whether to perform the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables This corresponds to the const_copy and noconst_copy option of the library genera tor Default Depends on the optimization level options How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level options Depends on the optimization level options Yes const_copy Enables constant propagation of const qualified external variables No noconst_copy Disables constant propagation of const qualified external variables Conversion method of the divisions and resi dues of integer con stants Selects conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants This correspon ds to the const_div and noconst_div option of the library generator Default Depends on the optimization type option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation type option Depends on the optimization type option Instruction seq
13. Default The boundary alignment value for structures and classes equals the maximum boundary alignment value for mem bers Description This option specifies the boundary alignment value for structure members and class members The boundary alignment value for structures and classes equals the maximum boundary alignment value for mem bers This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Assumes the boundary alignment value for structure members is 1 in the CPU category Remarks The boundary alignment values for structure members and class members when these options are specified are shown in the following table Table B 8 Boundary Alignment Values for Structure Members and Class Members When the unpack Option is Specified Member Type unpack Not Specified signed char unsigned short unsigned int te unsigned long unsigned long long floating type and pointer type Note Becomes the same as short when the int_to_short option is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 440 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE exception lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format exception Default The C exceptional handling function try catch throw is disabled Description The C exceptional handling function try catch throw is enabled T
14. lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format memory High Low Default The default for this option is memory high Description Specifies the memory size occupied for linkage When memory high is specified the processing is the same as usual When memory low is specified the linkage editor loads the information necessary for linkage in smaller units to reduce the memory occupancy This increases file accesses and processing becomes slower when the occupied memory size is less than the available memory capacity memory low is effective when processing is slow because a large project is linked and the memory size occupied by the linkage editor exceeds the available memory in the machine used This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Reduces the memory occupancy in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Reduces the memory occupancy in the Others category Remarks When one of the following options is specified the memory low option is unavailable When form absolute hexadecimal stype or binary is specified compress delete rename map stack cpu stride or list and show reference xreference are specified in combination When formzlibrary is specified delete rename extract hide or replace When form object or relocate is specified extract Some combinat
15. Enables the PIC func Selects whether to enable the PIC position independent code function tion In PIC all function calls are performed with BSR or BRA instructions When acquiring the address of a function a relative address from the PC should be used This allows PIC to be located at a desired address after linkage This option corresponds to the pic option of the compiler and library generator pic option of the assembler Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes pic Enables the PIC function No Disables the PIC function Enables the PID func Selects whether to enable the PID position independent data function tion The constant area sections C C_2 and C_1 the literal section L and the switch statement branch table sections W W_2 and W_1 are handled as PID position inde pendent data PID can be accessed through a relative address from the PID register This corresponds to the pid option of the compiler and library generator the pid option of the assembler This property is displayed only when None in the Base register for ROM property in the CPU category and Yes in the Uses the PID register for code generation prop erty is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes The maximum bit Enables the PID function width of the offset 16 16 bit 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes address bits
16. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Polynomial expression CRC CCITT Endian Automatic CRc Selects CRC CCITT as a polyno mial expression Yes Polynomial expression CRC CCITT Endian Big endian data CRc Selects the CRC CCITT as a polynomial expression and selects the BIG as an endian Yes Polynomial expression CRC CCITT Endian Little endian data CRc Selects the CRC CCITT as a polynomial expression and selects the LITTLE as an endian Yes Polynomial expression CRC 16 Endian Automatic CRc Selects CRC 16 as a polynomial expression Yes Polynomial expression CRC 16 Endian Big endian data CRc Selects the CRC 16 as a polyno mial expression and selects the BIG as an endian Yes Polynomial expression CRC 16 Endian Little endian data CRc Selects the CRC 16 as a polyno mial expression and selects the LITTLE as an endian No Does not generate the CRC code Output address Specifies the address where the result is output Specifies an address in hexadecimal This corresponds to the crc option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Outputs the calculation result of CRC property is specified Default 0 How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Target range R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00
17. ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the binary option of the linker This property is displayed only when Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category is selected Default Specify binary data file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction ztENESAS Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Page 181 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Initiates the prelinker Selects whether to initiate the prelinker The automatic generation of C template instance This corresponds to the noprelink option of the linker Default Automatic control How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Automatic control Disables the prelinker initiation if there is no ii file in a file to be input to linker Yes Enables the prelinker initiation No NOPRElink Disables the prelinker initiation 2 Output The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Displays the output file type This corresponds to the form option of the linker Default User librar
18. Select Windows start gt gt All programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Description of each area 1 Menu bar Displays the menu relates to build a Project The Project menu shows menu items to operate the project and others Add New Subproject Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 84 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Favorite Projects Displays a cascading menu to use to open or save your favorite project 1 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 1 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 2 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 2 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displaye
19. conditionals Outputs also the statements for which the specified condition is not satisfied in conditional assembly definitions Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement expansions Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs the C C source file Outputs the statements unsatisfied in condi tional assembly Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement and Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements in the List category Remarks This option is valid only when the listfile option has been specified Information output from the compiler is written to the source list For the source list file format refer to Assemble List File R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 383 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimize Options lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt The following optimize options are available optimize goptimize speed size loop inline noinline file_inline case volatile novolatile const_copy const_div noconst_div library scope noscope schedule noschedule map nomap approxdiv enable_register simple_float_conv fpu nofpu alias float_order ip_optimize merge_files whole_program R20UT29
20. 1 TIME 10 To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 7 Set Link Options To set options for the link phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 33 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 45 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property CC RX Property E Input Input object module file Using libraries System libraries Input binary data file Symbol definition Specifies execution start address Initiates the prelinker Output Output file type Outputs debugging information Path of the output folder Output file name Outputs the external symbol allocation information file Enables information level message output Suppresses the number of information level messages Fills in padding data at the end of a section Address setting for specified vector number Address setting for unused vector area Outputs the jump table B List Outputs the linkage list file Outputs a symbol name list in a module Outputs th
21. A list file containing the linkage result information This is output when the list option is specified The output contents are selected with the show option Library file Output A file where multiple object module files are registered Library list file Output A list file containing the result information of generation of the library This is output when the list option is specified The output contents are selected with the show option Library backup file Output File type for saving the contents of original library files before they are overwritten by the library generator Hex file Motorola S format file Output A Motorola S format file in the hex format converted from the load module file Hex file Intel expansion hex format file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Output ztENESAS An Intel expansion file in the hex format converted from the load module file Page 338 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE File Type Extension I O Description Hex file binary format file bin Output A binary file in the hex format converted from the load module file Stack information file Sni Output A stack information file This is output when the stack option is specified Debugging information file Output A debugging information file This is output when the sdebug option is specified Object file including a defi
22. CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE euc lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in SJIS code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in euc code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 463 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Sjis lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format sjis Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in SJIS code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in SJIS code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 464 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE latin1 lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format latinl Default This option specifies the character
23. How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area Show the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Sets the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area Show all the build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list Current build mode in the selected project is selected by default The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always shown at the top a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens and the build mode is duplicated with the name entered and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the cur rently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild is duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 297 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted A WINDOW REFERENCE Rename Caution Remarks
24. Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start for details about cat egories other than General Build Debug 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 303 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 37 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category Option U1 General Startup and Exit General Build Debug Display 1 External Text Editor gt eea 1 irde Enable Rapid Build Enema Tods If rapid build is made effective build is begun when edited source file is saved ie rapid build is made effective build is begun when edited sourc
25. The default for this option is fpu when the Instruction code set as the ISA 1 The default for this option is nofpu when RX200 is selected as the target CPU 2 or fpu in other cases Note 1 This means a selection by the isa option or the ISA_RX environment variable 2 This means a selection by the cpu option or the CPU_RX environment variable Description This option is used to generate a relocatable file which is not capable of containing FPU instructions This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses floating point operation instructions in the CPU category Remarks Specifying fpu will lead to an error when the RX200 is selected as the target CPU R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 484 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE List Options lt Assembler Command Options List Options gt The following list options are available listfile nolistfile show R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 485 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE listfile lt Assembler Command Options List Options gt Format listfile lt file name gt Default If this option is not specified no assemble list file is output Description When the listfile option is specified an assemble list file is output The name of the file can also be specified
26. The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder Include files at the head of compiling units The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the preinclude option of the compiler Default Include files at the head of compiling units number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Macro definition Specifies the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line The string part can be omitted and in this case the macro name is assumed to be defined This corresponds
27. This correspon ds to the bit_order option of the compiler and library generator Default Allocates from right bit_order right How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Allocates from left Allocates members from the upper bit bit_order left Allocates from right bit_order right Allocates members from the lower bit Assumes the bound ary alignment value for structure members is 1 Selects whether to assume the boundary alignment value for structure members is 1 This corresponds to the pack and unpack options of the compiler and library generator Default No unpack How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes pack Assumes the boundary alignment value for structure members is 1 No unpack Follows the boundary alignment R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 107 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Enables C excep tional handling func tion try catch and throw A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to enable C exceptional handling function try catch and throw This corresponds to the exception and noexception options of the compiler and library generator Default No noexception How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes exception Enables the exception handling function No noexception Disables the exception handli
28. This dialog box is used to select the file that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 42 Add Excluding File Dialog Box Add Excluding File Look in A My Recent sample B DefaultBuild sub user_define h Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer PFile name tk PFiles of type C header file h Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel after selecting the following properties open the Path Edit dialog box by clicking the but ton From the Compile Options tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check cat egory And then click the Browse button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 314 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File nam
29. Yes Optimizes the inter module map ztENESAS Optimizes accesses to external variables Page 211 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Converts floating point constant division into multiplication A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to convert floating point constant division into multiplication of the corresponding reciprocals as constants This corresponds to the approxdiv option of the library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes approxdiv Converts floating point constant division into multiplication No Does not convert floating point constant division into multiplication Allocates preferen tially the variables with register storage class specification to regis ters Selects whether to allocate preferentially the variables with register storage class specification to registers This corresponds to the enable_register option of the library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes enable_register Allocates preferentially the variables with register storage class specification to reg isters Does not allocate preferentially the vari ables with register storage class specifi cation to registers Omits a check of the range for conversion between the floating type and unsigned integer type Selects whether to omit a check of
30. Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to projects Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to select the target project file for import the build options Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select a folder and retrieve it for the caller Add Excluding File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the file that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Section Settings dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 This dialog box is used to add change or delete sections 7tENESAS Page 82 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Window Panel Dialog Box Name A WINDOW REFERENCE Function Description Add Section Modify Section and Add Over lay dialog boxes These dialog boxes are used to enter a new section name when add ing modifying or overlaying a section respectively Section Address dialog box This dialog box is used to enter an address Unassigned Section dialog box This dialog box is used to select sections to be deleted Specify The Predefined Macro dialog box This dialog box is used to select the predefined macros to disable and specify it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify the rule number dialog box This dialog box is used to select numbers of the MISRA C 2004 rules and specif
31. Always invalid None undefined Always invalid None message nomessage Always invalid nomessage change_message Always invalid None file_inline_path Always invalid None comment Always invalid None check Always invalid None output Always invalid output obj noline Always invalid None debug nodebug Always invalid nodebug listfile nolistfile show Always invalid nolistfile file_inline Always invalid asmcmd Always invalid Inkemd Always invalid asmopt Always invalid Inkopt Always invalid logo nologo Always invalid euc sjis latin1 utf8 Always invalid outcode Always invalid None subcommand Always invalid None alias Always invalid alias noansi pic pid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 lang cpp or at C source compilation Note1 None ztENESAS Page 591 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE No Options that Become Invalid Conditions for Inval Library Configuration When Made Invalid idation 25 ip_optimize Always invalid None 26 merge_files Always invalid None 27 whole_program Always invalid None 28 big5 Always invalid Note None gb2312 Notes 1 Warning W0511171 is output Notes 2 Error F0593305 is output This library cannot be generated R20UT2998EJ
32. At linkage inter module optimization is applied to the file specified with this option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Output additional information for inter module optimization in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 482 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE fpu lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt Format fpu Default The default for this option is fpu when the Instruction code set as the ISA 1 The default for this option is nofpu when RX200 is selected as the target CPU 2 or fpu in other cases Note 1 This means a selection by the isa option or the ISA_RX environment variable 2 This means a selection by the cpu option or the CPU_RX environment variable Description This option is used to generate a relocatable file which is capable of containing FPU instructions This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses floating point operation instructions in the CPU category Remarks Specifying fpu will lead to an error when the RX200 is selected as the target CPU R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 483 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nofpu lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt Format nofpu Default
33. Build Settings Tab When Selecting Library File Property lib user lib Property E Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Description of each category 1 Build The detailed information on the build are displayed and the configuration can be changed Set as build target Select whether to build the selected file Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Builds the selected file No Does not build the selected file Set individual compile Select whether to set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the option selected C or C source file This property is displayed only when a C or C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property in the Build cate gory Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project set tings to the selected C or C source file Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C or C source file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 217 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Set individual assem Select whether to set an assemble option that differs from the project settings to the ble option selected assembler source file T
34. Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lisfile Outputs a source list file No nolistfile Disable output of a source list file Outputs the C C source file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the C C source file This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show source Outputs the C C source file No ztENESAS Does not output the C C source file Page 140 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the state ments unsatisfied in conditional assembly A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show condi tionals Outputs the statements unsatisfied in condi tional assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly
35. Description When the nologo option is specified output of the copyright notice is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs the copyright in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 501 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE subcommand lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format subcommand lt subcommand file name gt Description When the subcommand option is specified the assembler options specified in a subcommand file are used at assembler startup Specify options in a subcommanid file in the same format as in the command line Example Contents of subcommand file opt sub listfile debug Command line specifications When options are specified in the command line as shown 1 below the assembler interprets them as shown in 2 asrx endian big subcommand opt sub test src asrx endian big listfile debug test src R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 502 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE euc lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in sjis code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in st
36. For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Outputs debugging information Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the assembler This property is not displayed when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Default No nodebug How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No node bug Does not output debugging information to object module files Output additional infor mation for inter mod ule optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not output additional information for inter module optimization Outputs a assemble list file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to output an assemble list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolistfile option of the assembler This pr
37. Inkcmd Specifies a subcommand file for rlink options asmopt Specifies asrx options Inkopt Specifies rlink options Other Options logo Selects the output of copyright information nologo Selects the non output of copyright information euc The character codes of input programs are interpreted as EUC codes sjis The character codes of input programs are interpreted as SJIS codes latin1 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as ISO Latin1 codes utf8 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as UTF 8 codes big5 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as BIG5 codes gb2312 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as GB2312 codes outcode Selects the character coding for an output assembly lan guage file subcommand R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Specifies a file for including command options Page 347 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Source Options lt Compile Options Source Options gt The following source options are available lang include preinclude define undefine message nomessage change_message file_inline_path comment check misra2004 ignore_files_misra check_language_extension R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 348 of 596 Cub
38. Optimization A WINDOWS REFERENCE The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Optimization level Selects optimization level This corresponds to the optimize option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 0 optimize 0 Does not optimize the program 1 optimize 1 Partially optimizes the program by auto matically allocating variables to registers integrating the function exit blocks inte grating multiple instructions which can be integrated etc 2 optimize 2 Performs overall optimization Max optimize max Performs optimization as much as possi ble Outputs additional information for inter module optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not outputs additional information for inter module optimization Optimization type Selects optimization type This corresponds to the speed and
39. Page 187 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Error number of infor mation level and warn ing level message Specifies error number of information level and warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message error lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Deletes local symbol name information Selects whether to delete local symbol name information This corresponds to the hide option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Hide Deletes local symbol name information No Does not delete local symbol name informa tion Displays the total sizes Selects whether to display the total sizes of sections of sections This corresponds to the total_size option of the linker This property is displayed only when Relocatble module file
40. Page 205 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to allocate initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff D Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Does not allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates const quali fied variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Selects whether to allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff C Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte bound ary alignment sections No Does not allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates switch state ment branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down
41. R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 550 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Section Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Section Options gt The following section options are available start fsymbol aligned_section R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 551 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE start lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Section Options gt Format start lt sub gt lt sub gt lt section name gt lt section name gt lt address gt Default The section is allocated at 0 Description Specifies the start address of the section Specify an address as the hexadecimal The section name can be specified with wildcards Sections specified with wildcards are expanded according to the input order Two or more sections can be allocated to the same address i e sections are overlaid by separating them with a colon Sections specified at a single address are allocated in the specification order Sections to be overlaid can be changed by enclosing them by parentheses Objects in a single section are allocated in the specification order of the input file or the input library If no address is specified the section is allocated at 0 A section which is not specified with the start option is allocated after the last allocat
42. You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 38 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Character code of an input program SJIS codef sjis B Object Outputs debugging information YYes debug B List Outputs an assemble list file Nof nolistfile E Optimization Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No mone Additional include paths Specifies Additional include paths The path uses the project folder as the reference point Common Options Compile Options A A Hex Output Options 4 Library Generate Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 6 1 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Source category Figure 2 39 Additional include paths Property If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 31 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 40 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line A
43. byte_count lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format byte_count lt numerical value gt Description Specifies the maximum byte count for a data record when a file is to be created in the Intel Hex format Specify a one byte hexadecimal value 01 to FF for the byte count When this option is not specified the linkage editor assumes FF as the maximum byte count when creating an Intel Hex file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Specifies byte count for data record and Maximum byte count for a data record in the Hex Format category Examples byte_count 10 Remarks This option is invalid when the file to be created is not an Intel Hex type form hex file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 531 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Crc lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format CRc lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt address where the result is output gt lt target range gt lt polynomial expression gt lt endian gt lt address where the result is output gt lt address gt lt target range gt lt start address gt lt end address gt lt polynomial expression gt CCITT 16 lt endian gt BIG LITTLE Description This option is used for cyclic redund
44. lt file name gt should be specified according to the rules described in the Naming Files section If lt file name gt is not specified in the listfile option the source file name with the extension replaced with Ist is used as the source list file name This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs a assemble list file in the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 486 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nolisttfile lt Assembler Command Options List Options gt Format nolistfile Default If this option is not specified no assemble list file is output Description When the nolistfile option is specified no assemble list file is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs a assemble list file in the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 487 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE show lt Assembler Command Options List Options gt Format Description This option specifies the contents of the list file to be output by the assembler The following output types can be spec ified as lt sub gt Table B 12 Output Types Specifiable for show Option Output Type Description conditionals The statements for which the specified
45. mize SAFe Custom Performs optimization for the specified options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 120 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Deletes variables Selects whether to delete variables functions that are not referenced functions that are not This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker referenced This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Deletes variables functions that are not mize SYmbol_delete referenced No Does not delete variables functions that are not referenced Creates a subroutine Selects whether to create a subroutine for the same instruction sequence for the same instruc This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker tion sequence This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Creates a subroutine for the same mize SAMe_code instruction sequence No Does not create a subroutine for the same instruction sequence Minimum code size Specifies the minimum code size for the optimization This corresponds to the samesize option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes OPtimize SAMe_code in the Creates a subroutine for
46. As dialog box opens R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 62 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 101 Save As Dialog Box Save As O sample LS DefaultBuild My Recent sample _ib Documents File name Output Build Tool txt me My Network Save as type Text Files txt In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then click the Save button 2 13 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 12 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Page 63 of 596 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 102 Clean Project Item Build Ee Shift F Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Clean sample l Update Dependencies of sample Stop Build Ctrl F7 Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 103 Clean active project Item ai z mple Open Folder with Explorer Add Set sample as Active Projec
47. COMMAND REFERENCE asmopt lt Compile Options Assemble and Linkage Options gt Format asmopt lt assembler option gt Description This option specifies the assembler options to pass to asrx with a string Multiple options can be specified by enclosing them with double quote marks Example ccrx isa rxvl asmopt chkpm sample c The above description has the same meaning as the following two command lines ccrx isa rxvl output srce sample c asrx isa rxvl chkpm sample src Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified assembler options are valid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 458 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Inkopt lt Compile Options Assemble and Linkage Options gt Format lnkopt lt linkage option gt Description This option specifies the linkage options to pass to rlink with a string Multiple options can be specified by enclosing them with double quote marks Example ccrx isa rxvl output abs tp abs lnkopt start P C D 100 B 8000 tpl c tp2 c The above description has the same meaning as the following three command lines ccrx isa rxvl output sre tpl c tp2 c asrx isa rxvl tpl sre tp2 sre rlink start P C D 100 B 8000 form abs output tp tpl obj tp2 obj Remarks
48. Compile Options tab This corresponds to the include option of the compiler Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 220 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Include files at the Specifies include files at the head of compiling units head of compiling The following placeholders are supported units ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the preinclude option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to
49. Default RX600 series cpu rx600 How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction RX600 series Generates an instruction code for the cpu rx600 RX600 Series RX200 or RX100 series Generates an instruction code for the cpu rx200 RX200 Series R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 104 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Uses floating point operation instructions A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to use floating point operation instructions This corresponds to the fpu and nofpu option of the compiler and to the fpu and nofpu option of the assembler Default selected Other than above When None in the Instruction set architecture property is Depends on the Microcontroller type option The peculiar value for the target device How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the Micro controller type option Depends on the Microcontroller type option This item is not available when other than None in the Instruction set archi tecture property is selected Outputs an object that uses FPU instruc tions This item is not available when RX200 series cpu rx200 in the Microcon troller type property is selected No nofpu Outputs an object that does not use FPU instructions Endian type for data Selects endian type for data This corresponds to the endian option of the compiler and library generato
50. Editor panel Then closes this dialog box Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 280 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 24 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file stc s Jump table file jmp Symbol address file fsy Library file lib 1 Object module file obj Relocatable file rel Python script file py Text file txt 2 4 Subfolder level to search 1 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the file types to add to the project You can select multiple types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types displayed are shown below C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp
51. Enables the string EC and runtime library No Disables the string EC Enables com Selects whether to enable complex h C99 plex h C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when C99 lang c99 in the Library configuration property and Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configuration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Enables the complex h C99 and run head C99_complex time library No Disables the complex h C99 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 202 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Enables fenv h C99 Selects whether to enable fenv h C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when C99 lang c99 in the Library configuration property and Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configuration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head fenv Enables the fenv h C99 and runtime library No Disables the fenv h C99 Enables Selects whether to enable inttypes h C99 inttypes h C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when C99 lang c99 in the Library configuration property and Cu
52. FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Total_size Displays the total sizes of sections No Does not display the total sizes of sections Displays the copyright Selects whether to display the copyright information information This corresponds to the logo and nologo option of the linker Default No NOLOgo How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes LOgo Displays the total sizes of sections No NOLOgo Does not display the total sizes of sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 188 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before librarian processing before librarian pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibrarianFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under librarian processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct Ou
53. Frequently Used Options for Librarian The detailed information on frequently used options during library generating is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the application project Outputs debugging Specifies whether debugging information is output information This corresponds to the nodebug and debug options of the linker This property is displayed only when Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property is selected Default Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs to the Outputs a debugging information to the out output file DEBug put file No NODEBug Does not output a debugging information R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 124 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 10 Build Method The detailed information on the build method is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build simultaneously Select whether to geneate the load module file by compiling assembling linking multi ple files simultaneously The files with the individual build options and files to be executed prior to the build are excluded from runing a build simultaneously See 2 16 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously for details about run ing a build simultaneously Default Yes How to Select from the drop
54. From the Compile Options tab Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area and Sec tion name of switch statement branch table area in the Object category Remarks The default for this option is section P P C C D D B B L L W W In the same way as in V 1 00 if you want to output the literal area in the C section rather than output a separate L section select section L C Except for changing the L section to the same section name as that of the C section the same section name cannot be specified for the sections for different areas For the translation limit of the section name length refer to Translation Limits R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 371 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE stuff lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format stuts Description When the stuff option is specified all variables are allocated to 4 byte 2 byte or 1 byte boundary alignment sections depending on the alignment value see table B 4 Table B 4 Correspondences between Variables and Their Output Sections When stuff Option is Specified Variable Type Alignment Value for Variable Section to Which Variable Belongs const qualified variables 4 2 1 Initialized variables Uninitialized variables
55. If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Compile Options C tab will be displayed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 44 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 Figure 2 69 Property Panel Individual Compile Options C Tab Property cj main cpp Property Bi E Source Language of the C source file C lang cpp Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at the head of compiling units Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output No nomessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Changes the warning level messages to information level message No Changes the information level messages to warning level message No Changes the informationlevel and warning level messages to erro No Permits comment nesting No comment nonest Checks the compatibility with an existing program No Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis B Object Output file type Object module file output obj Object file name Outputs debugging information Yes debug Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates un
56. Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Apply all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignore the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Apply all setting does not close this dialog box Help Display the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 305 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to projects Figure A 38 Add Existing File Dialog Box Add Existing File Look in sample BuildMode2 t DefaultBuild My Recent sample lib Documents main c My Documents 38 My Computer sre name i ile name Function buttons Files of type C source file c The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or file and then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file to add to projects exists The project folder is selected by de
57. May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 57 After Setting up ROM and RAM Sections Section Settings Dialog Box Section Settings Address Section Overlay Overlay2 n dx00003000 ram ram02 ram03 0 000031 00 remit ram2 ramt3 0x00003200 Bsect01 Bsect02 Bsect03 esetPR OxOFFFF8100 C_1 c2 le ES Da D2 D p PintPRG lL GSOFFFFAQOO Psect0l OxOFFFFA100 Psect11 OxOFFFFA200 Psect02 OxOFFFFA300 Psect 2 OKOFFFFA400 Psect03 OxOFFFFASOO Psect13 OxOFFFFAS00 Dsect01 OxOFFFFA620 Dsect02 OKOFFFFAGO Dsect03 When the OK button is clicked on the ROM and RAM sections overlay sections are displayed in the text box Figure 2 58 Section start address Property after Sections Have been Set up B_1 R_1 B_2 R_2 B R SU_S1 00001000 ram01 ram02 ram03 00003000 1am11 3 Build the project Start building of the project A load module that supports the overlay section selection facility will be generated 2 8 Set Librarian Options To set options for the link phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various librarian options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the application project R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 39 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 59 Property Panel Librarian Opti
58. Memo in the Notes category Description of each area 1 Text Input and edit texts in multiple lines By default this dialog box opens with its edit box reflecting the current value of the property selected to call the dialog box Remark Up to 65535 lines and 65535 characters are allowed When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the The characters exceeds the maximum num property that called this dialog box characters ber of restriction in the property that called cannot be specified The current number of this dialog box characters is displayed between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 286 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Placeholder The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in Text a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution Remark This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders
59. Object Options lt Compile Options Object Options gt The following object options are available output noline debug nodebug section stuff nostuff instalign4 instalign8 noinstalign nouse_div_inst R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 366 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE output lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format Default The default for this option is output obj Description This option specifies the output file type The suboptions and output files are shown in the following table If no lt file name gt is specified a file will be generated with an extension that is shown in the following table appended to the source file name input at the beginning Table B 3 Suboption Output Format Suboption Output File Type Extension When File Name is Not Specified prep Source file after preprocessed C C89 C99 source file p C source file pp Assembly language file src Relocatable file obj Absolute file abs Intel hex type file hex Motorola S type file Note Relocatable files are files output from the assembler Absolute files Intel hex type files and Motorola S type files are files output from the optimizing linkage editor This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output file type
60. Performs inter module optimization assuming that the source files comprise the entire program However operation is not guaranteed if the preconditions are not met See whole_program for details about the preconditions Yes Level 2 Perform with merging files merge_files ip_optimize Merges two or more C source files and performs inter module optimization This item is displayed only when two or more source files are added to the proj ect Yes Level 1 Perform ip_optimize Performs inter module optimization for each file No ztENESAS Does not perform inter module optimiza tion Page 146 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Converts floating point Selects whether to convert floating point constant division into multiplication of the constant division into corresponding reciprocals as constants multiplication This corresponds to the approxdiv option of the compiler Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes approxdiv Converts floating point constant division into multiplication No Does not convert floating point constant division into multiplication Omits a check of the Selects whether to omit a check of the range for conversion between the floating type range for conversion and unsigned integer type between the floating When Yes is specified code performance of the relevant type conversion process
61. REcord H16 data records Yes Expansion HEX record Outputs the Expansion HEX REcord H20 record for the data records Yes 32 bit HEX record Outputs the 32 bit HEX record for REcord H32 the data records No Outputs various data records according to each address Unifies the record size Selects whether to output data with the specified data record regardless of the address range This corresponds to the record option of the linker This property is displayed only when S record file FOrm Stype in the Hex file for mat property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes S1 record REcord S1 Outputs the S1 record for the data records Yes S2 record REcord S2 Outputs the S2 record for the data records Yes S3 record REcord S3 Outputs the S3 record for the data records No Outputs various data records according to each address Fills the unused areas Selects whether to fill the unused areas in the output ranges with the value in the output ranges This corresponds to the space option of the linker with the value When Not convert in the Load module file convert format property is selected or a convert file name in the Division conversion file property is not specified this prop erty is not displayed Default Division conversion file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit
62. Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area wW Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sectio No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment No Adjustment for instruction in branch None noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIY DIVU and the FDIY instruc Yes E Optimization Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Loop expansion Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Performs inline expansion automatically Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion method of the switch statement Compiler automatically selects case auto Generation mode of the standard library Selects the generation mode of the standard library Common Options Compile Options Assemble Options Link Options Hex Output Options 5 s 2 9 1 Set the output of a standard library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Library Generate Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a standard library file is made with the Object
63. Source 2 Object 3 List 4 Optimization 5 Output File 6 MISRA C rule check 7 Others Figure A 16 Property Panel Individual Compile Options C Tab Property j main c Property B Source Language of the C source file C C89 lang c Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at the head of compiling units Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output No nomessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Changes the warning level messages to information level messages No Changes the information level messages to warning level messages No Changes the information level and warning level messages to error No Permits comment nesting No comment nonest Checks the compatibility with an existing program No Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis E Object Output file type Object module file output obj Object file name Outputs debugging information Yes debug Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sectior No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byt
64. The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 May 20 2014 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 287 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path Figure A 28 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing Path Path Edit Path One path per one line Fy Browse C Permit non existent path C Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D worksample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomToolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite 3 iacth M l all a asenle P V EAE A VPE T SOPI T OPE PT PA gt toes te Path Edit Path One path per one line Fe
65. When form object relocate library is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 514 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE entry lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format entry lt symbol name gt lt address gt Description Specifies the execution start address with an externally defined symbol or address The address is specified in hexadecimal notation If the specified value starts with a letter from A to F symbols are searched first and if no corresponding symbol is found the value is interpreted as an address Values starting with 0 are always interpreted as addresses For a C function name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the program For a C function name except for the main function enclose the definition name with double quotes in the program including param eter strings If the parameter is void specify as lt function name gt If the entry symbol is specified at compilation or assembly this option precedes the entry symbol This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Specifies execution start address and Execution start address in the Input cate gory Examples entry _main Specifies main function in C C as the execution start address entry init Specifies init function in C
66. as the execution start address entry 100 Specifies 0x100 as the execution start address Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable When optimization with undefined symbol deletion optimize symbol_ delete is specified the execution start address should be specified If it is not specified the specification of the optimization with undefined symbol deletion is unavailable Optimization with undefined symbol deletion is not available when an address is specified with this option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 515 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noprelink lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format noprelink Default If this option is not specified the prelinker is initiated Description Disables the prelinker initiation The prelinker supports the functions to generate the C template instance automatically and to check types at run time When the C template function and the run time type test function are not used specify the noprelink option to reduce the link time This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Initiates the prelinker in the Input category From the Librarian Options tab Initiates the prelinker in the Input category Remarks When extract or strip is specified t
67. mization level property is specified 5 Others Other detailed information Outputs the copyright Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes float_order Optimizes modification of the operation order in a floating point expression No Does not optimize modification of the operation order in a floating point expres sion on library generators are displayed and the configuration can be changed Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the nologo option of the library generator This property is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the Generation mode of the standard library property in the Mode category Default No nologo How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 213 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before library generator processing before library gener Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ate processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode n
68. noschedule Does not schedule instructions Optimizes accesses to external variables Selects whether to optimize accesses to external variables This corresponds to the nomap smap and map option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Optimizes the inner module smap Optimizes accesses to external variables which are defined in the file to be com piled Yes Optimizes the inter module map Optimizes accesses to external variables No nomap Disables optimization for accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specify the level of inter module optimization such as function merging This correspon ds to the ip_optimize option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Level 1 Perform ip_optimize Performs inter module optimization for each file No ztENESAS Does not perform inter module optimiza tion Page 259 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Converts floating point Selects whether to convert floating point constant division into multiplication of the constant division into corresponding reciprocals as constants multiplication This corresponds to
69. only Library is displayed Default For other than the library project Execute Module Load Module File For the library project Library How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Execute Module Load Generates a load module file and hex file Module File during a build The load module file will be the debug tar get Execute Module Hex Generates a load module file and hex file File during a build The hex file will be the debug target Library Generates a library file during a build Intermediate file output folder Specify the folder which the intermediate file is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or sub project folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014
70. type and unsigned ing is improved integer type The conversion result may however differ from C C language specifications so take care on this point This corresponds to the simple_float_conv option of the compiler Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes simple_float_conv Omits part of the type conversion pro cessing for the floating type No Does not omit part of the type conversion processing for the floating type Performs optimization Selects whether to perform optimization considering the type of the data indicated by considering the type of the pointer the data indicated by Although the performance of object code is generally better than when alias noansi the pointer is specified the results of execution may differ according to whether alias ansi or alias noansi is specified This corresponds to the alias option of the compiler Default No alias noansi How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes alias ansi Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer No alias noansi Does not perform optimization consider ing the type of the data indicated by the pointer R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 147 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Optimizes modifica Selects whether to optimize modification of the operation order of a floatin
71. zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes scope Divides the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation No noscope Does not divide the optimizing ranges before compilation Schedules the instruc tion taking into consid eration pipeline processing Selects whether to schedule the instruction taking into consideration pipeline process ing This corresponds to the schedule and noscheduleoption of the library generator Default Depends on the optimization level option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes schedule Schedules instructions taking into consid eration pipeline processing No noschedule Does not schedule instructions Optimizes accesses to external variables R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to optimize accesses to external variables This corresponds to the nomap smap and map option of the library generator Default No nomap How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No nomap Disables optimization for accesses to external variables Yes Optimizes the inner module smap Optimizes accesses to external variables which are defined in the file to be com piled
72. 00 2tENESAS Page 214 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Commands executed after library generate processing A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specify the command to be executed after library generator processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generator processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and th
73. 2 size __ Sfuncl MOV L 00000000H R1 MOV L 00000001H R2 MOV L 00000000H R1 RTS _fune2 MOV L _x R1 ADD 04H R1 R2 BRA _ func1 Examples 2 lt C source code gt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 420 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE static int func int x int y int z return x yt z int func2 return func 3 4 5 lt Output assembly code without ip_optimize gt __ func ADD R3 R1 SUB R2 R1 RTS _func2 MOV L 00000005H R3 MOV L 00000004H R2 MOV L 00000003H R1 BRA __S func lt Output assembly code with ip_optimize gt __ func MOV L 00000004H RTS _func2 MOV L 00000005H MOV L 00000004H MOV L 00000003H BRA __Sfunc Remarks Inter file optimization is also applied when this option is used with merge_files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 421 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE merge_files lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format merge_files Description This option allows the compiler to compile multiple C source files and output the results to a single object file The name of the object file is specified by the output option If no name is specified the filename will be that of the first source file plus a filename extension that corresponds to the selected output format If src or obj is selected as the out
74. 2 13 5 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu Figure 2 99 Compile Item 3B File e main c Open i Add 2 Compile Ei gel Open with Internal Editor FQ Open with Selected Application a Open Folder with Explorer Ga Remove From Project Shift Del Jta Copy Ctrl C ey Paste Ctrl 4 ale Rename F2 a Property R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 61 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 When assembling an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu Figure 2 100 Assemble Item B E File i nan mAnaE Open rE Ev Open with Internal Editor E Open with Selected Application iY Open Folder with Explorer Add gt Remove from Project Shift Del Copy Ctrl C i Paste Ctrl a Rename F2 pas Property 2 13 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar 2 13 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save
75. A linkage error occurs when they are not allocated within the ROM area even though the section is divided Specify an address range in which a section can be allocated in hexadecimal notation The memory type attri bute is used for the inter module optimization FIX for lt memory type gt is used to specify a memory area where the addresses are fixed e g I O area If the address range of lt start gt lt end gt specified for FIX overlaps with that specified for another memory type the setting for FIX is valid When lt memory type gt is ROM or RAM and the section size is larger than the specified memory range sub option STRIDE can be used to divide a section and allocate them to another area of the same memory type Sections are divided in module units cpu ROM 0 FFFF RAM 10000 1FFFF Checks that section addresses are allocated within the range from 0 to FFFF or from 10000 to 1FFFF Object movement is not provided between different attributes with the inter module optimization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 557 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When section addresses are not allocated within the range from 100 to 1FF the linkage editor divides the sec tions in module units and allocates them to the range from 400 to 4FF Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable When cpusstride and memory low are spec
76. Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Outputs debugging information Yes debug Optimization level 2 optimize 2 2 Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Outputs a source list file No nolistfile 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 S System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 4 Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Using libraries 0 Outputs debugging information Yes Outputs to the output filey DEBug Optimization type No optimize NOOPtimize Section start address B_1 R_1 B_2 R_2 B R SU S1 04 PResetPRG OFFFFEO00 C_1 C_2 C C DSEC lt __ 4 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Common Options Compile Options I The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Help menu Property panel dedicated items Context menu How to open AssembleOptions Hex Output Options Library Generate Options Select either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool nod
77. All Messages tab Remark Up to 500000 lines of messages can be displayed If 500001 lines or more of messages are out put then the excess lines are deleted oldest first The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Message Type Example Default Description Normal message AaBbCe Character color Black Information on something Background White color Warning AaBbCe Character color Blue Warning for the operation Background Normal color color Error message AaBbCce Character color Red Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background Light gray color R20UT2998Ev0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 276 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message the Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when building b Display help help with regard to the message in the line is shown by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing the F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error m
78. BIG5 code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in big5 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category Remarks When big5 is specified the same character coding must be selected for the outcode option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 467 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE gb2312 lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format gb2312 Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in GB2312 code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in gb2312 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category Remarks When gb2312 is specified the same character coding must be selected for the outcode option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 468 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE outcode lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format outcode euc sjis latinl utf8 big5 gb2312 Default The d
79. Command Options 00 0 cette teens 470 B 1 3 3 Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options 2 0 0 cect tees 508 B 1 3 4 Library Generator Options 0 0 0 0c ett eee 582 Revision Record 000 eee ee ee eee ee eee 593 CubeSuite V2 02 00 1 GENERAL 1 GENERAL This chapter introduces the processing of compiling performed by CC RX and provides an example of program devel opment using CC RX 1 1 Overview This section describes the components and processing flow of CC RX CC RX is comprised of the 4 executable files listed below 1 ccrx Compile driver 2 asrx Assembler 3 rlink Optimizing linkage editor 4 lbgrx Library generator CC RX Flow illustrates the CC RX processing flow R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 8 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 1 GENERAL Figure 1 1 CC RX Processing Flow cicgg source file cicgg source file c cpp cc cp mx f driver reft rebackix i Compiler Not executing Se directly Assembly Assembly language file language file src sre Object module file obj Object module file 0bj Optimizing linkage editor Load module file abs Debugger File outout after preprocessing CP PR Controller by the compile driver Library generator Standard library file lilo User library file lib Optimizing lin
80. Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format Description When this option is specified the generated code does not use the PID register Selection of the PID register according to the settings of the fint_register option is based on the same rule as for the pid option Amaster program called by an application program in which the PID function is enabled needs to be compiled with this option At this time if the fint_register option is selected in the application program the same parameter fint_register should also be selected in the master program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses the PID register for code generation in the CPU category Remarks If the nouse_pid_register option and pid option are selected simultaneously error E0511150 will occur Aregister selected as the PID register also being specified for the base option leads to warning W0511149 For details of the PID function refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 453 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE save_acc lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format Default When this option is omitted it does not generate the saved and restored code of the accumulator ACC ACC0 ACC1 for interrupt functions Description This option generates the saved and restor
81. Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Check rule number besides required rule Specifies the check rule number besides required rule One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number misra2004 required_add in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number from required rule R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the exclusion rule number from required rule One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required misra2004 required_remove in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by t
82. Delete intermediate files and generated files 0 0 0 cee etn 63 2 14 Estimate the Stack Capacity 0 cee 65 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS sacs 623 Sees eon Poe ree ee ee peer eee 66 3 1 Assemble List Fiare siirrt Papas ace Ma DETE tea ett a EREE he Slane Na apg EA ESAERA 66 3 1 1 Source Informationer sirane ts Se ee eed ah we oe ie ek why eee a 66 3 1 2 Object Information s siia e wea eva eee we eee ok gid ode bee tae eS ey ae 66 3 1 3 Statistics Information lt yc tte ee Oe ee ee a bh ea Se ep ee cs 68 3 1 4 Compiler Command Specification Information 00 0 cette 69 3 1 5 Assembler Command Specification Information 0000 cece teen eee 69 3 2 Link Maps File ce tcc este bonita a dard ee estes And cee recy Peed ten nde Ache hs fe aed tay See 69 3 2 1 Structure of Linkage List 20 0 ccc tne ents 69 3 2 2 Option Information a ser eee eee dee R ee eg be ee dae deca ede eo 70 3 2 3 Error Information ws sie ois ot Ghee a e aa ne Wa planus Mack ee Beh ele oiling ole dan nae 2 70 3 2 4 Linkage Map Information 0 000 e eee ent eee 71 3 2 5 SyMboliInformationy iara aed ete pee kde a aE weed eee eae Be el Sb ied R 71 3 2 6 Symbol Deletion Optimization Information 0 00 0 72 3 2 7 Cross Reference Information 0 0 cece eet eens 73 3 2 8 Total Section Size a cyeay Beta es we be ee os cee ee pee wd een 74 3 2 9 Vector Information oeer yes Mae ae Eie Pe E a ek an E eae Suen pa acl eee 74 3 2
83. Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Macro definition Specifies the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro names string with one macro name per line The string part can be omitted and in this case the macro name is assumed to be defined This corresponds to the define option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Invalidates the pre Specifies invalidates the predefined macro defined macro If multiple macro names are specified delimit them with a comma example __DBL4 __ SCHAR This corresponds to the undefine option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Specify The Predefined Macro dialog box which appears change when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Enables information Specifies whether information level messages are output level message output This corresponds to the message and nomessage options o
84. File category From the Librarian Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Library Generate Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category Description of each area 1 Message area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 312 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Show messages related to folders selected in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select a folder to set in the caller of the dialog box By default the folder set in the caller is selected Remark When the area is blank or the path which does not exist is entered C Documents and Set tings user name My Documents is selected instead Function buttons Button Function Make New Folder Creates a new folder in the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New Folder OK The designated folder path is set to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 313 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Excluding File dialog box
85. From the Library Generate Options tab Conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants in the Optimization category Remarks Constant multiplication that can be performed through only shift operations and division and residue that can be per formed through only bitwise AND operations cannot be controlled by the const_div option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 400 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noconst_div lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format noconst_div Default The default for this option is noconst_div when the size option has been specified Description When noconst_div is specified the corresponding division and remainder instructions are used for calculating divi sion and remainders of integer constants in the source file except divisions and remainders of unsigned integers by powers of two This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants in the Optimization category Remarks Constant multiplication that can be performed through only shift operations and division and residue that can be per formed through only bitwise AND operatio
86. Generate Options tab Configuration library Enables runtime library Enables ctype h C89 C99 Enables math h C89 C99 Enables mathf h C89 C99 Enables stdarg h C89 C99 Enables stdio h C89 C99 Enables stdlib h C89 C99 Enables string h C89 C99 Enables ios EC Enables new EC Enables complex EC Enables string EC Enables complex h C99 Enables fenv h C99 Enables inttypes h C99 Enables wchar h C99 and Enables wctype h C99 in the Standard Library category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 584 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE output lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format output lt file name gt Default The default for this option is output stdlib lib Description This option specifies an output file name This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library Generate Options tab Path of the output folder and Output file name in the Object cate gory R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 585 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nofloat lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format nofloat Description This option creates simple I O functions that do not support the conversion of floating point numbers f e E 9 G When inputting or outputting files tha
87. Generates and edits library files Converts files into Motorola S type files Intel hex type files and binary files Command description format rlink A lt option gt A lt file name gt A lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt suboption gt Library Generator lbgrx Ibgrx is the startup command for the library generator Command description format lbgrx A lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt suboption gt Command Description Examples Compilation Assemble and Linkage by One Command Perform all steps below by a single command Compile C C source files tp1 c and tp2 c in cerx After compilation assemble the files in asrx After assemble link the files in rlink to generate an absolute file tp abs Command description ccrx isa rxvl output abs tp abs tpl c tp2 c Remarks 1 When the output type specification of the output option is changed to output sty the file after linkage will be generated as a Motorola S type file Remarks 2 An intermediate file generated during the absolute file generation process assembly language file or relocatable file is not saved Only a file of the type specified by the output option is to be generated Remarks 3 In order to specify assemble options and linkage options that are valid for only the assembler and optimizing linkage editor in cerx use the asmemd Inkcmd asmopt and Inkopt optio
88. Header file h hpp inc Object module file obj Library file lib Other file doc xml etc Build tool generated files The following files generated by the build tool appear directly below hereafter referred to as Build tool gener the node generated during the build atediles node For other than library projects Load module file abs Hex file hex S record file mot Binary data file bin Map file map For library projects Library file lib Relocatable module file rel Map file map lbp Files displayed under this node cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always placed lower than the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after build ing Startup This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the hereafter referred to as Startup node project This node is always placed lower than the File node Category name Categories that the user created to categorize files see 2 3 4 hereafter referred to as category node Classify a file into a category This node is always placed lower than the File node Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project hereafter referred to as Subproject node When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Prop erty panel You can change the settings Remark When more t
89. If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with a comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the nomessage option of the compiler This property is displayed only when No nomessage in the Enables information level message output property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the warning level messages to information level mes sages Selects whether to change the warning level messages to information level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes All Changes all warning level messages to the infor change_messa mation level messages ge information Yes Specifies Changes the warning level messages with the error number specified error numbers to the information level change_messa messages ge informa tion lt Error Number gt No Does not change the warning level messages to the information level messages Error number of warn ing level message Specifies error number of warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the rang
90. Kbytes When base ram cregister B gt is specified accesses to initialized variables and uninitialized variables are per formed relative to the specified register B Note that the total RAM data size must be within 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes When lt address value gt lt register C gt is specified accesses to an area within 64Kbytes to 256 bytes from the address value among the areas whose addresses are already determined at the time of compilation are performed relative to the specified register C Note This value is in the range from 64 to 256 Kbytes and depends on the total size of variables to be accessed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Base register for ROM Base register for RAM Address value of base reg ister that sets the address value Register of base register that sets the address value in the CPU category Remarks The same register cannot be specified for different areas Only a single register can be specified for each area If a register specified by the fint_register option is specified by this option an error will occur When the pid option is selected base rom lt register gt cannot be selected If selected message W05230339 is out put as a warning and the selection of base rom lt register gt is disabled R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 446 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERE
91. Outputs the informa tion before DEFINE replacement Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show defini tions Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement No Does not output the information before DEFINE replacement Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No Does not output the assembler macro expan sion statements ztENESAS Page 141 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 4 Optimization A WINDOWS REFERENCE The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Optimization level Selects optimization
92. ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional Inputs the compile options to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line The specified option is displayed Default Configuration of the compile option How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 242 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V
93. Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 8 Set as build target Property El Bui Set as build target Remark The files that can be applied this function are C source files C source files assembler source files object module files and library files 2 3 4 Classify a file into a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New Category from the context menu R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 17 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 9 Add New Category Item For File Node EBE File za Remove from Project Shift Del Add Fie Add New File i Cop Ctrl C c Wi Add New Category ey Paste Ctrl a Rename F2 Property Figure 2 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding Category Node Project Tree 9 8 L sample Project RSF56108W xBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Fre 5 New sores Remarks 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name
94. SAMe_code instruction sequence No Does not create a subroutine for the same instruction sequence Minimum code size Specifies the minimum code size for the optimization This corresponds to the samesize option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes OPtimize SAMe_code in the Creates a subroutine for the same instruction sequence property is specified Default 1E hexadecimal number How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 8 to 7FFF hexadecimal number Replaces an instruc Selects whether to replace an instruction with a smaller size instruction tion with a smaller size This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker instruction This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Replaces an instruction with a smaller mize SHort_format size instruction No Does not replace an instruction with a smaller size instruction Optimizes branch Selects whether to optimize branch instruction size instruction size This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPtimize Branch Optimizes branch instruction size acc
95. Section information section attribute size and section name R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 68 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 1 4 Compiler Command Specification Information The file names and options specified on the command line when the compiler is invoked are output The compiler com mand specification information is output at the beginning of the list file The following figure shows an example of com mand specification information output CPU TYPE 1 ISA RXV1 COMMAND PARAMETER 2 output src C tmp elp1894 sample srce nologo show source sample c Description Selected microcomputer File names and options specified for the compiler 3 1 5 Assembler Command Specification Information The file names and options specified on the command line when the assembler is invoked are output The assembler command specification information is output at the end of the list file The following figure shows an example of command specification information output Cpu Type 1 ISA RXV1 Command Parameter 2 output sample obj nologo listfile sample lst Description Microcomputer selected for the assembler File names and options specified for the assembler 3 2 Link Map File This section explains the link map file The link map has information of the link result It can be referenced f
96. Select from the drop down list change Restriction No optimize NOOPti Does not execute optimization for a mod mize ule All OPtimize Provides all optimizations Speed oriented optimiza Provides optimization for speed tion OPtimize SPeed Safe optimization OPti Provides safe optimization mize SAFe Custom Performs optimization for the specified options Deletes variables Selects whether to delete variables functions that are not referenced functions that are not This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker referenced This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Deletes variables functions that are not mize SYmbol_delete referenced No Does not delete variables functions that are not referenced R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 170 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Creates a subroutine Selects whether to create a subroutine for the same instruction sequence for the same instruc This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker tion sequence This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Creates a subroutine for the same mize
97. Settings tab This tab shows the detailed information on each C source file C source file assembler source file object module file and library file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Figure A 11 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting C Source File Property e main c Property E Build Set as build target Yes Set individual compile option No File type C source Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Figure A 12 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting C Source File Property main cpp Property E Build Set as build target Yes Set individual compile option No File type Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Figure A 13 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Assembler Source File Property asm main sre Property E Build Set as build target Yes Set individual assemble option No File type Assembly source file Set as build target Selects whether to build this file R20UT2998Ev0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 216 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Figure A 14 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Object Module File Property obj obj obj Property E Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Sel ings File Information Figure A 15 Property Panel
98. Sunday October 06 2011 6 29 05 PM Figure 2 93 Build Execution Results Rapid Build gt sample c 4 gt DefaultBuild sample abs DefaultBuild sample mot Optimizing Linkage Editor Completed EOF s _All Messages Rapid Build Build Tool Remarks 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed Remarks 2 When a file name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file Remarks 3 If you press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message you can display the help related to that line s message R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 57 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Files generated by the build tool appear on the Project Tree panel under the Build tool generated files node Figure 2 94 Build Tool Generated Files Project Tree 2 0 8 UR sample Project RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool Ta Program Analyzer Analyze Tool j File j Build tool generated Files Remark Caution i abs sample abs i mot sample mot i map sample map Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as follows For application projects Load module file abs Hex file hex S record file mot Binary data file bin Map file map For library proje
99. When library u is specified a user library is output Default is library u hexadecimal Outputs a HEX file For details of the HEX format refer to HEX File Format stype Outputs an S type file For details of the S type format refer to S Type File Format binary Outputs a binary file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output file type in the Output File Type and Path category From the Hex Output Options tab Hex file format in the Hex Format category Remarks Table B 15 shows relations between output formats and input files or other options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 518 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Table B 15 Relations Between Output Format and Input File or Other Options Output Format Specified Option Enabled File For Specifiable Option mat Absolute strip specified Absolute file input output Other than above Object file input library binary debug nodebug sdebug cpu Relocatable file start rom entry output map hide optimize noop Binary file timize samesize symbol_forbid Library file samecode_forbid section_forbid absolute_forbid compress rename delete define fsymbol stack noprelink memory msg_unused show symbol reference xreference jump_entries_for_pic aligned_section Relocate extract specified Library file library output O
100. Yes show defi nitions Outputs the information before replacement specified with DEFINE No Does not output the information before replace ment specified with DEFINE Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the macro expansion statements No Does not output the macro expansion state ments ztENESAS Page 119 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 7 Frequently Used Options for Link The detailed information on frequently used options during linking is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the library project Using libraries Specifies an input library file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the library option of the linker The library
101. a new section in a row in the Overlayn column that corresponds to the section group address currently selected in the Address Section area Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 320 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Section Address dialog box This dialog box is used to enter an address when adding or modifying a section Figure A 47 Section Address Dialog Box Section Address 1 4 Address The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Section Settings dialog box select an address in the Address Section area and then click the Add or Mod ify button Description of each area 1 Address Enter the first address of a section in this area The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number 0 is set by default Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and sets the input address to the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box Adding a section group address Inserts a blank row at the appropriate position among other addresses Changing the section group address Moves the entire group the address and all sections that belong to the group to the appropriate posi
102. allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte tuff W boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 228 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Adjustment for instruc tion in branch Selects adjustment for instruction in branch This corresponds to the noinstalign instalign4 and instalign8 option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction None noinstalign Does not align instructions at branch destina tions Execution in 4 bytes instalign4 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Execution in 4 bytes Contains each loop head instalign4 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 4 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign4 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Execution in 8 bytes instal
103. are supported Apply specified rule number misra2004 apply Checks the source code against the rules with the selected numbers Ignore specified rule number misra2004 ignore Checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers Apply rules that are classified as required misra2004 required Checks the source code against the rules of the required type Apply rules that are classified as required and speci fied rule number misra2004 required_ add Checks the source code against the rules of the required type and the rules with the selected numbers Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required misra2004 required_ remove Checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers among the rules of the required type Apply rules that are described in the specified file misra2004 lt file name gt Checks the source code against the rules with the numbers written in the specified file Not apply rule Does not apply MISRA C rule Rule number descrip tion file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies Rule number description file misra2004 rule file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of th
104. box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the warning Selects whether to change the warning level messages to information level mes level messages to sages information level mes This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler sages Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes All Changes all warning level messages to the infor change_messa mation level messages ge information Yes Specifies Changes the warning level messages with the error number specified error numbers to the information level change_messa messages ge informa tion lt Error Number gt No Does not change the warning level messages to the information level messages Error number of warn Specifies error number of warning level message ing level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message information lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the warning level messages to information level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the com
105. category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Selects the build mode to be used during build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction DefaultBuild Builds with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is Builds with the build mode that is added to added to the project the project other than DefaultBuild other than Default Build 2 CPU The detailed information on the CPU is displayed and the configuration can be changed Instruction set Selects the instruction set architecture architecture This corresponds to the isa option of the compiler and library generator isa option of the assembler Default The default value is set by selected device on creating project How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction RXv1 architecture Generates an instruction code for the isa rxv1 RXv1 architecture RXv2 architecture Generates an instruction code for the isa rxv2 RXv2 architecture None It allows the Microcontroller type setting Microcontroller type Selects the microcontroller type This corresponds to the cpu option of the compiler and library generator cpu option of the assembler
106. category Examples A jump table for branching to external definition symbols in the sections sct2 and sct3 is output to test jmp jump_entries_for_pic sct2 sct3 output test abs Example of a file output to test jmp OPTIMIZING LI E EDITOR G E E 2009 07 19 glb _func glp _func SECTION P _funcOl MOV L 1000 JMP R14 _func02 MOV L 2000 JMP R14 END Remarks This option is invalid when form object relocate library or strip is specified The generated jump table is output to the P section Only the program section can be specified for the type of section in the section name R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 538 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE List Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options List Options gt The following list options are available list show R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 539 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE list lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options List Options gt Format list lt file name gt Description Specifies list file output and a list file name If no list file name is specified a list file with the same name as the output file or first output file is created with the extension Ibp when form library or extract is specified or map in other cases T
107. category Figure 2 62 Object Category hier Path of the output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame lib teates a functional cutdown version of 70 functions Creates the reentrant library No 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Path of the output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholder BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name BuildModeName is set by default 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName hex is set by default R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 41 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 10 Preparation before Using the PIC PID Function In the PIC PID function a program whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID is called an application and the program necessary to execute an application is called the master When the application and master are built the option settings related to the PIC PID f
108. changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 130 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Language of the C Selects language of the C source file source file This corresponds to the lang option of the compiler This property is displayed only when in the property is specified Default C C839 lang c How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction C C83g Compiles as a C C89 source file lang c C99 Compiles as a C C99 source file lang c99 Language of the C Selects language of the C source file source file This option corresponds to the lang option of the compiler This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is specified Default C lang cpp How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction C Compiles as an EC source file lang cpp EC Compiles as a C source file lang ecpp Additional include Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file paths The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name Mic
109. check_language_extension lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format check_language_extension Description This option enables complete checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code where it would other wise be suppressed due to individual extensions from the C C language specification With the default misra2004 option the compiler does not proceed with checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules under the condition given below To enable complete checking specify the check_language_extension option Condition The function has no prototype declaration rule 8 1 and pragma entry or pragma interrupt is specified for it This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs message of the enhanced key word and extended specifications in the MISRA C rule check category Example pragma interrupt vfunc extern void service void void vfunc void service Function vfunc for which pragma interrupt is specified has no prototype declaration Even when this function is compiled with misra2004 all specified the message on rule 8 1 is not displayed unless the check_language_extension option is specified Remarks This option is ignored when the misra2004 option has not been specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 365 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE
110. code conflicting with PID is written in the assembly code it will not be checked Arelocatable object with the PID function enabled cannot be linked with a relocatable object with the PID function dis abled If a PID register specified by the pid option is also specified by the base option error F0553111 will be output If the pid option and nouse_pid_register option are selected simultaneously error F0553103 will be output For the PID function also refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 497 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nouse_pid_register lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format nouse_pid_register Description This option generates a relocatable object that was generated without using the PID register If the PID register is used in the assembly language source file error message E0552058 will be output Specifying this option however does not lead to an error if a substitute register defined in the assembler specifications is used as the PID register A master program called by an application program in which the PID function is enabled needs to be assembled with this option At this time if the fint_register option is selected in the application program the same parameter fint_register should also be selected in the master program This option is equivalent to the following property
111. code performance of the relevant type conversion process type and unsigned ing is improved integer type The conversion result may however differ from C C language specifications so take care on this point This corresponds to the simple_float_conv option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes simple_float_conv Omits part of the type conversion pro cessing for the floating type No Does not omit part of the type conversion processing for the floating type Performs optimization Selects whether to perform optimization considering the type of the data indicated by considering the type of the pointer the data indicated by Although the performance of object code is generally better than when alias noansi the pointer is specified the results of execution may differ according to whether alias ansi or alias noansi is specified This corresponds to the alias option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes alias ansi Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer No alias noansi Does not perform optimization consider ing the type of the data indicated by the pointer R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 236 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS R
112. code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in SJIS code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in latin1 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 465 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE utf8 lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format utf 8 Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in SJIS code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in utf8 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category Remarks The utf8 option is valid only when the lang c99 option has been specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 466 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE big5 lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format big5 Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in
113. commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options C tab for a C source file Individual Compile Options C tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 1 2 Create a user library The procedure for creating a user library is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 11 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When you create a new project set a library project Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 12 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active Remarks 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 12 6 Add a build mode Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler library generator and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options
114. compile processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional Inputs the compile options to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Blank How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line The specified option is displayed Default Command line number of defined items How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 153 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the assemble phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Source 2 Object 3 List 4 Optimization 5 Others Figure A 6 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Character code of an input program SJIS codef sjis E Object Outputs debugging in
115. default output file name for these files is both func obj To avoid this problems set the output folder for each of those files to a different folder with the individual build options for the source files Changing the output folder of the C source file is made with the Path of the output folder property in the Object category from the Individual Compile Options C tab Changing the output folder of the C source file is made with the Path of the output folder property in the Object category from the Individual Compile Options C tab Changing the output folder of the assembler source file is made with the Path of the output folder prop erty in the Object category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See Set build options at the file level for how to set the individual build options Cautions 2 If source files with the same name are added the target file cannot opened during debugging Cautions 3 Up to 5000 files can be added to the main project or subproject When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the file The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Assembler source file src Header file h hpp inc Map file map lbp Hex file hex S
116. dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 194 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Fills the unused areas Selects whether to fill the unused areas in the output ranges with the value in the output ranges This corresponds to the space option of the linker with the value When Not convert in the Load module file convert format property is selected or a convert file name in the Division conversion file property is not specified this prop erty is not displayed Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Random SPace Ran Fills the unused areas in the out dom put ranges with random values Yes Specification value Fills the unused areas in the out SPace lt numerical value gt put ranges with user specified hexadecimal value No Does not fill the unused areas in the output ranges with data Output padding data Specifies the output padding data This corresponds to the space option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes Specification value SPace lt numerical value gt in the Fills the unused areas in the output ranges with the value property is specified Default FF hexadecimal numb
117. enabled How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Enables the file to write No Does not enable the file to write 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add memos to the file Add one item in one line The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 273 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category that the user added File node and Build tool generated files node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes Figure A 20 Property Panel Category Information Tab Property New category Property E Category Information Category name New category Notes Category name This is the name of this category The category name can be between 1 and 200 characters Also the category name colored in gray is fixed n Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed information on the category is display
118. extensions are as follows Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal hex S record file FOrm Stype mot Binary data file FOrm Binary bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default Division conversion file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 255 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified 9
119. file 4 Files of type area Specify the executable file type of the application to open the file Executable format default Program exe All Files All the formats R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 331 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Open Opens the file with the specified application Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 332 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a link order specification file to import to the Link Order dialog box Figure A 54 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File O sample QoQ DefaultBuild LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents 3 Desktop My Documents ys My Computer File name a iles of type Link order specification file mtls The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Import button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the link order specification file exists Cancel Function buttons The project folder is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the sec
120. file in the Frequency Used Options for Hex Output category From the Link Options tab Path of the output folder Output file name in the Output category From the Hex Output Options tab Output folder Output file name Division output file in the Output cate gory From the Librarian Options tab Path of the output folder Output file name in the Output category Examples output filel abs 0 ffff file2 abs 10000 1fffFf Outputs the range from 0 to Oxffff to file1 abs and the range from 0x10000 to 0x1 ffff to file2 abs output filel abs secl sec2 file2 abs sec3 Outputs the sec1 and sec2 sections to file1 abs and the sec3 section to file2 abs Remarks When a file is output in section units while the CPU type is RX Family in big endian the section size should be a mul tiple of 4 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 525 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE map lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format map lt file name gt Description Outputs the external symbol allocation information file that is used by the compiler in optimizing access to external variables When lt file name gt is not specified the file has the name specified by the output option or the name of the first input file and the extension bls If the order of the declaration of variables in the external symbo
121. for ROM and RAM patch Selects avoidance or non avoidance of a problem specific to the CPU type pic Enables the PIC function pid Enables the PID function nouse_pid_register The PID register is not used in code generation Other Options logo Selects the output of copyright information nologo Selects the non output of copyright information subcommand Specifies a file for including command options euc The character codes of input programs are interpreted as EUC codes sjiS The character codes of input programs are interpreted as SJIS codes latin1 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as ISO Latin1 codes big5 The character codes of input programs are interpreted as BIG5 codes gb2312 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS The character codes of input programs are interpreted as GB2312 codes Page 471 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Source Options lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt The following source options are available include define chkpm chkfpu chkdsp R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 472 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE include lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt Format include lt path name gt Default The include fil
122. gory From the Library Generate Options tab Loop expansion and Expansion maximum number in the Optimiza tion category Remarks This option is invalid when optimize 0 or optimize 1 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 391 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE inline lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format inline lt numeric value gt Default The default for this option is inline 100 Description These options specify whether to automatically perform inline expansion of functions A value from 0 to 65535 is specifiable as lt numeric value gt When the inline option is specified the compiler automatically performs inline expansion However inline expansion is not performed for the functions specified by pragma noinline The user is able to use inline lt numeric value gt to specify the allowed increase in the function s size due to the use of inline expansion For example when inline 100 is specified inline expansion will be performed until the function size has increased by 100 size is dou bled The default for this option is determined based on the optimize option and speed or size option specifications For details refer to the speed or size option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Performs inline expansion automatically and Maximum increasing rate o
123. in conditional assembly Outputs the informa Specifies the contents of the assemble list file tion before DEFINE Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement replacement This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show defi Outputs the information before replacement nitions specified with DEFINE No Does not output the information before replace ment specified with DEFINE R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 157 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements 4 Optimization Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs the macro expansion statements show expan sions No Does not output the macro expansion state ments The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category
124. in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses the PID register for code generation in the CPU category Remarks If the nouse_pid_register option and pid option are selected simultaneously error F0553103 will be output If a register specified by the nouse_pid_register option is also specified by the base option error F0553112 will be output For the PID function also refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 498 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Other Options lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt The following other options are available logo nologo subcommand euc Sjis latin4 big5 gb2312 R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 499 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE logo lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format logo Default The copyright notice is output Description The copyright notice is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs the copyright in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 500 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nologo lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format nologo Default The copyright notice is output
125. in the Object category Remarks An intermediate file used to generate a file of the specified type is stored in the specified folder however when no folder has been specified the intermediate file is stored in the current folder R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 367 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noline lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format noline Description This option disables line output during preprocessor expansion Remarks This option is validated when the output prep option has not been specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output file type in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 368 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE debug lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format debug Description When the debug option is specified debugging information necessary for C source debugging is output The debug option is valid even when an optimize option is specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 369 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nodebug lt Compil
126. inc Assembler source file src s Jump table file jmp Symbol address file fsy R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 281 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Library file lib Object module file obj Relocatable file rel Python script file py Text file txt 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of subfolder levels to add to the project The default number is 1 Remark Decimal numbers of up to 10 are allowed When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be spec Fewer than 0 or more than 10 subfolder levels have been specified ified Specify in decimal Function buttons Button A number in other than base 10 format or a string has been specified Function OK The folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder are added to the project And then close the dialog box Cancel Do not add a folder and files and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 282 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 25 Character String
127. instalign8 Instructions at branch destinations are aligned with 8 byte boundaries noinstalign Instructions at branch destinations have no specific alignment nouse_div_inst 2tENESAS Generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instruc tions are used for division and modular division Page 344 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Classification B COMMAND REFERENCE Description List Options listfile A source list file is output nolistfile A source list file is not output show Specifies the contents of the source list file Optimize Options optimize Selects the optimization level goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimiza tion speed Optimization is with emphasis on execution performance size Optimization is with emphasis on code size loop Specifies a maximum number for loop expansion inline Inline expansion is processed automatically noinline Inline expansion is not processed automatically file_inline Specifies a file for inter file inline expansion case Selects the method of expansion for switch statements volatile External variables are handled as if they are all volatile qualified novolatile External variables are handled as if none of them have been declared volatile const_copy Enables constant propagation of const qualified externa
128. instruction queues of the RX CPU and improve the speed of program exe cution by aligning the addresses of branch destination instructions This option has specifications targeting the following usage instalign8 When attempting to improve the speed of CPUs with a 64 bit instruction queue mainly RX600 Series This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Adjustment for instruction in branch in the Object category Notes 1 This is when the instruction size is equal to or smaller than the alignment value If the instruction size is greater than the alignment value alignment is performed only when the number of exceeding points is two or more Notes 2 Alignment is adjusted only for the branch destinations listed above alignment of the other destinations is not adjusted For example when loop is selected alignment of the head of a loop is adjusted but align ment is not adjusted at the branch destination of an if statement that is used in the loop but does not gen erate a loop Example lt C source file gt dlong a int fl int num return num 1 void 2 void void 3 void lt Output code gt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 376 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When compiling with instalign8 specified In the example shown below the head of each function is aligned so that the instructio
129. ios Enables the ios EC and runtime library No Disables the ios EC R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 201 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Enables new EC Selects whether to enable new EC This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default Yes head new How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head new Enables the new EC and runtime library No Disables the new EC Enables com Selects whether to enable complex EC plex EC This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head complex Enables the complex EC and runtime library No Disables the complex EC Enables string EC Selects whether to enable string EC This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head cppstring
130. is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Add Subproject to the project Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the proj ect Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project extension Add New Category The default category name is New category The new category name can be This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified changed to the same name as the existing category node nested 20 levels Set selected pro
131. is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Output additional infor mation for inter mod ule optimization 5 Others Other detailed information Checks for a privileged instruction Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not output additional information for inter module optimization on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed Selects whether to check for a privileged instruction This corresponds to the chkpm option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes chkpm Checks for a privileged instruction No Does not check for a privileged instruction Checks for a floating point operation instruc tion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to check for a floating point operation instruction This corresponds to the chkfpu option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes chkfpu Checks for a floa
132. is set based on external symbol allocation information is gener ated output obj is specified Compile the source file once without specifying these options create an external symbol allocation information file by specifying map lt file name gt at linkage by the optimizing linkage editor and then compile the source file again by specifying map lt file name gt in ccrx This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization cate gory Example lt C source file gt long A B C void func A B C _A R4 Sets the address of A as the base address 1 R4 2 4 R4 Accesses B using the address of A as the base 3 8 R4 Accesses C using the address of A as the base Remarks R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 407 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When the order of the definitions of global variables or static variables has been changed a new external symbol allo cation information file must be created If any option other than the map option in the previous compilation differs from the one in the current compilation or if any contents of a function are changed correct operation is not guaranteed In such a case a new external symb
133. list Restriction Yes nos tuff W Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No ztENESAS Does not allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Page 206 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Adjustment for instruc tion in branch A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects adjustment for instruction in branch This corresponds to the noinstalign instalign4 and instalign8 option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Execution in 4 bytes instalign4 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Execution in 4 bytes Contains each loop head instalign4 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 4 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign4 inmos tloop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Execution in 8 bytes instalign8 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Execution in 8 bytes Contains each loop head instalign8 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 8 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign8 inmos
134. loop option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level and optimi zation type options Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion loop lt numeric value gt ztENESAS Expands loop statements for while and do while Page 232 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Expansion maximum number A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies expansion maximum number This corresponds to the suboption of loop option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Expansion loop lt numeric value gt in the Loop expansion property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 1 to 32 decimal number Performs inline expan sion automatically Selects whether to perform inline expansion automatically This option corresponds to the inline and noinline option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Depends on the optimi Depends on the optimization level and zation level and optimi optimization type options zation type options Yes inline lt numeric Performs inline expansion automatically value gt No noinline Does not perform inline expansion auto mat
135. menu is only enabled when the file or category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below the selected node on the proj ect tree While editing the file name or the category name insert the contents of the clip board Note that this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project when multiple files and category nodes are selected and when the build tool is in operation Rename You can rename the selected project subproject file and category node Press the Enter key to confirm the rename Press the ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file and cate gory node is selected Note that rename is disabled when the build tool is in oper ation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 93 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Context menu 0 When the Project node is selected Build active project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this menu
136. misra2004 required Checks the source code against the rules of the required type Apply rules that are classified as required and speci fied rule number misra2004 required_ add Checks the source code against the rules of the required type and the rules with the selected numbers Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required misra2004 required_ remove Checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers among the rules of the required type Apply rules that are described in the specified file misra2004 lt file name gt Checks the source code against the rules with the numbers written in the specified file Not apply rule Does not apply MISRA C rule Rule number descrip tion file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies Rule number description file misra2004 rule file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are described in the specified file misra2004 lt file name gt in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit
137. of information level and warning level message Other additional options in the Others category From the Library Generate Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Suppresses the number of information level messages Error number of warning level message Error number of information level message Error number of information level and warning level message in the Source category Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Suppresses the number of information level messages Error number of warning level message Error number of information level message Error number of information level and warning level message in the Source category Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category In the General External Tools category of the Option dialog box check Require options at start up in the New reg istration area Then the dialog box automatically opens when an external tool is launched from Tool menu Description of each area 1 Characters input area Input characters a String Input characters in one line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 283 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE By default the current value of the area t
138. of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lisfile Outputs a source list file No nolistfile Disable output of a source list file Outputs the C C source file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the C C source file This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show source Outputs the C C source file No ztENESAS Does not output the C C source file Page 254 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the state ments unsatisfied in conditional assembly A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show condi tionals Outputs the statements unsatisfi
139. of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 159 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed after assemble pro cessing Specifies the command to be executed af
140. on the optimization level and optimization type options How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level and optimi zation type options Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion loop lt numeric value gt ztENESAS Expands loop statements for while and do while Page 208 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Expansion maximum number Specifies expansion maximum number A WINDOWS REFERENCE This corresponds to the suboption of loop option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Expansion loop lt numeric value gt in the Loop expansion property is selected Default 2 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 1 to 32 decimal number Performs inline expan sion automatically Selects whether to perform inline expansion automatically This option corresponds to the inline and noinline option of the library generator Default Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level and optimi zation type options Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Yes inline lt numeric value gt Performs inline expansion automatically No noinline Does not
141. one entered in the Modify Section dialog box New Overlay Adding an overlay section Opens the Add Overlay dialog box Adds the Overlayn column n is a number starting with 1 to the Address Section area Places a new section in a row in the Overlayn column that corre sponds to the section group address currently selected in the Address Section area Remove Deleting the section group address Opens the Unassigned Section dialog box when an address is selected in the Address Section area Deletes the currently selected section from the Address Section area When all of the sections that belong to the section group are selected the entire section group is deleted Deleting the section Deletes the currently selected section from the Address Section area If no sections are left in the section group after deletion the entire section group is deleted If no sections are left in the Overlayn column after deletion the column itself is deleted Moves up the selected section Moves down the selected section Opens the Open dialog box where section setting files can be loaded Clicking on OK in the Open dialog box loads the specified file and shows its data in the Address Section area Opens the Save As dialog box where section settings can be saved in files Clicking on OK in the Save As dialog box stores the settings on the Address Sec tion area in a specified file R2
142. path of the output file under assem bling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ
143. pid 16 ing mode is supported Yes The maximum bit Enables the PID function width of the offset No 32 bit 4 Gbytes addressing mode is sup limitation pid 32 ported No Disables the PID function Uses the PID register Selects whether to use the PID register for code generation for code generation A master program called by an application program in which the PID function is enabled needs to be compiled assembled with this option This corresponds to the nouse_pid_register option of the compiler and library generator the nouse_pid_register option of the assembler This property is displayed only when No in the Enables the PID function property is selected Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Uses the PID register for code generation No Does not use the PID register for code nouse_pid_register generation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 112 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 4 Output File Type and Path The detailed information on output file types and paths is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Select the type of the file to be generated during a build The file type set here will be the debug target For other than the library project only Execute Module Load Module File and Exe cute Module Hex File are displayed For the library project
144. record file mot Text file txt Remarks 1 You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Remarks 2 When the environment is set to use an external editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 16 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Remove a file from a project To remove a file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu In addition the file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 7 Remove from Project Item E File if main Compile IS m Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application GS GI ww by os Open Folder with Explorer Add gt Remove From Project Shift Del Ctrl C Ia o p lt Ge ty A ale Rename F2 A Property 2 3 3 Remove a file from the build target You can remove a specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the
145. setting for unused vector area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the address setting for unused vector area Specifies in the format of symbol or address Specifies the external name of the target function for symbol Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the vect option of the linker Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction 2tENESAS Up to 32767 characters Page 167 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the jump table A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to output the jump table This corresponds to the jump_enitries_for_pic option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes JUMP_ENTRIES_ FOR_PIC Outputs a jump table No Does not output a jump table The section that out puts a jump table to branch to external def inition symbols List Specifies the section that outputs a jump table to branch to external definition sym bols Specifies in the format of section name with one section per line This corresponds to the jump_entry_for_pic option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes JUMP_ENTRIES_FOR_PIC in the Out puts the jump table property is specified Default The secti
146. source file File name c File location _D work sample Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or category node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select file types to create The description is shown at the lower box when a file type is selected File types to be shown are as follows C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file src s Python script file py Text file txt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 279 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to create The default file extension is txt Remark If extensions are not designated the one selected in the File type area are is added Also that if extensions different from the one selected in the File type area are designated the one selected in the File type area is added as an extension for example if you designate aaa txt as a file name and select C source file c as file type the file is named a
147. specified the execution performance of floating point constant division will be improved The pre cision and order of operations may however be changed so take care on this point R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 411 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE enable_register lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format nable_register Description This option is not available in V 2 00 Any specification of this option will simply be ignored and will not lead to an error due to compatibility with former versions R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 412 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE simple_float_conv lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format simpie_float_cony Description This option omits part of the type conversion processing for the floating type When this option is selected the generation code that performs type conversion of the next floating point number changes a Type conversion from 32 bit floating type to unsigned integer type b Type conversion from unsigned integer type to 32 bit floating type c Type conversion from integer type to 64 bit floating type via 32 bit floating type This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Omits a check of the range for conversion between the floating type and unsigned intege
148. subproject in the project the project is always active Remarks 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 12 6 Add a build mode Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Remarks 1 See 2 7 1 Add a user library for the method of adding a user library to the project Remarks 2 Also you can set the link order of object module files see 2 12 2 Set the link order of files Specify the output of a load module Select the type of the load module to be generated see 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler linker library generator and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 7 Set Link Options 2 9 Set Library Generate Options Run a build Run a build see 2 13 Run a Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild see 2 13 2 Run a build of all files Rapid build see 2 13 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 13 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any
149. symbol name list in a module Select Yes SHow SYmbol in the Outputs a symbol name list in a module property When outputting the number of symbol references Select Yes SHow Reference in the Outputs the number of symbol references property When outputting the cross reference information Select Yes SHow Xreference in the Outputs the cross reference information property When outputting the total sizes of sections Select Yes SHow Total_size in the Shows the total sizes of sections property When outputting vector information Select Yes SHow VECTOR in the Outputs vector information property For the relocatable module file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output the linkage list file is made with the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 25 of 596 May 20 2014 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 27 Outputs the linkage list file Property Li Outputs the linkage list file Yes List contents specify LISt Outputs a symbol name list in a module No Outputs the cross reference information No Shows the total sizes of sections No Outputs vector information No To output the linkage list file select Yes List contents specify LISt in the Outputs the linkage list file property When outputting the linkage list file you can select the contents of
150. that function func _fune s PUSH L MOV L MOV L ADD MOV L BSR MOV L RTSD R6 a 1 R6 R6 R14 1 R14 R14 R6 g R6 R1 4 R6 R6 with whole_program The compiler assumes that function g will not call function func and thus 2 will As a result the compiler does not read the value of a in 3 and instead generates a code to use the value written to a in 1 not change the value of a _func PUSH L MOV L MOV L ADD MOV L BSR MOV L RTSD R6 R14 R6 1 R6 R6 R14 gt g R6 R1 4 R6 R6 2 __Sa 1 R14 1 Write a value to a 2 Call g 3 Call a and generates a code to read the value of a in will change the value of a since function g may call 3 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 424 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Microcontroller Options lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt The following microcontroller options are available isa cpu endian round denormalize dbl_size int_to_short signed_char unsigned_char signed_bitfield unsigned_ bitfield auto_enum bit_order pack unpack exception noexception rtti fint_register branch base patch pic pid nouse_pid_register Save_acc R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 425 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B CO
151. the Output category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 23 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 21 Output file name Property For User Library File E Output Output file type User library file FOrm Library U Output file name test lib nables informationlevel message outpul Suppresses the number of information level messages This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name 6 When changing the system library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output category Figure 2 22 Output file name Property For System Library File E Output Output file type System library file FOrm Library S Output file name test lib nables informationlevel message outpul Suppresses the number of information level messages This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name 7 When changing the relocatable module file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on
152. the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are classified as required and specified rule number misra2004 required_add in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number from required rule R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the exclusion rule number from required rule One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number from rules that are classified as required misra2004 required_remove in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters ztENESAS Page 150 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Rule check exclusion Specifies rule check exclusion file file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product i
153. the SuperH family C C compilers a volatile qualified bit field is accessed in the same size as that of the declaration type This option does not output a message regarding allocation of structure members and bit field members When an allocation conscious declaration is made refer to 3 1 4 Internal Data Representation and Areas in User s Manual RX Coding In the R8C and M16C family C compilers fextend_to_int is not specified the generated code has been evaluated without performing generalized integer promotion by a conditional expression Accordingly operation of such a code may differ from a code generated by this compiler R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 361 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE misra2004 lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format misra2004 all apply lt rule number gt lt rule number gt ignore lt rule number gt lt rule number gt required required_add lt rule number gt lt rule number gt required_remove lt rule number gt lt rule number gt lt filename gt Description This option enables checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules and to select specific rules to be used When misra2004 all the compiler checks the source code against all of the rules that are supported When misra2004 apply lt rule numbers gt lt rule number gt the compiler checks the source code against the rule
154. the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No Does not output the assembler macro expansion statements 6 Frequently Used Options for Assemble The detailed information on frequently used options during assembling is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of
155. the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Inputs the link options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the link options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to
156. the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System include paths R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Changes the specified order of the include paths which the system set during assem bling This corresponds to the include option of the assembler Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction ztENESAS Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Page 117 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Macro definition A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the macro name to be defined Specifies in the format of macro namesstring with one macro name per line This corresponds to the define option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button
157. the range for conversion between the floating type and unsigned integer type This corresponds to the simple_float_conv option of the library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes simple_float_conv Omits part of the type conversion pro cessing for the floating type No Does not omit part of the type conversion processing for the floating type Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to perform optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer This corresponds to the alias option of the library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes alias ansi Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer No ztENESAS Does not perform optimization consider ing the type of the data indicated by the pointer Page 212 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Optimizes modifica tion of the operation order of a floating point expression Selects whether to optimize modification of the operation order of a floating point expression This corresponds to the float_order option of the library generator This option is valid only when 2 optimize 2 or Max optimize max in the Opti
158. the same function as define specified in the source file lt string gt can be defined as a macro name by specifying lt macro name gt lt string gt When only lt macro name gt is specified as a suboption the macro name is assumed to be defined Names or integer constants can be written in lt string gt This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Source category Remarks If the macro name specified by this option has already been defined in the source file by define define takes priority If this option is specified for more than one time all specified macro names are valid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 352 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE undefine lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format undefine lt sub gt lt sub gt lt macro name gt Description This option invalidates the predefined macro of lt macro name gt Multiple macro names can be specified by separating them with a comma This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Invalidates the predefined macro in the Source category Remarks For the specifiable predefined macros refer to Predefined Macros If this option is specified for more than one time all specified macro names will be undefined R20UT2
159. the same instruction sequence property is specified Default 1E hexadecimal number How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 8 to 7FFF hexadecimal number Replaces an instruc Selects whether to replace an instruction with a smaller size instruction tion with a smaller size This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker instruction This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPti Replaces an instruction with a smaller mize SHort_format size instruction No Does not replace an instruction with a smaller size instruction R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 121 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Optimizes branch Selects whether to optimize branch instruction size instruction size This corresponds to the optimize option of the linker This property is displayed only when Custom in the Optimization type property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes OPtimize Branch Optimizes branch instruction size accord ing to program allocation information No Does not optimize branch instruction size Section start address Specifies the section start address This corresponds to the start option of the linker Defa
160. the selection of the fpu and nofpu options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 429 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE denormalize lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format denormalize off on Default The default for this option is denormalize off Description This option specifies the operation when denormalized numbers are used to describe floating point constants When denormalize off is specified denormalized numbers are handled as zero When denormalize on is specified denormalized numbers are handled as they are This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Handling of denormalized numbers in floating point constants in the CPU category Remarks This option does not affect the handling of denormalized numbers in floating point operations during program execu tion This option is not automatically enabled by the selection of the fpu and nofpu options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 430 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE dbl_size lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format dbl_size 4 8 Default The default for this option is dbl_size 4 Description This option specifies the precision of the double type and long double type When dbl_ size 4 is specified the double type a
161. tp2 src rlink form abs output tp abs subcommand cmd sub tpl obj tp2 obj Command description 2 asrx isa rxvl tpl srce tp2 sre rlink form abs output tp abs subcommand cmd sub tpl obj tp2 obj Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set options for the RX family C C compiler from CubeSuite On the CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select the View menu gt gt Property The Property panel opens For application projects Select the Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab Library Gen erate Options tab For library projects Select the Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Librarian Options tab You can set the various options for the RX family C C compiler by setting the necessary properties in this tab R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 341 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 1 Property Panel Property a CC RX Property 4 Build Mode Default Build gt CPU gt PIC PID 4 Output File Type and Path Output file type Intermediate file output folder 4 Frequently Used Options for Compile Additional include paths System include paths Execute Module Load Module File BuildModeName Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Outputs debugging infor
162. when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default Division conversion file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 255 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified 2 Hex Format The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Hex file format Selects the load module file convert format This corresponds to the form option of the linker Default S record file FOrm Stype How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Intel expanded hex file Outputs a Intel expanded hex file FOrm Hexadecimal Motorola S type file Outputs a Motorola S type file FOrm Stype Binary file FOrm Binary Outputs a binary file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 193 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Unifies the record size Selects whether to output data with the specified data record regardless of the address range This corresponds to the record option of the linker This property is displayed only when Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Hex file format property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes HEX record Outputs the HEX record for the
163. whether to output a section list in a module This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property and User library file FOrm Library U or System library file FOrm Library S in the Output file type property in the Output cate gory is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow SEction Outputs a section list in a module No Does not output a section list in a module Outputs the cross ref erence information Selects whether to output the cross reference information This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property and Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Xreference Outputs the cross reference information to the linkage list file No Does not output the cross reference informa tion to the linkage list file Shows the total sizes of sections Selects whether to show the total sizes of sections This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes List content
164. with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 262 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Speci
165. writable Notes File name This is the name of this file Change the file name in the project tree panel Build Settings F Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file are displayed and the configuration can be changed File name Display the file name Change the file name on the Project Tree panel Default File name How to Changes not allowed change Relative path Display the relative path of the file from the project folder Default The relative path of the file from the project folder How to Changes not allowed change Absolute path Display the absolute path of the file Default The absolute path of the file How to Changes not allowed change Save with absolute Select whether to save the file location with the absolute path path Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path No Saves the file location with the relative path R20UT2998Ev0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 272 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Last update Display the time and date on which this file was changed last Default File updated time and date How to Changes not allowed change Writable Select whether to enable writing to the file Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write
166. you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node Remarks 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as an existing category node Remarks 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file 2 3 5 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes using the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 11 Toolbar Project Tree Panel Tree e Project ME RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 A File B ral Build tool generated files abs sample abs mot sample moat i map sample map c main c R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 18 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Button Description Sorts category nodes and files by name Ascending order Descending order 1 Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files by timestamp Descending order Ascending order G Descending order Displays category nodes and files in the specified order by the user default You can change the display order of the category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them 2 3 6 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing in
167. ztENESAS Page 113 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 5 Frequently Used Options for Compile The detailed information on frequently used options during compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text
168. ztENESAS Page 55 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 90 Set to Default Build Option for Project Item a Ezi sample Project 1 R5F56108WxBG Microcontroller a CC RX Build Tool 2 RX Simulator Deby Program Analyzer d Rebuild Project Shift F7 g File ed Clean Project C Set to Default Build Option For Project fp Build Project F7 UL Import Build Options W Set Link Order a Property The value of the properties after setting them as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 91 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option E CPU Microcontroller type RX600 series cpu rx600 Endian type for data Little endian data endian little Rounding method for floating point constant operations round to nearest round nearest Handling of denormalized numbers in floating point constants Handles as zeros denormalize off Precision of the double type and long double type Handles in single precision dbl_size 4 Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subprojects are added their settings are not made 2 13 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Description Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files See 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files Re
169. 0 ztENESAS Page 567 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE replace lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format Description Replaces library modules Replaces the specified file or library module with the module of the same name in the library specified with the library option Examples replace filel obj Replaces the module filel with the module filel obj replace libl 1lib mdl11 Replaces the module mdll with the module mdll in the input library file libl lib Remarks When form object relocate absolute hexadecimal stype binary extract or strip is specified this option is unavailable Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option merge_files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 568 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE extract lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format extract lt module name gt Description Extracts library modules Extracts the specified library module from the library file specified using the library option Examples extract filel Extracts the module filel Remarks When form absolute hexadecimal stype binary or strip is specified this option is unavailable When forme library has been specified this option deletes
170. 00 Optimizes accesses to external variables A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to optimize accesses to external variables This corresponds to the nomap smap and map option of the compiler The item of Yes Optimizes the inter module map is hidden when it is library proj ect Default selected Other than above No nomap When Max optimize max in the Optimization level property is Yes Optimizes the inter module map How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Optimizes the inner module smap Restriction Optimizes accesses to external variables which are defined in the file to be com piled Yes Optimizes the inter module map Optimizes accesses to external variables No nomap Disables optimization for accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specify the level of inter module optimization such as function merging Only Yes Level 1 Perform ip_optimize and No are displayed when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected This corresponds to the whole_program merge_files and ip_optimize options of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Level 3 Perform with assuming it the whole program whole_program
171. 00 are disabled to be output nomessage 4 200 203 1300 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 529 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE msg_unused lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format msg_unused Description Notifies the user of the externally defined symbol which is not referenced during linkage through an output message This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Enables information level message output in the Output category From the Librarian Options tab Enables information level message output in the Output category Examples rlink msg_unused a obj Remarks When an absolute file is input this option is invalid To output a message the message option must also be specified The linkage editor may output a message for the function that was inline expanded at compilation To avoid this add a static declaration for the function definition In any of the following cases references are not correctly analyzed so that information shown by output messages will be incorrect There are references to constant symbols within the same file There are branches to immediate subordinate functions when optimization is specified at compilation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 530 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE
172. 00000000 hexadecimal number How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 110 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Register of base regis ter that sets the address value Specifies the general register used as a fixed base address throughout the program When address value register C is specified accesses to an area within 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes from the address value among the areas whose addresses are already determined at the time of compilation are performed relative to the specified register c This corresponds to the base option of the compiler and library generator base option of the assembler Default None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction None Does not specify the base register that sets the address value R8 base lt address value gt R8 Specifies R8 as the base register that sets the address value R9 base lt address value gt R9 Specifies R9 as the base register that sets the address value R10 base lt address value gt R10 Specifies R10 as the base register that sets the address value R11 base lt address value gt R11 Specifies R11 as the base register that sets the address value R12 base lt address value gt R12 Specifies R12 as the base register that sets the addre
173. 0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 592 of 596 Revision Record Description Summary Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 First Edition issued CubeSuite V2 02 00 User s Manual RX Build Publication Date Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation 2CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2801 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2549 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 6503 0 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd Room 1709 Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100191 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 301 Tower A Central Towers 555 Langao Road Putuo District Shanghai P R China 200333 Tel 86 21 2226 0888 Fax 86 21 2226 0999 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century
174. 0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 270 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assem bling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are reg
175. 014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 3 3 Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Classification Description Input Options Input Specifies relocatable files library Specifies library files binary Specifies binary files define Specifies symbol definitions entry Specifies an entry symbol or entry address noprelink Selects non initiation of the prelinker Output Options form Selects the output file format debug Debugging information is output to load module files sdebug Debugging information is output to the dbg file nodebug Debugging information is not output record Selects the record size rom Specifies the section mapping from ROM to RAM output Specifies the names of files to be output map Outputs an external symbol allocation information file space Data are output to fill unused ranges of memory message Information level messages are output nomessage The output of messages is disabled msg_unused Messages are output to indicate the presence of externally defined symbols to which there is no reference byte_count Specifies the number of bytes in a data record Crc Specifies the format for output of the CRC code padding Padding data are included at the end of each section vecin Assigns an address to the
176. 0UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 317 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the set section to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 318 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Section Modify Section and Add Overlay dialog boxes These dialog boxes are used to enter a new section name when adding modifying or overlaying a section respectively Figure A 44 Add Section Dialog Box Add Section 1 Section name Function buttons Figure A 45 Modify Section Dialog Box Modify Section G Section name Function buttons Figure A 46 Add Overlay Dialog Box Add Overlay 1 Section name Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Add Section Dialog Box On the Section Settings dialog box select a section in the Address Section area and then click the Add but ton Modify Section Dialog Box On the Section Settings dialog box select a section in the Address Section area and then click the Modify button New Overlay Dialog Box On the Section Setting
177. 1 Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dialog box the following messages are shown in the tooltip Remarks 2 Message When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Up to 127 characters can be used as a build mode name When the input violates any restriction Description A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 characters The build mode name is invalid The following characters cannot be used s lt gt sages are shown in the tooltip Function buttons Button Message Invalid build mode name is entered The characters lt gt cannot be used as the name is used for the folder name Up to 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes Description The maximum number of build modes that can be set per project subproject is 20 The number of build modes exceed 20 Function Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 298 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box
178. 1 Input The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Input object module Specifies an input object module file file Add one file in one line The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the Input option of the linker The specified file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Input object module file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 180 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Using libraries A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies an input library file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the library option of the linker The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Input library file number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box w
179. 1 2 3 4 Default The default for this option is fint_register 0 Description This option specifies the general registers which are to be used only in fast interrupt functions functions that have the fast interrupt setting fint in their interrupt specification defined by pragma interrupt The specified registers can not be used in functions other than the fast interrupt functions Since the general registers specified by this option can be used without being saved or restored in fast interrupt functions the execution speed of fast interrupt functions will most likely be improved Then again since the number of usable general registers in other functions is reduced the efficiency of register allocation in the entire program is degraded The options correspond to the registers as shown in the following table Table B 9 Correspondences between Options and Registers Registers for Fast Interrupts Only fint_register 0 None fint_register 1 R13 fint_register 2 R12 R13 fint_register 3 R11 R12 R13 fint_register 4 R10 R11 R12 R13 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab General registers used only in fast interrupt functions in the CPU category Remarks Correct operation is not guaranteed when a register specified by this option is used in a function other than the fast interrupt functions If a register specified b
180. 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence 0 eee eee tees 27 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence 0 cee eee eee 28 2 5 3 Add aniinclude path 2 2 d2 00c4 ede bidet Bie Otek dd deb Pee eb bel add Reid bebe 28 2 5 4 Set a macro definition See Sea ee ee a ee dee ee ee 29 2 6 Set Assemble Options is tici atid eng abil soba ag deigie deleted EE aes Adtdntea cela Saath eatin ea 31 2 6 1 Addzan include path reacted ce ethane the hota ge ke kee Ree Me a eden een are eRe ee 31 2 6 2 Seta Macro Getinition sippi 2 eke wkd Lie ae eta ee det So ee ee bee eh eee amp 33 2 7 Set Link OptlonS 5i2s44 ee Ae ee heeled Hedda a deh lees ene be bes 33 2 7 1 Adda user librai y i reii teach AE Oo ae Pe ee a dee ee es 34 2 7 2 Preparation for the use of the overlay section selection facility 0 00 cece eee 36 2 8 Set Librarian Options sai ceteris ait dati nb wahaiec eee spy RS noel wees aha aug eda ie Sasa eae oa 39 2 8 1 Set the output of a library files a aitei bea eet wee as Sg ede Cee eee 40 2 9 Set Library Generate Options 0 0 2 ccc eee teen eee ee 40 2 9 1 Set the output of a standard library file 0 6 tte 41 2 10 Preparation before Using the PIC PID Function 0 0 c eect teens 42 2 11 Set Build Options Separately 1 0 0 0 tenet teen eee 42 2 11 1 Set build options at the project level 2 0 teen eee eee 42 2 11 2 Set build options at the file lev
181. 10 CRG Informations ie a 2 cee RA ie race ne be eat A a aA iad ec a a e a a N 74 3 3 Library Lists 247 dah disks Se kg Geb Std cane ait SRN aad hed Gy tt Bande debate ott 75 3 3 1 structure of Library List 223a444 ee tate etd noe a AE OR ek ae a we 75 3 3 2 Option Infomation 4p dN SA det oda a a Sede a eh ee Pa a ana 75 3 3 3 Error Informatomicc oF 34 5426 Ge cba FS See ek AA ed ee eo Sa 76 3 3 4 Library Information es ninsiek acai e E ei bee ee a eae ee ack Pad eine np Boba es 76 3 3 5 Module Section and Symbol Information within Library 0 0 0 0 c cece eee 77 3 4 S Type and HEX File Formats pat woke iad kia eee eRe wi Sac tad please pies bi Adee w 78 3 4 1 S Type File Format cin 34 occ i eee Beet oo beet as bbe ie ee ee beet et 78 3 4 2 HEX File Format csdm pori ene ee es Be ie Le E N EEY 79 A WINDOW REFERENCE sou reenen OEE E Seekers ood iene oar E E ne 82 A 1 DO SGCrIPtlOn s Jre sre pi us eee Ghee E SD O a de eed E E A 82 B COMMAND REFERENCE eeoa ea ate a a See E E E A 337 B 1 RX Family G G4 Compiler ere eee te ee eae E Wd ee eed Mee 337 B 1 1 Input Output Files ack ee a eA hae eee es te Pe ee eee ects fe ene 337 B 1 2 Operating InstrUctionS sire othe ails Cede eee yd ES aad don ape aul ene LA re 339 B 1 3 Opllons s ntsc Bae ee has th ee start Seeks eee pinta a eee e at ocd a ea etal d Liana lead 343 B 1 3 1 Compile Options 3 2 ca a2 cove ote yee le eas ae Seale oladale Pea Pea aay bak oes 343 B 1 3 2 Assembler
182. 14 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE debug lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format debug Default When this option is omitted debugging information is output to the output file Description When debug is specified debugging information is output to the output file If debug is specified and if two or more files are specified to be output with output they are interpreted as sdebug and debugging information is output to lt first output file name gt dbg This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Output category From the Librarian Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Output category Remarks When form object library hexadecimal stype binary strip or extract is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 520 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE sdebug lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format sdebug Default When this option is omitted debugging information is output to the output file Description When sdebug is specified debugging information is output to lt output file name gt dbg file If sdebug and form relocate are specified sdebug is interpreted as debug This option is equivalent
183. 2 00 Character code of an output assembly lan guage file 3 List A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an output assembly language file This corresponds to the outcode option of the compiler Default SJIS code outcode sjis How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code out code euc Outputs characters in strings and character constants using EUC SJIS code out codessjis Outputs characters in strings and character constants using SJIS UTF 8 code out code utf8 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using UTF 8 This item is not available when C C89 lang c in the Language of the C source file property in the Source category is selected Traditional Chinese character out code big5 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Traditional Chinese charac ter Simplified Chinese character out code gb231 2 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Simplified Chinese charac ter The detailed information on list file is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Object module file output obj in the Output file type property in the Object category Outputs a source list file Selects whether to output a source list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolisifile option of the compiler
184. 2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Individual Compile Options C tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab If the settings are changed from the Compile Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected Source Object List Optimization Output File Others Re ns os Ss es 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure A 17 Property Panel Individual Compile Options C Tab Property j main cpp Property E Source Language of the C source file C lang cpp Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at the head of compiling units Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output No nomessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Changes the waring level messages to information level message No Changes the information level messages to warning level message No Changes the information level and warning level messages to erro No Permits comment nesting No comment nonest Checks the compatibi
185. 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 8 Set Librarian Options Run a build Run a build see 2 13 Run a Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild see 2 13 2 Run a build of all files Rapid build see 2 13 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 13 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options C tab for a C source file Individual Compile Options C tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version in the Us
186. 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE chkpm lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt Format chkpm Description This option outputs warning W0551011 when a privileged instruction is used in the source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Checks for a privileged instruction in the Others category Remarks For details of the privileged instructions refer to the RX Family Software Manual R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 475 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE chkfpu lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt Format chkfpu Description This option outputs warning W0551012 when a floating point operation instruction is used in the source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Checks for a floating point operation instruction in the Others category Remarks For details of the floating point operation instructions refer to the RX Family Software Manual R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 476 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE chkdsp lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt Format chkdsp Description This option outputs warning W0551013 when a DSP instruction is used in the sour
187. 20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 528 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nomessage lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format Default When this option is omitted the output of information level messages is disabled Description When nomessage is specified the output of information level messages is disabled If an error number is specified the output of the error message with the specified error number is disabled A range of error message numbers to be disabled can be specified using a hyphen Each error number consists of a component number 05 phase 6 and a four digit value e g 0004 in the case of M0560004 If the four digit section has leading zeroes e g before the 4 in the case of M0560004 these can be omit ted If a warning or error level message number is specified the message output is disabled assuming that change_message has changed the specified message to the information level This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Enables information level message output and Suppresses the number of infor mation level messages in the Output category From the Librarian Options tab Enables information level message output and Suppresses the number of information level messages in the Output category Examples Messages of L0004 L0200 to L0203 and L13
188. 259 characters Command line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 The specified option is displayed Default Command line number of defined items How to change 2tENESAS Changes not allowed Page 179 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Librarian Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the link phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Input Output List Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the application project SS aS aes 1 2 3 4 Figure A 8 Property Panel Librarian Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Input Input object module file Input object module file 0 Input library file Input library file 0 System library file System library file O Initiates the prelinker Automatic control E Output Output file type User library file FOrm Library U Path of the output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame lib Enables information level message output No NOMessage Suppresses the number of information level messages E List Outputs the linkage list file No Others Input object module fle Specifies an input object module file in the format of input lt library name gt lt module name gt with one per line This option corresponds to the Input option Common Options lt Compile Options Assemble Options d Description of each category
189. 3 12 4 12 5 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 12 13 1 13 3 13 4 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 16 1 16 3 16 5 16 6 16 9 18 1 18 4 19 3 19 6 19 8 19 11 19 14 19 15 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 Not required 5 5 5 6 6 3 11 3 11 4 12 1 12 6 12 11 12 13 13 2 17 5 19 7 19 13 For source programs that use extended functions such as pragma checking against these rules will be suppressed under some conditions For details refer to the section on the check_language_extension option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 363 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE ignore_files_misra lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format ignore_files_misra lt filename gt lt filename gt Description This option selects files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C rule check category Remarks If a single option is specified more than once in the command line all specifications are valid This option is ignored when the misra2004 option has not been specified lt filename gt is ignored when the specified file is not to be compiled R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 364 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE
190. 6 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 26 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Supports Placeholders Placeholder Placeholder Value Description A ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName sample Active project name 2 BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install Y lt Function buttons Figure A 27 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Does Not Support Placeholders Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons R20UT2998EVJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 285 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Memo in the Notes category and Commands executed before build pro
191. 8EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 360 of 596 May 20 2014 B COMMAND REFERENCE CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Remarks When dbl_ size 4 is enabled the results of type conversion related to floating point numbers and the results of library calculation may differ from those in the R8C and M16C family C compilers H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compil ers and SuperH family C C compilers When dbl_size 4 is specified this compiler handles double type and long double type as 32 bits but the R8C and M16C family C compilers fdouble_32 H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compilers double float and SuperH family C C compilers double float handle only double type as 32 bits The result of a binary operation addition subtraction multiplication division comparison etc with unsigned int type and long type operands may differ from that in the SuperH family C C compilers In this compiler the types of the operands are converted to the unsigned long type before operation However in the SuperH family C C com pilers only when strict_ansi is not specified the types of the operands are converted to the signed long long type before operation The data size of reading from and writing to a volatile qualified variable may differ from that in the SuperH family C C compilers This is because a volatile qualified bit field may be accessed in a size smaller than that of the decla ration type in this compiler However in
192. 98EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 97 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL 6 When the Build tool generated files node is selected Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 7 When the Startup node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the cate gory Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disable
193. 98EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 384 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE optimize lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format optimize 0 1 2 max Description This option specifies the optimization level When optimize 0 is specified the compiler does not optimize the program Accordingly the debugging information may be output with high precision and source level debugging is made easier When optimize 1 is specified the compiler partially optimizes the program by automatically allocating variables to registers integrating the function exit blocks integrating multiple instructions which can be integrated etc Accord ingly the code size may become smaller than when compiled with the optimize 0 specification When optimize 2 is specified the compiler performs overall optimization However the optimization contents to be performed slightly differ depending on whether the size option or speed option has been selected When optimize max is specified the compiler performs optimization as much as possible For example the optimi zation scope is expanded to its maximum extent and if the speed option is specified loop expansion is possible on a large scale Though the advantages of optimization can be expected there may be side effects such as longer com pilation time and if the speed option is specified significantly increased code size This option is e
194. 998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 353 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE message lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format message Description This option outputs the information level messages This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Enables information level message output in the Source category Remarks Message output from the assembler or optimizing linkage editor cannot be controlled by this option Message output from the optimizing linkage editor can be controlled by using the Inkcmd option to specify the message or nomes sage option of the optimizing linkage editor R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 354 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nomessage lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format nomessage lt error number gt lt error number gt Description When the nomessage option is specified output of the information level messages is disabled When an error num ber is specified as a suboption the output of the specified information level message will be disabled Multiple error numbers can be specified by separating them with a comma Arange of error numbers to be disabled can be specified by using a hyphen that is in the form of lt error number gt lt error number gt Error numbers are sp
195. A symbol_delete Deletes variables functions that are not referenced Always be sure to specify pragma entry at compilation or the entry option in the optimizing linkage editor same_code Creates a subroutine for the same instruction sequence short_format Replaces an instruction having a displacement or an immediate value with a smaller size instruction when the code size of the displacement or immedi ate value can be reduced branch Optimizes branch instruction size according to program allocation informa tion Even if this option is not specified it is performed when any other opti mization is executed Notes 1 RXC C C program for RX Family RXA Assembly program for RX Family This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Optimization type Deletes variables functions that are not referenced Creates a subroutine for the same instruction sequence Replaces an instruction with a smaller size instruction Opti mizes branch instruction size in the Optimization category Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable When a start function with pragma entry or entry is not specified optimize symbol_ delete is invalid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 544 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nooptimize lt Optimizing Linkage
196. C language specifications so take care on this point This option of c is invalid when optimize 0 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 414 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE fpu lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format fpu Default The default for this option is fpu when the Instruction code set as the ISA 1 The default for this option is nofpu when RX200 is selected as the target CPU 2 or fpu in other cases Note 1 This means a selection by the isa option or the ISA_RX environment variable 2 This means a selection by the cpu option or the CPU_RX environment variable Description When the fpu option is specified a code using FPU instructions is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses floating point operation instructions in the CPU category Remarks For details of the FPU instructions refer to the RX Family Software Manual When RX200 is selected as the CPU an error will occur if fou is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 415 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nofpu lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format nofpu Default The default for this option is fpu when the Instruction code set as the ISA 1 The default for this option is nofpu when RX200 is sele
197. C T D E on Z S 5 C D sQENESAS CubeSuite V2 02 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Build Target Device RX Family All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 May 2014 10 11 12 Notice Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas
198. CC RH object module file CC RX CA850 CX NC30 CA78KOR CA78KO link directive file CA850 CX CA78KOR CA78K0 symbol information file CX and library file is selected except for File Information tab Opens the Find and Replace dialog bix with the Quick Find tab target Property names property values and active help character strings can be found Collapses the entire currently displayed detailed information display change area Expands the entire currently displayed detailed information display change area 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categoraized in the list Also you can directly change the settings of the selected node The node includes Proj ect node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node and Category node The H mark indicates all the items in the category are expanded The H mark indicates all the items are shrinked You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name If the HEX mark is displayed only the hex number is allowed in the text box Please see the information on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 3 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and their contents selecte
199. CE vectn lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format vectn lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt vector number gt lt symbol gt lt address gt Description Assigns the specified address to the specified vector number in the variable vector table section When this option is specified a variable vector table section is created and the specified address is set in the table even if there is no interrupt function in the source code Specify a decimal value from 0 to 255 for lt vector number gt Specify the external name of the target function for lt symbol gt Specify the desired hexadecimal address for lt address gt The file name is lt output file gt jmp From the Link Options tab Address setting for specified vector number in the Output category Examples vectn 30 _f1 31 0000F100 Specifies the _fl address for vector number 30 and 0x0f100 for vector number 31 Remarks This option is ignored when the user creates a variable vector table section in the source program because the vari able vector table is not automatically created in this case R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 536 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE vect lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format vect lt symbol gt lt address gt Description A
200. COMMAND REFERENCE padding lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format padding Description Fills in padding data at the end of a section so that the section size is a multiple of the boundary alignment of the sec tion The file name is lt output file gt jmp From the Link Options tab Fills in padding data at the end of a section in the Output category Examples start P C 0 padding When the boundary alignment of section P is 4 bytes the size of section P is 0x06 bytes the boundary alignment of section C is 1 byte and the size of section C is 0x03 bytes two bytes of padding data is filled in section P to make its size become 0x08 bytes and then linkage is performed start P 0 C 7 padding When the boundary alignment of section P is 4 bytes the size of section P is 0x06 bytes the boundary alignment of section C is 1 byte and the size of section C is 0x03 bytes if two bytes of padding data is filled in section P to make its size become 0x08 bytes and then linkage is performed error L2321 will be output because section P overlaps with section C Remarks The value of the created padding data is 0x00 Since padding is not performed to an absolute address section the size of an absolute address section should be adjusted by the user R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 535 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFEREN
201. Change the file build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the project 2 12 1 Import the build options of other project You can import the build options of other project to the current project On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu The fol lowing message dialog box will open Figure 2 73 Message Dialog Box Question Q0202003 p Are you sure you want to import build options Current whole build options and build modes are replaced by specified Project values Click Yes in the dialog box The Select Import File dialog box will open Figure 2 74 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import Build Options Look in G sample DefaultBuild E sample mtpj My Recent Documents e Desktop My Documents My Computer File name My Network Files of type Project File mtpj l R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 47 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 In the dialog box select the target project file for import the build options and click the Open button The build options of the selected project file are imported to the current project Remarks 1 The conditions of the project that is importable are shown below The build tool is the same The type of the project application library etc is the
202. CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE patch lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format paten rx610 Description This option is used to avoid a problem specific to the CPU type When patch rx610 is specified the MVTIPL instruction which causes a problem in the RX610 Group is handled as an undefined instruction The MVTIPL instruction will not be recognized as an instruction and the error message E0552113 will be output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Avoids a problem specific to the CPU type in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 495 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE pic lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format pic Default This option generates a relocatable object indicating that code was generated with the PIC function disabled Description This option generates a relocatable object indicating that code was generated with the PIC function enabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables the PIC function in the CPU category Remarks Even if code conflicting with this option is written in the assembly code it will not be checked A relocatable object with the PIC function enabled cannot be linked with a r
203. CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE volatile lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format volatile Description When volatile is specified all external variables are handled as if they were volatile qualified Accordingly the access count and access order for external variables are exactly the same as those written in the C C source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Handles external variables as if they are volatile qualified in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Handles external variables as if they are volatile qualified in the Opti mization category Remarks Debugging tools for RX do not display the volatile declaration added to individual variables by this option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 396 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE novolatile lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format novolatile Description When novolatile is specified the external variables which are not volatile qualified are optimized Accordingly the access count and access order for external variables may differ from those written in the C C source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Handles external variables as if they are volatile qualifi
204. Does not outputs additional information for inter mod ule optimization Optimization type Selects optimization type This corresponds to the speed and size option of the compiler Default Optimizes with emphasis on code size size How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Optimizes with empha Optimizes with emphasis on execution per sis on execution per formance formance speed Optimizes with empha Optimizes with emphasis on code size sis on code size size R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 115 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs a source list Selects whether to output a source list file file This corresponds to the listfile and nolistfile option of the compiler Default No nolistfile How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes lisfile Outputs a source list file No nolistfile Disable output of a source list file Outputs the C C Specifies the contents of the source list file source file Selects whether to output the C C source file This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show source Outputs the C C source file No Does not outp
205. EFERENCE Optimizes modifica Selects whether to optimize modification of the operation order of a floating point tion of the operation expression order of a floating Specifying the float_order option generally improves the object performance com point expression pared to when not specifying it However the accuracy of operations may differ from that when float_order is not specified This corresponds to the float_order option of the compiler This property is valid only when 2 optimize 2 or Max optimize max in the Optimization level property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes float_order Optimizes modification of the operation order in a floating point expression No Does not optimize modification of the operation order in a floating point expres sion 5 Output File The detailed information on the output file check is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assembly source file Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source This corresponds to the output src option of the compiler Output assembly Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source file source This corresponds to the output src option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop dow
206. ENCE Subproject file mtsp Subproject file Function buttons Button Function Open Imports the build options of the specified project file to the current project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 311 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select a folder and retrieve it for the caller Figure A 41 Browse For Folder dialog box Browse For Folder Select the Folder to add file O Project aaa E O backup E O boot O Default 4 G flash 2 O sample 9 DefaultBuild sample _lib O sample O sample2 D src E O Project_2 Function buttons Make New Folder 4 i The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Add File dialog box click the button in the File location area In Path Edit dialog box click button in the path edit area On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Assemble Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category From the Link Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category and Path of the conversion file output folder in the Convert Load Module
207. ESAS Page 588 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE logo lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format logo Default When this option is omitted the copyright notice is output Description The copyright notice is output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 589 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nologo lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format nologo Default When this option is omitted the copyright notice is output Description Output of the copyright notice is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library Generate Options tab Outputs the copyright in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 590 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Compiler Options That Become Invalid In addition to the options in B 1 3 4 Library Generator Options the C C compiler options can be specified in the library generator as options used for library compilation However the options listed below are invalid they are not selected at library compilation Table B 18 Invalid Options Options that Become Invalid Conditions for Inval idation Library Configuration When Made Invalid lang Always invalid None include Always invalid None define
208. Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format nooptimize Default When this option is omitted the default is optimize This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Optimization type in the Optimization category Description When pnooptimize is specified optimization is not performed at linkage R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 545 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE samesize lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format samesize lt size gt Default When this option is omitted the default is samesize 1E Description Specifies the minimum code size for the optimization with the same code unification optimize same_code Specify a hexadecimal value from 8 to 7FFF This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Minimum code size in the Optimization category Remarks When optimize same_code is not specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 546 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE symbol_forbid lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format symbol_forbid lt symbol name gt Description Disables optimization regarding unreferenced symbol deletion
209. Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration modification copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades Standard and High Quality The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots etc High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems and safety equipment etc Renesas Electronics products are neither intended nor authorized fo
210. For a C C variable or C function name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the program For a C function enclose the definition name in the program with double quotes including the parameter strings When the parameter is void specify as lt function name gt This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Unreferenced symbol that disables deletion by optimization in the Optimization category Remarks If optimization is not applied at linkage this option is ignored R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 547 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE samecode_forbid lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format samecode_forbid lt function name gt Description Disables optimization regarding same code unification For a C C variable or C function name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the program For a C function enclose the definition name in the program with double quotes including the parameter strings When the parameter is void specify as lt function name gt This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Same code that disables unification regarding optimization in the Optimization category Remarks If optimization is not applied at linkage t
211. Format endian big little Default The default for this option is endianz little Description When endian big is specified data bytes are arranged in big endian When endianzlittle is specified data bytes are arranged in little endian The endian type can also be specified by the pragma endian extension If both this option and a pragma exten sion are specified the pragma specification takes priority This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Endian type for data in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 428 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE round lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format round zero nearest Default The default for this option is round nearest Description This option specifies the rounding method for floating point constant operations When round zero is specified values are rounded to zero When round nearest is specified values are rounded to the nearest value This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Rounding method for floating point constant operations in the CPU category Remarks This option does not affect the method of rounding for floating point operations during program execution The default selection of this option does not affect
212. Handles as zeros Handles denormalized numbers as zero denormalize off Handles as they are Handles denormalized numbers as they denormalize on are Precision of the double Selects precision of the double type and long double type type and long double This corresponds to the dbl_ size option of the compiler and library generator type Default Handles in single precision dbl_size 4 How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Handles in single preci Handles the double type and long double sion dbl_size 4 type in single precision Handles in double preci Handles the double type and long double sion dbl_size 8 type in double precision Replaces the int type Selects whether to replace the int type with the short type with the short type This corresponds to the int_to_short option of the compiler and library generator Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Replaces the int type with the short type and the int_to_shor unsigned int type with the unsigned short type t No Does not replace the int type with the short type and the unsigned int type with the unsigned short type Sign of the char type Selects sign of the char type with no sign specification This corresponds to the signed_char and unsigned_char options of the compiler and library generator Default Handles as unsigned char unsigned
213. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation type option Depends on the optimization type option Instruction sequence using multiplication const_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using multiplica tion Instruction sequence using division noconst_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using division Expansion method of the library function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects expansion method of the library function This corresponds to the library option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Calls library functions library function Calls all library functions Performs instruction expansion of several library functions library intrinsic 7tENESAS Performs instruction expansion for abs fabsf and library functions which can use string manipulation instructions Page 234 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Divides the optimizing ranges into many sec tions before compila tion A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to divide the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation This corresponds to the scope and noscope option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile optio
214. If this option is specified for more than one time all specified linkage options are valid Asingle Inkopt option can only take a single linkage option To pass multiple linkage options specify Inkopt options as many times as the number of linkage options you require R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 459 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Other Options lt Compile Options Other Options gt The following other options are available logo nologo eUC sjis latin4 utf8 big5 gb2312 outcode subcommand R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 460 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE logo lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format logo Default The copyright notice is output Description The copyright notice is output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 461 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nologo lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format nologo Default The copyright notice is output Description When the nologo option is specified output of the copyright notice is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs the copyright in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 462 of 596 May 20 2014
215. Information level messages are output nomessage Specifies the numbers of information level messages to be disabled change_message Changes the levels of compiler output messages file_inline_path Specifies the names of folders that hold files for inter file inline expansion comment Selects permission for comment nesting check Checks compatibility with an existing program misra2004 Checks the source code against the MISRA C 2004 rules ignore_files_misra Selects files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules check_language_extension Enables complete checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code where this would otherwise be suppressed due to use of an extended specification Object Options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 output Selects the output file type noline Selects the non output of line in preprocessor expan sion debug Debugging information is output to the object files nodebug Debugging information is not output to the object files section Changes section names to be changed stuff Variables are allocated to sections that match their align ment values nostuff Alignment values of variables are ignored in allocating the variables to sections instalign4 Instructions at branch destinations are aligned with 4 byte boundaries
216. Input Dialog Box Character String Input lp Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Format of build option list in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Suppresses the number of information level messages Error number of warning level message Error number of information level message Error number of information level and warning level message in the Source category Other additional options in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Link Options tab Execution start address in the Input category Suppresses the number of infor mation level messages Address setting for unused vector area in the Output category Error number of warning level message Error number of information level message Error number of information level and warning level message Other additional options Other additional options Hex S record Binary data in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Suppresses the number of information level messages in the Output cate gory Error number of warning level message Error number of information level message Error number
217. Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Permits comment Selects whether to permit comment nesting nesting This corresponds to the comment option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes com Does not permit comment nesting ment nest No com Permits comment nesting ment nonest Checks the compatibil Selects whether to check the compatibility with an existing program ity with an existing pro This corresponds to the check option of the compiler gram Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes NC com Checks the compatibility with the R8C and M16C piler family C compilers check nc Yes H8 com Checks the compatibility with the H8 H8S and piler H8SX family C C compilers check ch38 Yes SH com Checks the compatibility with the SuperH family C piler C compilers check sh No Does not check the compatibility with an existing program R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 224 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an input program 2 Object A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an input program This corresponds to the euc sjis lati
218. J0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 95 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL 3 When the Build tool node is selected Build Project Builds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Cleans the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Option for Project Sets the current build option to the standard option for the selected project When the subproject is added it is not set When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its prop erty is displayed in boldface Import Build Options Opens the Import Build Options dialog box to import the build options from the selected project file Yt Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files and to setup their link order Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected build tool s property on t
219. L Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Linear base address Start mark f 32 bit start linear address record 05 record 3 XXEXX gt Hees type Address offset Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Start address Start mark Notes 1 The number of bytes from the byte following the record type to the previous byte of the checksum 2 2 s complement of the sum of the byte count and the data between the byte count and checksum in hexadecimal lower 8 bits are valid 3 A new line character is added immediately after the checksum R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 81 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix explains windows panels dialog boxes used in build process A 1 Description The following lists the windows panels dialog boxes used in build process Table A 1 List of Windows Panels Dialog Boxes Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Main window This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components in tree view Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the build tool file or category that is selected on the Project Tree panel and change the settings of the information Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files Output panel This panel is used to display the mes
220. Library List for the library list file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 26 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 5 Set Compile Options To set options for the compile phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 29 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Source Language of the C source file C C89 lang c Language of the C source file C ang cpp Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Include files at the head of compiling units Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output No nomessage Changes the warning level messages to information level messages No Changes the information level messages to waring level messages No Changes the information level and warning level messages to errorlevel messages No Path to the folder that stores a file for inter file inline expansion Path to the folder that stores a file for inter file inline expansion 0 Permits comment nesting No Checks the compatibility with an existing program No Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis E Object Output file type Object module file output obj Path of the o
221. MMAND REFERENCE isa lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format isa rxvl rxv2 Default The default for this option is determined based on the environment variable ISA_RX Description This option is used to select an instruction set architecture RXv1 or RXv2 for use in generating instruction codes When isa rxv1 is specified an instruction code for the RXv1 instruction set architecture is generated When isa rxv2 is specified an instruction code for the RXv2 instruction set architecture is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Instruction set architecture in the CPU category Remarks When neither the nofpu nor fpu option has been selected specifying the isa option automatically selects the fpu option Omitting the isa option will lead to an error if neither the cpu option nor one of the environment variables CPU_RX or ISA_RX is specified The isa and cpu options cannot be specified at the same time R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 426 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Cpu lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format cpu rx600 rx200 Default The default for this option is determined based on the environment variable CPU_RX Description This option specifies the microcontroller type for the i
222. May 20 2014 Specifies the target range Specifies in the format of start address end address Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation example 400 ffff This corresponds to the crc option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Outputs the calculation result of CRC property is specified Default Target range number of defined items How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters ztENESAS Page 196 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the S9 record Selects whether to output the S9 record at the end at the end This corresponds to the s9 option of the linker This property is displayed only when S record file FOrm Stype in the Load mod ule file convert format property is specified Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes S9 Outputs the S9 record at the end No Does not output the S9 record at the end 3 Others Other detailed information on linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed Other additional Inputs the link options to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the link options group Default Blank How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String In
223. NCE patch lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format paten rx610 Description This option is used to avoid a problem specific to the CPU type When patch rx610 is specified the MVTIPL instruction which causes a problem in the RX610 Group is not used in the generated code Unless patch rx610 is specified the code generated in response to the call by the intrinsic function set_ipl will contain the MVTIPL instruction This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Avoids a problem specific to the CPU type in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 447 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE pic lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format pic Default This option does not generate code with the program section as PIC position independent code Description This option generates code with the program section as PIC position independent code In PIC all function calls are performed with BSR or BRA instructions When acquiring the address of a function a rel ative address from the PC should be used This allows PIC to be located at a desired address after linkage This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables the PIC function in the CPU category Example Cal
224. NCE Specify Misra2004 Rule File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the MISRA C 2004 rule file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 51 Specify Misra2004 Rule File Dialog Box Specify Misra2004 Rule File O sample DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 99 My Computer PFile name 1 iles of type Misra2004 rule file rde Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following property and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Rule number description file in the MISRA C rule check category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Rule number description file in the MISRA C rule check cate gory Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 327 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Fi
225. NIN ProjectDir Browse C Permit non existent path C Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name E MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite J M ie Py need b a eee ela AL aalto atl e tle menin ot C1 Enter the include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 247 characters per line Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line Remarks 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder Remarks 3 Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 41 Additional include paths Property Aft
226. Name Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Use whole include paths specified for build tool Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths property in the Source category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used The include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths in the Source category from the
227. O functions This corresponds to the nofloat and simple_stdio option of the library generator Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Functional Creates simple I O functions that do not support cutdown version the conversion of floating point numbers f e 1 nofloat WE 9 G Yes Functional Does not include the conversion of the floating cutdown version point numbers the conversion of long long type 2 and the conversion of 2 byte code simple_stdio No Does not create a functional cutdown version of O functions Section name of pro gram area Specifies the section name of program area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default P How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 204 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Section name of con stant area A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the section name of constant area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default C How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of initial ized data area Specifies the section name of initialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default D How to change Directly enter in the text b
228. Option Dialog Box Option 5 g General E 1 3 Startup and Exit General G Display G Extemal Text Editor G Font and Color G Extemal Tools Build Debug Pe Python Console G Text Editor N Update Others Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories Category Description General Startup and Exit category Configure startup and shutdown General Display category Configure messages from the application General External Text Editor cate Configure the external text editor gory General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 302 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Category A WINDOW REFERENCE Description General Python Console category Configure the Python console General Text Editor category Configure the text editor General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information
229. Options tab Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C rule check category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Rule number Exclusion rule number Check rule number besides required rule Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C rule check category Description of each area 1 Select items The list of numbers of the MISRA C 2004 rules which can be set for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascending order Select numbers to set to the area that opened this dialog box via check boxes Remark In the area that opened this dialog box if a rule number is already set the check box for that num ber will be selected by default Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and specifies the selected numbers to the area that opened this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 325 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Button A WINDOW REFERENCE Function Cancel Cancels the number selecting and closes the dialog box Enable All Select all the rule numbers in Select items Disable All Deselect all the rule numbers in Select items Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 326 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERE
230. Outputs a stack use Selects whether to output a stack information file information file This corresponds to the stack option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes STACk Outputs a stack information file No Does not output a stack information file Compresses the Selects whether to compress the debugging information debugging information This corresponds to the compress and nocompress option of the linker Default No NOCOmpress How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Compress Compresses the debugging information No NOCOmpress Does not compress the debugging informa tion Reduces the memory Selects whether to reduce the memory occupancy occupancy This corresponds to the memory option of the linker This property is not displayed when any one of the following items is selected Yes Map in the Outputs the external symbol allocation information file property in the Output category Yes SHow Reference in the Outputs the number of symbol references property or Yes SHow Xreference in the Outputs the cross reference information property in the List category Yes CPu stride in the Allocates to the next area of the same memory type or the section is divided property Yes STACk in the Outputs a stack use information file property or Yes Compress in the Co
231. Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2265 6688 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 13F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei 10543 Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 80 Bendemeer Road Unit 06 02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6213 0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 12F 234 Teheran ro Gangnam Ku Seoul 135 920 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2014 Renesas Electronics Corporation and Renesas Solutions Corp All rights reserved Colophon 3 0 CubeSuite V2 02 00 rPENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT2998EJ0100
232. RXv1 instruction set architecture is generated When isa rxv2 is specified an instruction code for the RXv2 instruction set architecture is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Instruction set architecture in the CPU category Remarks When neither the nofpu nor fpu option has been selected specifying the isa option automatically selects the fpu option Omitting the isa option will lead to an error if neither the cpu option nor one of the environment variables CPU_RX or ISA_RX is specified The isa and cpu options cannot be specified at the same time R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 490 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Cpu lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format cpu rx600 rx200 Default The default for this option is determined based on the environment variable CPU_RX Description This option specifies the CPU type for the instruction code to be generated When cpu rx600 is specified a relocatable file for the RX600 Series is generated When cpu rx200 is specified a relocatable file for the RX200 Series is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Microcontroller type in the CPU category Remarks This option is for compatibility with earlier pr
233. Section area This area displays a list of the currently configured sections a Address This area displays the start addresses of the sections b Section This area displays the names of the sections c Overlayn This area displays the names of the sections to be overlaid n is a number starting with 1 R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 316 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE d Button Adding a section group address Opens the Section Address dialog box when an address is selected in the Address Section area Inserts a blank row at the appropriate position among other addresses Adding a section Opens the Add Section dialog box when a section is selected in the Address Section area If there is also no blank cell below within the section group that the selected cell belongs to a new section is added to the bottom of the section group The input section name is placed in a blank cell if any below the currently selected section Changing the section group address Opens the Section Address dialog box when an address is selected in the Address Section area Moves the entire group the address and all sections that belong to the group to the appropriate position among other addresses Changing the section name Opens the Modify Section dialog box when a section is selected in the Address Section area Replaces the currently selected section name with the
234. Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the nologo option of the compiler Default No nologo How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 151 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the cross ref Selects whether to output cross reference information erence information It is necessary to change the setting of the property of Program Analyzer to change this option Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Xcref Outputs the cross reference information No Does not output of the cross reference information Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed before compile processing before compile pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder M
235. Startup instead of Startup When the pid option is selected the same external variables in different files all have to be const qualified This is because the pid option is used to specify const qualified variables as PID The pid option PID function should not be used when there may be an external variable that is not const qualified If the map lt file name gt option is enabled while the pid option is selected warning W0530809 may be output when there is an externally referenced variable that is not const qualified but used in different files as the same external variable In the case the displayed variable is handled as PID In C or EC compilation the pid option cannot be selected If selected message W0523039 is output as a warn ing and the selection of the pid option is disabled When the pid option is selected base rom lt register gt cannot be selected If selected message W0523039 is out put as a warning and the selection of base rom lt register gt is disabled Ifa PID register selected by the pid option is also specified by the base option warning W0511149 will occur If the pid option and nouse_pid_register option are selected simultaneously error E0511150 will occur For details of the application and PID function refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 452 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nouse_pid_register lt
236. Suite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE delete lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format delete lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt file gt lt name gt lt module gt Description Deletes an external symbol name or library module Symbol names or modules in the specified file can be deleted For a C C variable name or C function name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the pro gram For a C function name enclose the definition name in the program with double quotes including the param eter strings If the parameter is void specify as lt function name gt If there are several files or modules of the same name the file that is input first is applied When a symbol is deleted using this option the object is not deleted but the attribute is changed to the internal sym bol Examples Deletes the symbol _syml in all files delete _sym1 i delete filel obj _sym2 Deletes the symbol _sym2 in the file filel obj Remarks When extract or strip is specified this option is unavailable When formelibrary has been specified this option deletes modules When form absolute relocate hexadecimal stype binary has been specified this option deletes external sym bols Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option merge_files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 0
237. The category node are added under the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remarks 1 The default category name is New category Remarks 2 The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node e Move categories You can move the category node by the following procedure The category node are moved under the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option set in the file in the category node is retained when the category node is dropped in the main project or subproject Remarks 2 The category node is copied not moved when the it is dropped between the different project or in the main project or subproject in same project Note that the individual option set in each file contained in the category node is not retained R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 90 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL f Add folders You can add folders from Explorer or the like by the following procedure The folders are added under the File node The folders are added as categories Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it over its destination The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Specify the file types and subdirectory levels in the folder to add Caution
238. UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 299 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Function Closes this dialog box and executes a batch build of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the build are displayed on the Out put panel After the batch build is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Rebuild Closes this dialog box and executes a batch rebuild of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuild are displayed on the Out put panel After the batch rebuild is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box and deletes the files built in the respective build modes set for the selected projects The execution result of the clean are displayed on the Output panel After the clean is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 300 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Progr
239. Up to 10000 lines can be entered Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Win dows OS can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description Specify a path The line contains space characters only The path is too long Specify a path with a The file name including the path exceeds number of characters equal to or fewer than the maximum number of restriction in the maximum number of restriction in the property property that called this dialog box that called this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does The path contains a folder that does not not exist exist R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 289 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Message A WINDOW REFERENCE Description The file name or path name is invalid The fol lowing characters cannot be used lt gt The file name with the invalid path is desig nated The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt More than maximum number of paths or files specified by the caller lines cannot be speci fied The number of paths or files which have been entered exceeds the maximum num ber of restriction in the property that called this dialog box b Button Browse When adding the path Opens the Browse For Folder dialog b
240. Yes H8 com Checks the compatibility with the H8 H8S and piler H8SX family C C compilers check ch38 Yes SH com Checks the compatibility with the SuperH family C piler C compilers check sh No Does not check the compatibility with an existing program R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 248 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an input program 2 Object A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an input program This corresponds to the euc sjis latin1 utf8 big5 and gb2312 option of the com piler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code euc Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using EUC SJIS code sjis Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using SJIS ISO Latin1 code latin1 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using ISO Latin1 UTF 8 code utf8 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using UTF 8 This item is not available when C C89 lang c in the Language of the C source file property is selected Traditional Chi nese character big5 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Traditional Chinese character
241. You cannot drag and drop folders and files into this area simultaneously Modify the display order of the subprojects placed in order of build The subproject is displayed in order of build from the top Therefore the order of build can be changed by changing the display order of the subprojects The project must be built from the subproject then the main project Configure the standard build option When the standard build option is changed the property is displayed in boldface in the Property panel You can change the standard build option to the current setting cancel boldface by the following procedure Select the Build tool node and then select Set to Default Build Option for Project in the context menu Remark The configuration of the standard build option takes effect to the whole project main project and subproject Sort files and categories You can sort files and category nodes in order of the file name time stamp or the user definition by the following procedure Select one of the buttons in the toolbar The following table explains the buttons FE is selected default by default Button Description Sorts files and category nodes in order of their names Ascending order 51 Descending order Z Ascending order FEF Sorts files and category nodes in order of their time stamp Descending order Ascending order Descending order agag Sorts files and category nod
242. _char How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Handles as signed char Handles the char type as signed char signed_char Handles as unsigned Handles the char type as unsigned char char unsigned_char R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 106 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Sign of the bit field type Selects sign of the bit field type with no sign specification This corresponds to the signed_bitfield and unsigned_bitfield options of the compiler and library gen erator Default Handles as unsigned unsigned_bitfield How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Handles as signed Handles the sign of a bit field as signed signed_bitfield Handles as unsigned unsigned_bitfield Handles the sign of a bit field as unsigned Selects the enumera tion type size automat ically Selects whether to automatically selects the enumeration type size This corresponds to the auto_enum option of the compiler and library generator Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Processes the enumerated data qualified by enum as auto_enum the minimum data type with which the enumeration value can fit in No Processes the enumeration type size as the signed long type Order of bit field mem bers Selects order of bit field members
243. ab Remarks When form object library or strip is specified this option is unavailable If no input object file is specified this option cannot be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 513 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE define lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format Description Defines an undefined symbol forcedly as an externally defined symbol or a numerical value The numerical value is specified in the hexadecimal notation If the specified value starts with a letter from A to F symbols are searched first and if no corresponding symbol is found the value is interpreted as a numerical value Values starting with 0 are always interpreted as numerical values If the specified symbol name is a C C variable name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the program If the symbol name is a C function name except for the main function enclose the definition name with the double quotes including parameter strings If the parameter is void specify as lt function name gt This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Symbol definition in the Input category Examples define _syml data Defines _syml as the same value as th xternally defined symbol data define _sym2 4000 Defines _sym2 as 0x4000 Remarks
244. ables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary tuff C alignment sections No Does not allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates switch state ment branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections Selects whether to allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte tuff W boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 252 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Adjustment for instruc tion in branch Selects adjustment for instruction in branch This corresponds to the noinstalign instalign4 and instalign8 option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction None noinstalign Does not align instructions at branc
245. after referred to as rebuild Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 12 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure 2 96 Rebuild active project Item E sample Project BE RSF56108WxBG A CC RX Build Too Rebuild sample RX Simulator Deb Clean sample Program Analyzer B E File BE Open Folder with Explorer Add gt ne Set sample as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Fm GS Paste Ctri ap Rename F2 a Property 2 13 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite has a function that a build is started automatically when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 59 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 When any one of the following files that are added to the project is updated C source file C source file assembler source file header file object module file relocatable module file and library file When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files has changed When the properties of the build too
246. age 562 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE compress lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format compress Default If this option is omitted the debugging information is not compressed Description The debugging information is compressed By compressing the debugging information the debugger loading speed is improved This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Compresses the debugging information in the Others category Remarks When form object relocate library hexadecimal stype binary or strip is specified this option is unavail able R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 563 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nocompress lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format nocompress Default If this option is omitted the debugging information is not compressed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Compresses the debugging information in the Others category Description The debugging information is not compressed If the nocompress option is specified the link time is reduced R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 564 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE memory
247. ainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 152 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed after compile processing after compile process Use the call i
248. all these During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite condition statements such as if and comments are ignored Therefore include files not required for build are mistaken as required files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if 0 include headerl h else include header2 h endif define AAA ifdef AAA include header3 h else include header4 h endif include header5 h x Cautions 2 Dependence zero Dependence Dependence Dependence Dependence relationship relationship relationship relationship relationship judged to exist to exist to exist to exist judged to exist During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include statements described after comments are ignored Therefore include files required for build are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build Dependence relationship judged not to exist header6 h comment include Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 header7 h ztENESAS Page 20 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set the type of the file to be output as the product of th
249. ame LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generator processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before library generator processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before library generate processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1
250. ample in which this option is valid int g1 int g2 1 const int g3 3 static int sl static variable hidden static int s2 1 static variable hidden static const int s3 2 static variable hidden static int subl static function hidden static int sl static variable hidden int 11 sl 11 11 sl return 11 int main subl if gl 1 goto Ll g2 2 lt The label name of the goto statement will be hidden return 0 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 572 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Remarks This option is available only when the output file format is specified as absolute relocate or library When the input file was compiled or assembled with the goptimize option specified this option is unavailable if the output file format is specified as relocate or library To use this option with the external variable access optimization do not use this option for the first linkage and use it only for the second linkage The symbol names in the debugging information are not deleted by this option R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 573 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE total_ size lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format total_size Description Sends total sizes of sections after linkage to standard output The sectio
251. ancy checking CRC of values from the lowest to the highest address of each tar get range and outputs the calculation result to the specified address lt endian gt can be specified only when the CPU type is RX Family When lt endian gt is specified the calculation result is output to the specified address in the specified endian When lt endian gt is not specified the result is output to the specified address in the endian used in the absolute file CRC CCITT or CRC 16 is selectable as a polynomial expression default CRC CCITT Polynomial expression CRC CCITT X 16 X 12 X 5 1 In bit expression 10001000000100001 CRC 16 X 16 X 15 X 2 1 In bit expression 11000000000000101 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Outputs the calculation result of CRC Output address and Target range in the Hex Format category Example rlink obj form stype start P1 P2 1000 P3 2000 crc 2FFE 1000 2FFD output out mot 1000 2FFF ere option crc 2FFE 1000 2FFD In this example CRC will be calculated for the range from 0x1000 to Ox2FFD and the result will be output to address Ox2FFE When the space option has not been specified space 0xFF is assumed for calculation of free areas within the target range output option output out mot 1000 2FFF Since the space option has not been specified the free areas are not output t
252. arching proceeds in order of specifications of the path names for the folders on the command line from left to right This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths and System include paths in the Source category Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified path names are valid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 350 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE preinclude lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format preinclude lt file name gt Description This option includes the specified file contents at the head of the compiling unit Multiple file names can be specified by separating them with a comma If there is more than one folder specified by the preinclude option search is performed in turn starting from the left most folder This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Include files at the head of compiling units in the Source category Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified files will be included R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 351 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE define lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format Description This option provides
253. arded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional Inputs the assemble options to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line The specified option is displayed Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 271 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 19 Property Panel File Information Tab Property c_ main c Property E File Information Save with absolute path
254. ariables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sect No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignme No groon Adjustment for instruction in branch Nonef noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIY instr Yes Character code of an output assembly language file SJIS code outcode siis B List _Dutnuts a source list file Nof nolisttile Language of the C source file Selects lanquage of the C source file This corresponds to the lang option of the compiler R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 43 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab by default 2 When setting compile options for a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual compile option property the message dialog box Figure 2 68 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 67 Set individual compile option Property E Build Set individual compile option Yes Figure 2 68 Message Dialog Box Question Q0203001 Are you sure you want to set the current compile options to the individual 2 compile options
255. ase ifthen if_ then method Jumping to a table Expands the switch statement by using method case table the table method Compiler automatically Automatically selects the if_then method selects case auto or table method R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 257 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Handles external vari ables as if they are volatile qualified A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to handle all external variables as if they are volatile qualified This corresponds to the volatile and novolatile option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes volatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile qualified No novolatile Does not handle external variables as if they were volatile qualified Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Selects whether to perform the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Const qualified variables in a C source file cannot be controlled by this option con stant propagation is always performed This corresponds to the const_copy and noconst_copy option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level options Depend
256. at signed_char Default The default for this option is unsigned_char Description When signed_char is specified the value is handled as the signed char type This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Sign of the char type in the CPU category Remarks The bit field members of the char type are not controlled by this option control them using the signed_bitfield and unsigned_bitfield options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 433 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE unsigned_char lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format unsigned_char Default The default for this option is unsigned_char Description When unsigned_char is specified the value is handled as the unsigned char type This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Sign of the char type in the CPU category Remarks The bit field members of the char type are not controlled by this option control them using the signed_bitfield and unsigned_bitfield options R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 434 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE signed_bitfield lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format signed_bitfield Default When signed_bitfield is omitted the value is ha
257. ation level messages Page 134 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Error number of infor Specifies error number of information level and warning level message mation level and warn If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example ing level message 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message error lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Permits comment Selects whether to permit comment nesting nesting This corresponds to the comment option of the compiler Default No comment nonest How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes com Does not permit comment nesting ment nest No com Permits comment nesting ment nonest Checks the compatibil Selects whether to check the compatibility with an existing program ity with an existing pro This corresponds to the check option of the compiler gram Default No Ho
258. ation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the mi
259. ault Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 241 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed after compile processing after compile process Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program Program Replaces with the file name of the running program
260. ay 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE logo lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Options Other Than Above gt Format logo Default When this option is omitted the copyright notice is output Description The copyright notice is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Displays the copyright information in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Displays the copyright information in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 578 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nologo lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Options Other Than Above gt Format nologo Default When this option is omitted the copyright notice is output Description Output of the copyright notice is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Displays the copyright information in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Displays the copyright information in the Others category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 579 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE end lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Options Other Than Above gt Format ena Description Executes option strings spe
261. be valid or invalid by all possible combinations of options form show and or show all Reference Section Xreference Vector Total_size form abs show Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Valid Invalid Valid Valid Valid form lib show Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid form rel show Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Invalid Invalid ValidNote Invalid Valid form obj show Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid form hex bin sty show Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid show all Valid Invalid Valid ValidNote ValidNote Note The option is invalid if an absolute format file is input Note the following limitations on output of the cross reference information When an absolute format file is input the referrer address information is not output Information about references to constant symbols within the same file is not output When optimization is specified at compilation information about branches to immediate subordinate functions is not output When optimization of access to external variables is specified information about references to variables other than base symbols is not output Both show total_size and total_size output the same information When shows reference is valid the number of references of the variable specified b
262. beled M that appear when the misra2004 option has been specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 357 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE file_inline_path lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format file_inline_path lt path name gt Description This option is not available in V 2 00 Any specification of this option will simply be ignored and will not lead to an error due to compatibility with former versions R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 358 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE comment lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format comment nest nonest Description When comment nest is specified nested comments are allowed to be written in the source file When comment nonest is specified writing nested comments will generate an error The default for this option is comment nonest This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Permits comment nesting in the Source category Example When comment nest is specified the compiler handles the above line as a nested comment however when com ment nonest is specified the compiler assumes 1 as the end of the comment This is an example of nested comment 1 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 359 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSui
263. bles to 4 byte boundary alignment section No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment No Adjustment for instruction in branch None noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruc Yes E Optimization Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Loop expansion Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Performs inline expansion automatically Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion method of the switch statement Compiler automatically selects case auto Generation mode of the standard library Selects the generation mode of the standard library Common Options Compile Options Assemble Options Chi Options Hex Output Options Description of each category 1 Mode The detailed information on modes are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 198 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Generation mode of the standard library A WINDOWS REFERENCE Select the generation mode of the standard library Default Build a library file option changed 2 Standard Library How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Build a library file any time Creates a latest standard library file Bu
264. bsolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibrarianFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under librarian processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after librarian processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after librarian processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly ente
265. build Runs a build of all build target files See 2 13 2 Run a build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with other operations See 2 13 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has See 2 13 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree see 2 12 3 Change the file build order of subprojects Remarks 2 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build then all these files are saved R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 56 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 Display execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build Rapid Build tab Figure 2 92 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Start rebuild Sunday October 06 Z011 6 29 05 PM 4 Start build sample DefaultBuila j gt sample c gt De faultBuild sample abs DefaultBuild sample mot Optimizing Linkage Editor Completed Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects
266. build options at the project level Project level See 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level 2 11 1 Set build options at the project level To set options for build options for a project main project or subproject select the Build tool node on the project tree to display the Property panel Select the component tabs and set build options by setting the necessary properties Compile phase Compile Options tab Assemble phase Assemble Options tab Link phase For the application project Link Options tab Link phase For the library project Librarian Options tab Library Generate phase Library Generate Options tab 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level You can individually set compile and assemble options for each source file added to the project 1 When setting compile options for a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual compile option property the message dialog box Figure 2 68 Message Dialog Box is displayed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 42 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 64 Set individual compile option Property E Build Set individual compile option Yes File type L source Figure 2 65 Message Dialog Box Question Q0203001 gt Are you sure you want to set the current compile options to the individual compi
267. by the Specify Misra2004 Rule File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters 2tENESAS Page 149 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Rule number A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the rule number One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply specified rule number misra2004 apply in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number Specifies the exclusion rule number One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number misra2004 ignore in the Apply rule property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Check rule number besides required rule Specifies the check rule number besides required rule One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to
268. byte count and the data between the checksum and the byte count in byte units 3 A new line character is added immediately after the checksum 3 4 2 HEX File Format The execution address of each data record is obtained as described below 1 Segment address Segment base address lt lt 4 Address offset of the data record 2 Linear address Linear base address lt lt 16 Address offset of the data record R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 79 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Figure 3 3 HEX File Format a Data record 00 record 3 XX XX XX XX _ 3 L Record type Address offset Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Data Start mark b End record 01 record TTT Address offset gu Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Record type Start mark c Expansion segment address record 02 record 3 xxi XX 7 Record type Address offset Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Segment base address Start mark R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 80 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Figure 3 4 HEX File Format cont d Start address record 03 record 3 XX XX ke ies Record type Address offset gt Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Start address Start mark e Expansion linear address record 04 record PCAC 0 4 XXE XXE XX Xx XXE XX 3 L Record type Address offset
269. c 7tENESAS Performs instruction expansion for abs fabsf and library functions which can use string manipulation instructions Page 258 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Divides the optimizing ranges into many sec tions before compila tion A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to divide the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation This corresponds to the scope and noscope option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes scope Divides the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation No noscope Does not divide the optimizing ranges before compilation Schedules the instruc tion taking into consid eration pipeline processing Selects whether to schedule the instruction taking into consideration pipeline process ing This corresponds to the schedule and noschedule option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes schedule Schedules instructions taking into consid eration pipeline processing No
270. ce file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Checks for a DSP instruction in the Others category Remarks For details of the DSP instructions refer to the RX Family Software Manual R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 477 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Object Options lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt The following object options are available output debug nodebug goptimize fpu nofpu R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 478 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE output lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt Format output lt output file name gt Default This option outputs a relocatable file having the same name as that of the source file with extension obj Description When the specified output file name does not have an extension the file name appended with extension obj is used for the output relocatable file name When it has an extension the extension is replaced with obj This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Path of the output folder in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 479 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE debug lt Assembler Co
271. ces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the assembler This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Outputs debugging Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files information This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the assembler This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Default Yes debug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No nodebug Does not output debugging information to object module files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 156 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Output additional infor Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization mation for inter mod At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been ule optimization specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the assembler Default No How t
272. cessing Commands executed after build processing in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Include files at the head of compiling units Macro definition in the Source category Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C rule check category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Source category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the Link Options tab Input object module file Using libraries Input binary data file Symbol defini tion in the Input category ROM to RAM mapped section Specifies divide output file Address setting for specified vector number The section that outputs a jump table to branch to external definition symbols in the Output category Division conversion file Target range in the Convert Load Module File category Unrefer enced symbol that disables deletion by optimization Same code that disables unification regarding optimiza tion Section to disable optimization Address range to disable optimization in the Optimization category The specified section that outputs externally defined symbols to the file Section alignment in the Section category Address range of the memory type Not divide the specified section in t
273. change Restriction Yes head stdio Enables the stdio h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the stdio h C89 C99 Enables stdlib h C89 Selects whether to enable stdlib h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default Yes head stdlib How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head stdlib Enables the stdlib h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the stdlib h C89 C99 Enables string h C89 Selects whether to enable string h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default Yes head string How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head string Enables the string h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the string h C89 C99 Enables ios EC Selects whether to enable ios EC This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head
274. cified ztENESAS Page 155 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Character code of an Selects character code of an input program input program This corresponds to the euc sjis latin1 big5 and gb2312 option of the assembler Default SJIS code sjis How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction EUC code euc Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using EUC SJIS code sjis Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using SJIS ISO Latin1 code Handles the characters in strings character con latin1 stants and comments by using ISO Latin1 Traditional Chi Handles the characters in strings character con nese character stants and comments by using Traditional Chi big5 nese character Simplified Chi Handles the characters in strings character con nese character stants and comments by using Simplified Chi gb2312 nese character 2 Object The detailed information on the object is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Path of the output Specifies the output destination folder for the output file folder The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Repla
275. cified before END After the linkage processing is terminated option strings that are spec ified after END are input and the linkage processing is continued This option cannot be specified on the command line Examples input a obj b obj Processing 1 start P C D 100 B 8000 Processing 2 output a abs Processing 3 end input a abs Processing 4 form stype Processing 5 output a mot Processing 6 Executes the processing from 1 to 3 and outputs a abs Then executes the processing from 4 to 6 and outputs a mot R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 580 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE exit lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Options Other Than Above gt Format exit Description Specifies the end of the option specifications This option cannot be specified on the command line Examples Command line specification r1inx sub test sub nodebug test sub input a obj b obj Processing start P C D 100 B 8000 Processing output a abs Processing exit Executes the processing from 1 to 3 and outputs a abs The nodebug option specified on the command line after exit is executed is ignored R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 581 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 3 4 Library Generator Options Classification Option Description Library O
276. cks the compatibility with an existing program Character code of an input program E Object Output file type Path of the output folder Outputs debugging information Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Adjustment for instruction in branch Generates divisions and residues with DIY DIYU and the FDI instruction Character code of an output assembly language file E List Outputs a source list file Optimization C C89 lang c C lang cpp Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition 0 No nomessage No No No Path to the folder that stores a file for inter file inline expansion 0 No No SJIS code sjis Object module file output obj BuildModeN ame Yes debug No None noinstalign Yes SJIS code outcode sjis Optimization Description of each category 1 Source The detailed information on the source is displayed and the configuration can be
277. clude file paths adding an include statement of the header file to the C source file C source file and assembler source file etc that effects the file dependencies in the compile option settings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies Figure 2 12 Update Dependencies Item Build Ep Build Project F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ed Clean Project Build sample Rebuild sample Update Dependencies of sample a H p Clean sample ag 4 V T Build Mode Settings El Batch Build T Build Option List 2 For the active project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active project R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 19 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 13 Build fi Build Project F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ed Clean Project Rapid Build ay Update Dependencies H Build sample H Rebuild sample _4 Clean sample ay Update Dependencies of sample T E TH Remark Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List files are saved Cautions 1 Update Dependencies of active project Item 2 FUNCTIONS If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then
278. coding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 31 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Western European Windows Newline code Windows CR LF 3 S CI Beload the file with these settings Function buttons F The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 293
279. condition is not satisfied in conditional assembly are also output to a source list file definitions The information before replacement specified by DEFINE is output to a source list file expansions The macro expansion statements are output to a source list file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements in the List cat egory R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 488 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Microcontroller Options lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt The following microcontroller options are available isa cpu endian fint_register base patch pic pid nouse_pid_register R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 489 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE isa lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format isa rxvl rxv2 Default The default for this option is determined based on the environment variable ISA_RX Description This option is used to select an instruction set architecture RXv1 or RXv2 for use in generating instruction codes When isa rxv1 is specified an instruction code for the
280. ct section area from the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box and closes the dialog box The entire section group address is deleted Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 322 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify The Predefined Macro dialog box This dialog box is used to select the predefined macros to disable and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 49 Specify The Predefined Macro Dialog Box Specify The Predefined Macro LIT DBL4 DELS __INT_SHORT SCHAR Function buttons __UCHAR SBIT UBIT Enable All ROZ __RON Disable All __DOFF __DON Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Invalidates the predefined macro in the Source category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Invalidates the predefined macro in the Source category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Invalidates the predefined macro in the Source category Description of each area 1 Select items The list of the predefined macros which can be disabled for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed Se
281. cted R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 304 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Cautions 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been registered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build Cautions 2 If this item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 3 Enable Break Sound Beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break Do not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or soft ware break default 4 Observe downloaded load module files changing Observes the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes When there is a change a message dialog box confirming whether to execute the download will be displayed Does not observe the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes default 5 Buttons Initialize Settings Return all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function
282. cted as the target CPU 2 or fpu in other cases Note 1 This means a selection by the isa option or the ISA_RX environment variable 2 This means a selection by the cpu option or the CPU_RX environment variable Description When the nofpu option is specified a code not using FPU instructions is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Uses floating point operation instructions in the CPU category Example Remarks For details of the FPU instructions refer to the RX Family Software Manual R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 416 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE alias lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format alias noansi ansi Default The default for this option is alias noansi Description This option selects whether to perform optimization with consideration for the type of the data indicated by the pointer When alias ansi is specified based on the ANSI standard optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer is performed Although the performance of object code is generally better than when alias noansi is specified the results of execution may differ according to whether alias ansi or alias noansi is specified In the same way as in V 1 00 ANSI standard based optimization in consideration of the type of data indicate
283. cts Library file lib Relocatable module file rel Map file map lbp The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files Out of build target files run a build of only updated files hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 12 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 58 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 95 Build active project Item Er sample Project Build sample RSFS6108WxBG A CC RX Build Tool Rebuild sample RX Simulator Deb clean sample Program Analyzer w File BE Open Folder with Explorer Add gt Set sample as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Paste Ctrl C FS Rename F2 ras Property Remark If the included source files are not built after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 3 6 Update file dependencies 2 13 2 Runa build of all files Run a build of all build target files here
284. d 3 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 3 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 4 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 4 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed Project 1 Register to Favorite The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects Project 2 Register to Favorite The current project path is added to 2 path in Favorite Projects Project 3 Register to Favorite The current project path is added to 3 path in Favorite Projects Project 4 Register to Favorite The current project path is added to 4 path in Favorite Projects Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the applicatio
285. d build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Duplicate Delete Rename He If you select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list the selected build mode is displayed in Selected build mode If you click the Apply to All button the build mode for the main project and all the subproj ects which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For projects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from Default Build with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the duplicated build mode Remarks 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 12 6 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode Remarks 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild 2 12 8 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box opens R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 54 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 87 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2
286. d by pointers is not performed when alias noansi is specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer in the Optimization category Example long x long n void func short ps n i ll Io ps 2 xX l r When alias noansi is specified Note The value of n is reloaded at A since it is regarded that there is a possibility of the value of n being rewritten by ps 2 _n R4 1 R4 2 R1 R4 R5 s reloaded _x R4 R5 R4 When alias ansi is specified Note The value used in assignment at n 1 is reused at B because it is regarded that the value of n will not change at ps 2 since ps and n have different types If the value of n is changed by ps 2 the result is also changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 417 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE _func MOV L _n R4 MOV L 1 R4 com 13 MOV W 2 R1 ps 2 MOV L _x R4 MOV L 1 R4 B Value used in assignment at n 1 is reused RTS Remarks When optimize 0 or optimize 1 is valid and the alias option is specified the alias ansi specification wil
287. d by the input or library option is the current folder then the folder specified by HLNK_DIR However when a wild card is used in the file specification only the current folder is searched No value is set when the speci fication is omitted Specifies the CPU type lt CPU types gt RX600 RX200 1 When both ISA_RX and CPU_RxX are defined ISA_RX takes precedence B 1 3 Options No value is set when the speci fication is omitted This section describes the options for the RX family C C compiler in each processing phase Compile phase Refer to B 1 3 1 Compile Options Assembly phase Refer to B 1 3 2 Assembler Command Options Link phase Refer to B 1 3 3 Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Library generation phase Refer to B 1 3 4 Library Generator Options B 1 3 1 Compile Options The types and explanations for options of the compile phase are shown below R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 343 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Classification B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Source Options lang Specifies the language to assume in compiling the source file include Specifies the names of folders that hold include files preinclude Specifies the names of files to be included at the head of each compiling unit define Specifies macro definitions undefine Specifies disabling of predefined macros message
288. d data record regardless of the address range If there is an address that is larger than the specified data record the appropriate data record is selected for the address This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Unifies the record size in the Convert Load Module File category Remarks This option is available only when form hexadecimal or stype is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 523 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE rom lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format rom lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt ROM section name gt lt RAM section name gt Description Reserves ROM and RAM areas in the initialized data area and relocates a defined symbol in the ROM section with the specified address in the RAM section Specifies a relocatable section including the initial value for the ROM section Specifies a nonexistent section or relocatable section whose size is 0 for the RAM section This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab ROM to RAM mapped section in the Output category Examples rom D R start D 100 R 8000 Reserves R section with the same size as D section and relocates defined symbols in D section with the R section addresses Remarks When form obj
289. d in the Detailed information display change area is shown 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when a tab is selected In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section explaining each tab for the details on the contents of the display or the method of the setting on the tab Remark When more than two components are selected in Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel The following dialog boxes are opened from the Property panel Character String Input dialog box See Character String Input dialog box CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build or CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details Text Edit dialog box See Text Edit dialog box CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build or CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details Path Edit dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 101 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for details Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undo Undoes any property changes b
290. d run time library No Disables the math h C89 C99 Enables mathf h C89 Selects whether to enable mathf h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head mathf Enables the mathf h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the mathf h C89 C99 Enables stdarg h C89 Selects whether to enable stdarg h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head stdarg Enables the stdarg h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the stdarg h C89 C99 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 200 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Enables stdio h C89 Selects whether to enable stdio h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default Yes head stdio How to Select from the drop down list
291. d when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 98 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL 8 When acategory node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the cate gory Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation
292. data bytes are arranged in big endian When endianzlittle is specified data bytes are arranged in little endian This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Endian type for data in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 492 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE fint_register lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format fint_register 0 1 2 3 4 Default The default for this option is fint_register 0 Description This option outputs to the relocatable file the information about the general registers that are specified to be used only for fast interrupts through the same name option in the compiler This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab General registers used only in fast interrupt functions in the CPU category Remarks Be sure to set this option to the same value for all assembly processes in the project If a different setting is made correct operation is not guaranteed Do not use a general register dedicated to fast interrupts for other purposes in assembly language files If such a reg ister is used for any other purpose correct operation is not guaranteed If a register specified by this option is also specified by the base option an error will be output R20UT2998EJ0100 Re
293. dd files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The removed file is not deleted from the file system in this operation Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to another projects it is also renamed Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel R20UT29
294. de option of the assembler Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Macro definition R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the macro name to be defined Specifies in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line This corresponds to the define option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction ztENESAS Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Page 265 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an input program A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an input program This corresponds to the euc sjis latin1 big5 and gb2312 option of the assem bler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code euc Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using EUC SJIS code sjis Handles the characters in
295. details please confirm each options descriptions 1 Operating Tools a Compiler ccrx ccrx is the startup command for the compile driver Compilation assemble and linkage can be performed using this command When the extension of an input file is s src S or SRC the compiler interprets the file as an assembly language file src s and initiates the assembler A file with an extension other than those above is compiled as a C C source file c cpp Two or more input files can be specified at the same time Cases where two or more C C language source files are specified as input files at the same time are referred to as batch compilation Command description format ccrx A lt option gt A lt file name gt A lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt suboption gt lt suboption gt b Assembler asrx R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 339 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 a asrx is the startup command for the assembler Command description format asrx A lt option gt A lt file name gt A lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt suboption gt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink rlink is the startup command for the optimizing linkage editor The optimizing linkage editor has the following functions as well as the linkage processing Optimizes relocatable files at linkage
296. dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Section alignment Specifies the section name to be changed to 0x10 bytes alignment Specifies in the format of section name with one section name per line This corresponds to the aligned_section option of the linker Default Section alignment number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 173 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE ROM to RAM mapped section 6 Verify Reserves ROM and RAM areas in the initialized data area and relocates a defined symbol in the ROM section with the specified address in the RAM section Specifies in the format of ROM section name RAM section name with one section name per line This corresponds to the rom option of the linker Default ROM to RAM mapped section number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up
297. down list change Restriction Yes Compiles assembles and links multiple files simultaneously No Compiles assembles and links for each file Handling the source Selects whether to recompile assemble the source file if there are no files that include file includes non exist it ing file Default Re compile assemble the source file How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Re compile assemble Recompiles assembles the source file if the source file there are no files that include it Ignore re compiling Does not recompile assemble the source assembling the source file if there are no files that include it file Ensure compatibility of Selects compatibility with High performance embedded workshop about paths and paths and linkage linkage order order Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Accords to the High performance Embed ded Workshop s linkage order Accords to this product s path and linkage order 11 Version Select The detailed information on the build tool version is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using compiler pack The folder in which the compiler package to be used is installed is displayed age install folder Default Install folder name How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 125 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSui
298. ds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of unini tialized data area Specifies the section name of uninitialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of literal area Specifies the section name of literal area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of switch statement branch table area Specifies the section name of switch statement branch table area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Selects whether to allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates uni
299. dual assemble option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected 1 Source 2 Object 3 List 4 Object 5 Others Figure A 18 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property gem main stc Property B Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis B Object Object file name Outputs debugging information Yes debug E List Dutputs an assemble list file Nof nolistfile E Optimization Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Others Additional include paths Specifies Additional include paths The path uses the project folder as the reference point Build Settings File Information Description of each category 1 Source The detailed information on the source is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 264 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Additional include Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file paths The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Re
300. e ProjectName lib Remark ProjectName is a placeholder It is replaced with the project name The method to change these file names is shown below 1 When changing the load module file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output category Figure 2 17 Output file name Property For Load Module File E Output Output file type Load module file FOrm 4bsolute Outputs debugging information Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug ROM to RAM mapped section ROM to RAM mapped section 3 Divides load module file No test abs utputs the extemal symbolallocation information file 0 Enables information level message output No NOMessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Fills in padding data at the end of a section No Address setting for specified vector number Address setting for specified vector number 0 Address setting for unused vector area Outputs the jump table No This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark When Yes on the Divides load module file property is selected the load module file is split into multiple files 2 When changing the hex file name Select the build too
301. e 4 200 203 1300 This correspond This property is s to the change_message option of the linker displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level messages to warning level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level and warning level messages to error level messages Selects whether to change the information level and warning level messages to error level messages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes All Changes all information level and warning change_message e rror level messages to error level messages Yes Specifies error number change_message e rror lt ErrorNum ber gt Changes the information level and warning level messages with the specified error num bers to error level messages No Does not change the warning level messages to information level messages Error number of infor mation level and warn ing level message Specifies error number of information level and warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them wit
302. e File node or Category node in Project Tree panel Then select Property in View menu or in the context menu On the Code Generator panel click Generate Code button and then select Property from the View menu or context menu On the Code Generator Preview panel select file and then select Property from the View menu or context menu Remark When either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node or Category node is selected in Project Tree panel while the Property panel is open the detailed information of the selected node is displayed ztENESAS Page 100 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Description of each area 1 Name for the selected node area and button group a Name for the selected node area In this area the name of the selected node in Project Tree panel is displayed This area is left blank when multiple nodes are selected b button group Locks properties to prevent the property value from being modified by wrong operation of a mouse or a keyboard locks properties unlocks properties This button is only on the following tabs Tabs displayed when the Build Tool node is selected Tabs displayed when the C source file C source file CC RX assembly source file CC RH assembler source file CC RX CA850 CX NC30 CA78KOR CA78kO object file
303. e and then they are reflected in File in the Link Order dialog box Figure 2 78 Link Order Dialog Box After Setting Link Order Link Order file03 obj file02 obj Cautions 1 The file that is described in the link order specification file and is not added to the project is not displayed If the corresponding file exists the list of the file names will be displayed in the Output panel Cautions 2 The file that is added to the project and is not described in the link order specification file is dis played in the end of File R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 50 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Cautions 3 If a file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display it will appear when you hover the mouse cursor over the file name To change the link order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names 3 Set the file link order Click the OK button in the Link Order dialog box to set the input order of the files to the linker 2 12 3 Change the file build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location 2 12 4 Display a list of build options You ca
304. e area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from C header file h C header file default C source file c C source file All files All the formats Function buttons Button Function Open Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 315 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Section Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add change or delete sections Figure A 43 Section Settings Dialog Box Section Settings Address Section Add B_1 Modify R1 B_2 New Overlay R2 B R su sl OKOFFFF80 PResetPRG OxOFFFF81 C_1 PE Remove v Function buttons Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Section start address in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Section start address in the Section category Description of each area 1 Address
305. e unsigned short type in the source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Replaces the int type with the short type in the CPU category Remarks INT_MAX INT_MIN and UINT_MAX of limits h are not converted by this option This option is invalid during C and EC program compilation If an external name of a C program may be referred to by a C EC program message W0523041 will be output for the external name When the int_to_short option is specified and a file including a C standard header is compiled as C or EC the compiler may show the W0523041 message In this case simply ignore the message because it does not indicate a problem Data that are shared between C and C EC programs must be declared as the long or short type rather than as the int type When an input function having a format such as that of scanf in the standard library is called while this option is enabled be sure to pass the addresses of the variables of the long and unsigned long types as parameters for use in d and u conversion If the address of the int type or unsigned type variables not declared as long is passed the program might not handle related operations correctly R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 432 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Signed_char lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Form
306. e Options Object Options gt Format nodebug Description When the nodebug option is specified no debugging information is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 370 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE section lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format section lt sub gt lt sub gt lt section name gt lt section name gt lt section name gt lt section name gt lt section name gt lt section name gt S rwo0Q ll Description This option specifies the section name section P lt section name gt specifies the section name of a program area section C lt section name gt specifies the section name of a constant area section D lt section name gt specifies the section name of an initialized data area section B lt section name gt specifies the section name of an uninitialized data area section L lt section name gt specifies the section name of a literal area section W lt section name gt specifies the section name of a switch statement branch table area lt section name gt must be alphabetic numeric underscore _ or The first character must not be numeric This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite
307. e boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sect No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignme No Adjustment for instruction in branch Nonef noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instr Yes Character code of an output assembly lanquage file SJIS code outcode sjis B List Language of the C source file Selects lanquage of the C source file This corresponds to the lang option of the compiler File Information Description of each category 1 Source The detailed information on the source is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 219 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Language of the C source file Selects language of the C source file This corresponds to the lang option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction C C83g Compiles as a C C89 source file lang c C99 Compiles as a C C99 source file lang c99 Additional include paths Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildMode
308. e build 1 For the application project A load module file is generated The load module file will be the debug target Select the type of the convert file to be output as the product of the build other than the load module file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Select the file type in the Type of output file property in the Output category Select the file type on the Load module file con vert format property in the Convert Load Module File category Figure 2 14 Convert Load Module File Property Load module file convert format S record file FOrm Stype 5 Divides the conversion file No Path of the conversion file output folder BuildModeN ame Conversion file name ProjectName mot Outputs the calculation result of CRC No Outputs the 9 record at the end No a When Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal is selected A hex file is outputted from the generated load module file b When S record file FOrm Stype is selected default A Motorola S type file is outputted from the generated load module file c When Binary file FOrm Binary is selected A binary file is outputted from the generated load module file 2 For the library project Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel Select the file type in the Output file type property in the Output category Figure 2 15 O
309. e can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message information lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the warning level messages to information level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 133 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Changes the informa tion level messages to warning level mes sages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to change the information level messages to warning level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge warning Changes all information level messages to warn ing level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge warn ing lt Error Number gt Changes the information level messages with the specified error numbers to warning level mes sages No Does not change the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of infor mation level message Specifies error number of information
310. e file in the active project to build active project Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to batch build Build Option List Lists the currently set build option in the Output panel 2 Toolbar Buttons used in build process are displayed a Build toolbar Build toolbar shows buttons used in build process Builds projects The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuilds projects The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 86 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean in operation 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Editor panel Output panel See the each panel section for details of the contents of the display R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 87 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components such as the build tool source files etc in tree v
311. e file is saved 2 EE os As a result build is executed in parallel with edit When rapid build is made a Text Editor effective we recommend diligently saving a file by Ctrl S after the file is edited By Update Others 2 Userlntounstion C Observe registered files changing 3 C Enable Break Sound 4 C Observe downloaded load module files changing Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enable the rapid build N feature default Do not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text edi tor or the like Do not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is sele
312. e file with the specific extension in the Editor panel When an external text editor is specified to use in the Option dialog box open the file with the external text editor Other files are opened with the application asso ciated with the OS Caution The files with the extensions that are not associated with the OS are not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedure R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 92 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Double click the file Select the file and then select Open from the context menu Select the file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened in the Editor panel are as follows C source file c C source file cpp cc cp Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file src Map file map lbp Hex file hex Assemble list file Ist S record file mot Text file txt Remark You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag the file and drop it into the Editor panel Select the file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Copies the selected file or category node to the clipboard While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Note that this
313. e is searched for in the order of the current folder and the folders specified by environment variable INC_RXA Description This option specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file Multiple path names can be specified by separating them with a comma The include file is searched for in the order of the current folder the folders specified by the include option and the folders specified by environment variable INC_RXA This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths and System include paths in the Source category Example Folders c usr inc and c usr rxc are searched for the include file asrx include c usr inc c usr rxc test srce R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 473 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE define lt Assembler Command Options Source Options gt Format Description This option replaces the macro name with the specified string This provides the same function as writing the DEFINE directive at the beginning of the source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Source category Remarks DEFINE takes priority over the define option if both are specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 474 of 596 May
314. e number of symbol references Outputs the cross reference information Shows the total sizes of sections Outputs vector information E Optimization Optimization type Section Verify Show ete operon al il a Input object module file 0 Using libraries 0 System libraries 0 Input binary data file 0 Symbol definition O No Automatic control Load module file FOrm 4bsolute Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug BuildModeN ame ProjectName abs No No NOMessage No Address setting for specified vector number 0 No Yes List contents specify LISt No No No No No No optimize NOOPtimize Input object module fle Specifies an input object module file in the format of input lt library name gt lt module name gt with one per line This corresponds to the Input option of the linker Common Options Compile Options Assemble Options Hex Output Options Library Generate Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 7 1 Add a user library Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Adding a user library is made with the Input library file property in the Input category Figure 2 46 Input library file Property Input library file Input library file 0 If you click the button the Path Ed
315. e of these classes is written in the source file the compiler will display an error message Always specify the lang ecpp option when using an EC library In batch compilation when multiple C C language source files are input to the compiler at the same time the indi vidual C or C language source files must be in the same language Thus separate the C and C language source files in accord with the languages to be specified and then perform batch compilation by specifying this option for the group in each of the languages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 349 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE include lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format include lt path name gt Description This option specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file Multiple path names can be specified by separating them with a comma Searching for files with names enclosed in lt and gt proceeds in order of the folders specified by the include option the folders specified by environment variable INC_RX Searching for files with names enclosed in double quotation marks proceeds in order of the storage folder of the file for which the include statement is made the folders specified by the include option the folders specified by envi ronment variable INC_RX If two or more folders are specified in the include option se
316. e optimization Specifies in the format of address size with one per line The size part can be omitted Specifies an address or the size in the hexadecimal notation This option corresponds to the absolute_forbid option of the linker This property is not displayed when No optimize NOOPtimize in the Optimization type property is selected Default Address range to disable optimization number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified 5 Section The detailed information on the section is displayed and the configuration can be changed Section start address Specifies the section start address This corresponds to the start option of the linker Default The peculiar value for the target device How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Section Settings dialog box change which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 1022 characters The specified section Specifies the section start address that outputs externally This corresponds to the fsymbol option of the linker defined symbols to the a file Default The specified section that outputs externally defined symbols to the file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit
317. e product install folder This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply rules that are described in the specified file misra2004 lt file name gt in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify Misra2004 Rule File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters ztENESAS Page 238 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Rule number Specifies the rule number One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Apply specified rule number misra2004 apply in the Apply rule property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Exclusion rule number Specifies the exclusion rule number One or more rule numbers always in decimal must be specified This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Ignore specified rule number misra2004 ignore in the Apply rule property is selected Default
318. e system include paths in the specified sequence for the compiler The default order is the order that the files are registered to the project By changing the display order of the paths you can set the specified order of the paths to the compiler To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the path names Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file Remarks 2 Newly added system include paths are added next to the last path of the list Remarks 3 When the path names are dragged and dropped the multiple path names which are next to each other can be selected together b Button Moves the selected path to up Moves the selected path to down Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any path is not selected R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 291 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the specified order of the paths to the compiler as the display order in the Path list display area and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the specified order of the paths and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 292 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the en
319. e the information level and warning level messages to error level messages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge error Changes all information level and warning level messages to error level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge error lt Erro rNumber gt Changes the information level and warning level messages with the specified error numbers to error level messages ztENESAS No Does not change the warning level messages to information level messages Page 223 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Error number of infor Specifies error number of information level and warning level message mation level and warn If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example ing level message 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message error lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String
320. e the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 126 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 13 Others Other detailed information on the build tool are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output message for mat Specifies the format of the message being built This applies to the messages output by the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the output messages of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that Program Options will be set automatically Default TargetFiles How to Directly enter to the text box up to 256 characters or select from the change drop down list Restriction TargetFiles Displays the file name in the output mes sage TargetFiles Displays the file name and command line Options options in the output message Program Options Displays the program name and com mand line options in the output message Format of build option l
321. eSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE lang lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format lang c cpp ecpp c99 Default If this option is not specified the compiler will compile the program file as a C source file when the extension is cpp cc or cp and as a C C89 source file for any other extensions However if the extension is sre or s the pro gram file is handled as an assembly language file regardless of whether this option is specified Description This option specifies the language of the source file When the lang c option is specified the compiler will compile the program file as a C C89 source file When the lang cpp option is specified the compiler will compile the program file as a C source file When the lang ecpp option is specified the compiler will compile the program file as an Embedded C source file When the lang c99 option is specified the compiler will compile the program file as a C C99 source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Language of the C source file and Language of the C source file in the Source category Remarks The Embedded C language specification does not support a catch const_cast dynamic_cast explicit muta ble namespace reinterpret_cast static_cast template throw try typeid typename using multiple inheri tance or virtual base class If on
322. e_message lt sub gt lt sub gt lt error level gt lt error number gt lt error number gt lt error level gt information warning error Description This option changes the message level of information level and warning level messages Multiple error numbers can be specified by separating them with a comma Error numbers are specified by the five lower order digits i e five digits from the right of the message numbers with out the prefix M information or W warning Example To change the level of information message M0523009 change_message error 23009 Although this option may change the types of some messages e g error E or warning W the meaning of the message indicated by the component or message number remains the same This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Changes the warning level messages to information level messages Error number of warning level message Changes the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of information level message Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages Error number of information level and warning level message in the Source category Example change_message information error number Warning level messages with the specified error numbers are changed to information level messages change_m
323. ecified by the five lower order digits i e five digits from the right of message numbers without the prefix M information Example To change the level of information message M0523009 nomessage 23009 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Enables information level message output Suppresses the number of infor mation level messages in the Source category Remarks Message output from the assembler or optimizing linkage editor cannot be controlled by this option Message output from the optimizing linkage editor can be controlled by using the Inkcmd option to specify the message or nomes sage option of the optimizing linkage editor If the nomessage option is specified for more than one time output for all specified error numbers will be disabled This option is only specifiable for messages with number 0510000 to 0549999 including the component number This option can only be used to suppress the output of messages 0520000 to 0529999 The output of other messages is not suppressed even if their numbers are specified with this option If you wish to suppress the output of such mes sages also use change_message to change them to information messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 355 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE change_message lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format chang
324. ect relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 524 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE output lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format output lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt file name gt lt output range gt lt output range gt lt start address gt lt end address gt lt section name gt Default When this option is omitted the default is lt first input file name gt lt default extension gt The default extensions are as follows form absolute abs form relocate rel form object obj form library lib form hexadecimal hex form stype mot form binary bin Description Specifies an output file name When form absolute hexadecimal stype or binary is specified two or more files can be specified An address is specified in the hexadecimal notation If the specified data starts with a letter from A to F sections are searched first and if no corresponding section is found the data is interpreted as an address Data starting with 0 are always interpreted as addresses This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output file type in the Output File Type and Path category Output hex file Load module file convert format Output folder Output file name Division output
325. ection option The data contents allocated to each section are output in the order they were defined except that variables that do not have the initial value are output after those that have the initial value in section C This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allo cates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections and Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions in the Object category Example int a char b 0 const short c 0 struct char x char y SECTION C ROMDATA ALIGN 4 glb word 0000H SECTION D ROMDATA ALIGN 4 glb byte OOH SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 glb blk1 glb blkb Remarks The nostuff option cannot be specified for sections other than B D C and W R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 374 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE instalign4 lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format instalign4 loop inmostloop Description This option aligns instructions at branch destinations When the instalign4 option is specified the instruction at the location address is aligned to the 4 byte boundary Instruction alignment is performed o
326. ed in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Handles external variables as if they are volatile qualified in the Opti mization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 397 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE const_copy lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format const_copy Default The default for this option is const_copy when the optimize 2 or optimize max option has been specified Description When const_copy is specified constant propagation is performed even for const qualified global variables The default for this option is const_copy when the optimize 2 or optimize max option has been specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external variables in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables in the Optimization category Remarks const qualified variables in a C source file cannot be controlled by this option constant propagation is always per formed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 398 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noconst_copy lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format Default The default for this
327. ed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the category name to categorize files This property of the File node and Build tool generated files node is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to Directly enter to the text box change Restriction 1 to 200 characters 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the File node and Build tool generated files node is not displayed Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 274 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files See CubeSuite RX Coding for details about this panel Figure A 21 Editor Panel f main c 74 B zs T 5 WR a a a we we a a wn a wn ao ae wn ae a a a a wn wn ae a ae wn ww a ae wn wn a a wn wn a a a wn a a a a a a a e ee o 7 6 a 77 Abstract 78 behead This function implements main function 7 9 gt 80 Parame
328. ed code of the accumulator ACC ACC0 ACC1 for interrupt functions The save and restored code of the ACC when the ISA is selected as the RXv1 or the microcomputer type is selected by the CPU The save and restored code of the ACCO and ACC1 when the ISA is selected as the RXv2 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Saves and restores ACC using the interrupt function in the CPU category Note 1 This means a selection by the isa option or the ISA_RX environment variable 2 This means a selection by the cpu option or the CPU_RX environment variable Remarks The generated saved and restored code is the same code generated when acc is selected in pragma interrupt For the actual saved and restored code refer to the description of acc and no_acc in pragma interrupt of pragma Extension Specifiers and Keywords R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 454 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble and Linkage Options lt Compile Options Assemble and Linkage Options gt The following assemble and linkage options are available asmcmd Inkcmd asmopt Inkopt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 455 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE asmcmd lt Compile Options Assemble and Linkage Options gt Format asmcemd lt file name gt Descript
329. ed for the file name specification bin is assumed Input binary data is allocated as the specified section data The section address is specified with the start option That section cannot be omitted When a symbol is specified the file can be linked as a defined symbol For a variable name referenced by a C C program add an underscore _ at the head of the reference name in the program The section specified with this option can have its section attribute and boundary alignment specified CODE or DATA can be specified for the section attribute When section attribute specification is omitted the write read and execute attributes are all enabled by default A boundary alignment value can be specified for the section specified by this option A power of 2 can be specified for the boundary alignment no other values should be specified When the boundary alignment specification is omitted 1 is used as the default This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Input binary data file in the Input category From the Librarian Options tab Input binary data file in the Input category Examples input a obj start P D 200 binary b bin Dlbin c bin D2bin 4 _datab form absolute Allocates b bin from 0x200 as the D1bin section Allocates c bin after Dibin as the D2bin section with boundary alignment 4 Links c bin data as the defined symbol _dat
330. ed in conditional assembly R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 267 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the informa tion before DEFINE replacement Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show defi nitions Outputs the information before replacement specified with DEFINE No Does not output the information before replace ment specified with DEFINE Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the macro expansion statements No Does not output the macro expansion state ments 4 Object The detailed informat
331. ed in condi tional assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly Outputs the informa tion before DEFINE replacement Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show defini tions Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement No Does not output the information before DEFINE replacement Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No Does not output the assembler macro expan sion statements ztENESAS Page 255 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 4
332. ed in the same order the instructions have been written in the C C source file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Schedules the instruction taking into consideration pipeline processing in the Opti mization category From the Library Generate Options tab Schedules the instruction taking into consideration pipeline processing in the Optimization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 406 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE map lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format map lt file name gt Default The default for this option is map when the optimize max option has been specified Description This option optimizes accesses to global variables When the map option is specified a base address is set by using an external symbol allocation information file cre ated by the optimizing linkage editor and a code that uses addresses relative to the base address for accesses to global or static variables is generated When accesses to external variables are to be optimized by the map option how the map option is used differs according to the specification of the output option output abs or output mot is specified Specify only map not necessary when optimize max is specified Compilation and linkage are automatically per formed twice and a code in which the base address
333. ed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show source Outputs the C C source file No ztENESAS Does not output the C C source file Page 230 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the state ments unsatisfied in conditional assembly A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show condi tionals Outputs the statements unsatisfied in condi tional assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly Outputs the informa tion before DEFINE replacement Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to chan
334. efault for this option is outcode sjis Description This option specifies the character code to output characters in strings and character constants The options correspond to the character codes as shown in the following table Table B 11 Correspondences between Options and Character Codes outcode Character Code euc EUC code sjis SJIS code latin1 ISO Latin1 code utf8 UTF 8 code big5 Big5 code gb2312 GB2312 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character code of an output assembly language file in the Object category Remarks The utf8 option is valid only when the lang c99 option has been specified When outcode big5 or outcode gb2312 the big5 or gb2312 option must also be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 469 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE subcommand lt Compile Options Other Options gt Format subcommand lt subcommand file name gt Description When the subcommand option is specified the compiler options specified in a subcommand file are used at compiler startup Specify options in a subcommand file in the same format as in the command line Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified subcommand files are valid B 1 3 2 Assembler Command Options Classification Opt
335. eing done Cut Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copy Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Paste Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Delete Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Help menu Property panel dedicated items Open Help for Property Panel Displays the help of this panel Context menu Undo Undoes any property changes being done Cut Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copy Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Paste Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Delete Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to default of the project default configuration For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores the configuration of the current tab to default of the project default con f
336. el 1 n n nannan aaa 42 2 12 Make Settings for Build Operations 0 0 0 eee eee ete 47 2 12 1 Import the build options of other project 0 2 tte ene 47 2 12 2 set the link order Of fil S zic cc ics fee os Gone he tea he Ue Gate E ee RS eas ele Pals ou alge ed aed 48 2 12 3 Change the file build order of subprojects 0 c cette teens 51 2 12 4 Display a list of build options 1 tenets 51 2 12 5 Change the file build target project 0 0 0 0 cece ete 51 2 12 6 Adda build mode ssn seed He a a eee ee ee dade 52 2 12 7 Change the build mode ss iiri eas Ge pled ey fa Se te Gigs oa ed Pe Gon ee ae ae 54 2 12 8 Delete a build Moder se ger trina sain hd ben etn eens Oe Eee ies Ae N een dy 54 2 12 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 0 0c cece eee 55 2 13 Runsas Build sarea ices eG BE ra A ee te ees ot ce eS 56 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files 0 0 cee eee eee eben ene 58 2 13 2 Runia build ofall tileSvioce e satis es le foes aid at eid ates Geechee dob ue ape gosh E E aAa ech oa he Ae E 59 2 13 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 0 20 0 cette 59 2 13 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 0 0c eee ett tees 60 2 13 5 Compile assemble individual files 0 0 0 0 cece cee eee 61 2 13 6 Stop running a build sii pote ce ie ee ea ee el eS cae tee G eave eee ee 62 2 13 7 Save the build results to afile 2 teen tees 62 2 13 8
337. elect from the drop down list Restriction Object module file output ob Outputs a relocatable file Source file after pre processed out put prep Outputs a source file after preprocessed Source file after pre processed Disables line output out put prep noline ztENESAS Disables line output at preprocessor expan sion Page 225 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Object module file name A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specify the name of the object module file generated after compilation The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Path of the output folder Specifies the output destination folder for the output file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to chan
338. elocatable object with the PIC function dis abled For the PIC function also refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 496 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE pid lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format pid 16 32 Default This option generates a relocatable object indicating that code was generated with the PID function disabled Description This option generates a relocatable object indicating that code was generated with the PID function enabled lt PID register gt Based on the rules in the following table one register from among R9 to R13 is selected according to the spec ification of the fint_register option If the fint_register option is not specified R13 is selected Table B 13 Correspondences between fint_register Options and PID Registers fint_register Option PID Register No fint_register specification fint_register 0 fint_register 1 fint_register 2 fint_register 3 fint_register 4 The PID register can be used only for the purpose of PID access lt Parameters gt The meaning of a parameter is the same as that for the compiler option with the same name This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables the PID function in the CPU category Remarks Even if
339. em libraries Input binary data file Symbol definition Specifies execution start address Initiates the prelinker E Output Output file type Outputs debugging information Path of the output folder Output file name Outputs the external symbol allocation information file Enables information level message output Suppresses the number of information level messages Fills in padding data at the end of a section Address setting for specified vector number Address setting for unused vector area Outputs the jump table E List Outputs the linkage list file Outputs a symbol name list in a module Outputs the number of symbol references Outputs the cross reference information Shows the total sizes of sections Outputs vector information Optimization Optimization type Section Verify eee Input object module file 0 Using libraries 0 System libraries 0 Input binary data file 0 Symbol definition 0 No Automatic control Load module file FOrms bsolute Yes Outputs to the output file DE Bug BuildModeN ame ProjectName abs No No NOMessage No Address setting for specified vector number 0 No Yes List contents specify LISt No No No No No No optimize NOOPtimize Input object module fle Specifies an input object module file in the format of input lt library name gt lt module name gt with one per line This corresponds to the Input option of the linker Common Options C
340. en executed after library generator processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after library generate processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the library generator options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the librarian options group This property is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the Generation mode of the standard library property in the Mode category Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 The specified option is displayed This property is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the Generation mode of the standard library property in the Mode category Default Command line number of defined items How to change ztENESAS Changes not allowed Page 215 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Build
341. eneration mode of the standard library property in the Mode category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 203 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Path of the output folder Specifies path of the output folder The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the library generator Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the output file name The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the output option of the library generator Default ProjectName lib How to Directly enter to the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Generation mode of the standard library Selects whether to create a functional cutdown version of I
342. ents SuboptionN When show Option is not Specified 1 Source information C C source code corresponding to show source Not output assembly source code 2 Object information Machine code used in object programs None Output and the assembly source code 3 Statistics information Total number of errors number of None Output source program lines and size of each section 4 Command specifica File names and options specified by None Output tion information the command Note Valid when the listfile option is specified 3 1 1 Source Information The source information is included in the object information when the show source option is specified For an example of source information refer to the next section Object Information 3 1 2 Object Information Figure 3 1 shows an example of object information output RX FAMILY ASSEMBLER V2 00 00 15 Feb 2013 SOURCE LIST Mon Feb 18 20 15 19 2013 1 2 3 4 LOC OBJ OXMDA SOURCE STATEMEN RX Family C C Compiler V2 00 00 15 Feb 2013 18 Feb 2013 20 15 19 PRAY GPU TYPE VEE ISA RXV1 7 COMMAND PARAMETER output src sample src listfile show source sample c glb_x glb_y glb_func02 glb_func03 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 66 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 00000000 00000000 00000002 00000004 00000008 6E67 EF16 OSrr
343. equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization cate gory Example lt C source file gt long A B C void func A B Cc R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 410 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE approxdiv lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format approxdiv Default When this option is omitted division of floating point constants into multiplications of the corresponding reciprocals as constants is not performed Description This option converts divisions of floating point constants into multiplications of the corresponding reciprocals as con stants To be specific when there is an expression of variable divisor with the divisor being a constant a code with the expression converted into variable x reciprocal of divisor will be generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Converts floating point constant division into multiplication in the Optimiza tion category From the Library Generate Options tab Converts floating point constant division into multiplication in the Optimization category Remarks When this option is
344. er Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Selects whether to allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary tuff B alignment sections No Does not allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment Selects whether to allocate initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler sections f Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary align tuff D ment sections No Does not allocates initialized variables to 4 byte bound ary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 251 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Allocates const quali fied variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to allocate const qualified vari
345. er How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Specifies byte count Selects whether to specify the maximum byte count for a data record for data record This corresponds to the byte_count option of the linker This property is displayed only when Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Load module file convert format property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes BYte_count Specifies the maximum byte count for a data No Does not specify the byte count for a data Maximum byte count Specifies the maximum byte count for a data record for a data record This corresponds to the byte_count option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes BYte_count in the Specifies byte count for data record property is specified Default FF hexadecimal number How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 1 to FF hexadecimal number R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 195 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the calculation result of CRC Selects whether to generate CRC code This corresponds to the crc option of the linker This property is displayed only when Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal or S record file FOrm Stype in the Load module file convert format property is selected A WINDOWS REFERENCE Default No
346. er Adding Include Paths I MAC 1 ProjectDir To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 32 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 6 2 Seta macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Source category Figure 2 42 Macro definition Property E Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 43 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 65535 line If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 44 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros E Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 2 Macro definition 2 0 TEST 1
347. er to enable information level message output This corresponds to the message msg_unused and nomessage options of the linker Default No NOMessage How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Message Outputs information level mes sages Yes Notify unused symbol Notifies the user of the externally Message MSg_unused defined symbol which is not refer enced This item is available only when Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property is selected No NOMessage Disables the output of information level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 183 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Suppresses the num ber of information level messages Specifies suppresses the number of information level messages If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the nomessage option of the linker This property is displayed only when No NOMessage in the Enables information level message output property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters 3 List The detailed information on
348. ernal variables Conversion method of the divisions and resi dues of integer con stants R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants This corresponds to the const_div and noconst_div option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization type option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation type option Depends on the optimization type option Instruction sequence using multiplication const_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using multiplica tion Instruction sequence using division noconst_div ztENESAS Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using division Page 144 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Expansion method of the library function A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects expansion method of the library function This corresponds to the library option of the compiler Default Performs instruction expansion of several library functions library intrinsic How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Calls library functions library function Calls all library functions Performs instruction expansion of several library functions library intrinsic Performs instruction expansion for abs fabsf and library functions
349. es in order of the user definition default You can change the display order by dragging and dropping the file and category node Boj Display the file while editing When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor panel and the file is not saved once the file name is fol lowed by When the file is saved is deleted The file that is saved The file that is not saved after editing Display the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general option individual compile option individ ual assemble option is changed to a different one from the normal icon The file with project general option The file with individual build option Highlight the file with read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 91 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL m Highlight the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists e main c The file that does not exist d main c n Highlight the build target file lt 1 gt The file which the error occurred during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assembling is high lighted as the example below The file without errors or warnings c_ main c The file wi
350. es specified for the input files are executed undefined symbols are searched in the library file The symbol search in the library file is executed in the following order user library files with the library option specifi cation in the specified order the system library files with the library option specification in the specified order and then the default library environment variable HLNK_LIBRARY1 2 3 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Using libraries and System library file in the Input category From the Librarian Options tab Using libraries and System library file in the Input category Examples library a lib b Inputs a lib and b lib library c lib Inputs all files beginning with c with the extension lib R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 512 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE binary lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format binary lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt file name gt lt section name gt lt boundary alignment gt lt section attribute gt lt symbol name gt lt section attribute gt CODE DATA lt boundary alignment gt 1 16 32 default 1 Description Specifies an input binary file Two or more files can be specified by separating them with a comma If an extension is omitt
351. ess Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress is done Figure A 35 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status o Loading project 1 4 J 2 ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area Display the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Button Function Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 301 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 36
352. essage is dis played c Save log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from the File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows All Messages Shows all the messages by order of output Except while executing a rapid build Rapid Build Shows the message output from the build tool by running a rapid build Build Tool Shows the message output from the build tool by running build rebuild clean Caution Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case E is added to the tab informing a new message is output File menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Save Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save log When this item is selected for the first time after launching the program the opera tion is equivalent to when selecting Save Output tab name As Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text file txt see c Save
353. essage warning error number Information level messages with the specified error numbers are changed to warning level messages change_message error error number Information level and warning level messages with the specified error numbers are changed to error level messages change_message information All warning level messages are changed to information level messages change_message warning All information level messages are changed to warning level messages change_mes sSage error All information level and warning level messages are changed to error level messages Remarks The output of messages which have been changed to information level messages can be disabled by the nomes sage option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 356 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Message output from the assembler or optimizing linkage editor cannot be controlled by this option Message output from the optimizing linkage editor can be controlled by using the Inkcmd option to specify the message or nomes sage option of the optimizing linkage editor If this option is specified for more than one time all specified error numbers are valid Only the levels of warning and information messages can be controlled by this option Specification of the option for a message not at these levels is ignored This option is not usable to control the level of MISRA2004 detection messages la
354. ext MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code ension where it would otherwise be suppressed due to individual extensions from the C C lan guage specification Disables complete checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code where it would otherwise be suppressed due to individual extensions from the C C lan guage specification 7 Others Other detailed information on compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs the copyright Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the nologo option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 240 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the cross ref Selects whether to output cross reference information erence information It is necessary to change the setting of the property of Program Analyzer to change this option Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Xcref Outputs the cross reference information No Does not output of the cross reference information Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed before compile processing before comp
355. ext area of the same memory type or the section is divided This corresponds to the cpu option of the linker This property is displayed only when the address range of the memory type in the Address range of the memory type property is specified Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes CPusstride Allocates same sort of memory space No Does not allocate same sort of memory space R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 174 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Not divide the speci Allocates the specified section to another available area of the same memory type fied section without dividing the section Specifies in the format of section name with one section name per line This corresponds to the contiguous_ section option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes CPu stride in the Allocates to the next area of the same memory type or the section is divided property is selected Default Not divide the specified section number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified 7 Others Other detailed information on linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed
356. f function size in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Performs inline expansion automatically and Maximum increasing rate of function size in the Optimization category Remarks Inline expansion is attempted for all functions for which pragma inline has been specified or with an inline specifier whether other options have been specified or not To perform inline expansion for a function for certain specify pragma inline for the function Even though this option has been selected or an inline specifier has been specified for the function if the compiler judges that the efficiency is degraded by inline expansion it will not perform it in some cases R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 392 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noinline lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format noinline Description When the noinline option is specified automatic inline expansion is not performed Remarks Inline expansion is attempted for all functions for which pragma inline has been specified or with an inline specifier whether other options have been specified or not This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Performs inline expansion automatically in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Performs inline expansion automatically in t
357. f option specification Page 509 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Input Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt The following input options are available Input library binary define entry noprelink R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 510 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Input lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format Input lt suboption gt A lt suboption gt lt file name gt lt module name gt Description Specifies an input file Two or more files can be specified by separating them with a comma or space Wildcards or can also be used for the specification String literals specified with wildcards are expanded in alpha betical order Expansion of numerical values precedes that of alphabetical letters Uppercase letters are expanded before lowercase letters Specifiable files are object files output from the compiler or the assembler and relocatable or absolute files output from the optimizing linkage editor A module in a library can be specified as an input file using the format of lt library name gt lt module name gt The module name is specified without an extension If an extension is omitted from the input file specification obj is assumed when a module name is not specified and lib is as
358. f the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System include paths Changes the specified order of the include paths which the system set during assem bling This corresponds to the include option of the assembler Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the macro name to be defined Specifies in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line This corresponds to the define option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be spe
359. f the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes message Enables information message output No nomes Disables information message output sage R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 221 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Suppresses the num Specifies suppresses the number of information level message ber of information level If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with a comma example messages 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the nomessage option of the compiler This property is displayed only when No nomessage in the Enables information level message output property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the warning Selects whether to change the warning level messages to information level mes level messages to sages information level mes This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler sages Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes All Changes all warning level messages to the
360. fault 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Designate the file name of the file to add to projects 4 Files of type area Designate the file type of the file to add to projects C source file c C source file C source file cpp cp cc C source file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 306 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Header file h hpp inc Header file Assembler source file src s Assembler source file Jump table file jmp Jump table file Symbol address file fsy Symbol address file Library file lib Library file Object module file obj Object module file Relocatable file rel Relocatable file Text file txt Text format All Files All the format default Function buttons Button Function Open Adds the designated file to a project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 307 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Using Library File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the library file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 39 Specify Using Library File Dialog Box Specify Using Library File O sample DefaultBuild O sample _lib My Recent sub Documents E user lib Desktop
361. fies the command to be executed after compile processing after compile process Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the scr
362. file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Input object module file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Outputs debugging information Specifies whether debugging information is output This corresponds to the nodebug sdebug and debug options of the linker Default Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs to the out Outputs a debugging information to the put file DEBug output file Yes Outputs to lt output file name gt dbg file SDebug Outputs a debugging information to lt out put file name gt dbg file No NODEBug Does not output a debugging information Optimization type Specifies optimization type This corresponds to the nooptimize and optimize options of the linker Default No optimize NOOPtimize How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction No optimize NOOPti Does not execute optimization for a mod mize ule All OPtimize Provides all optimizations Speed oriented optimiza Provides optimization for speed tion OPtimize SPeed Safe optimization OPti Provides safe optimization
363. fined symbols in sections sct2 and sct3 to test fsy fsymbol sct2 sct3 output test abs Output example of test fsy ENESAS OPTIMIZING LINKE F E 2012 07 19 fsymbol sct2 sct3 SECTION NAME sct2 glb_f f equ 00000000h glb_g _g equ 00000016h SECTION NAME sct3 glb _main _main equ 00000020h end Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 554 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE aligned_section lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Section Options gt Format aligned_section lt section name gt Description Changes the alignment value for the specified section to 16 bytes This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section alignment in the Section category Remarks When form object relocate library extract or strip is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 555 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Verify Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Verify Options gt The following verify options are available cpu contiguous_section R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 556 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSui
364. following items is selected User library file FOrm Library U or System library file FOrm Library S in the Output file type property in the Output category and Yes Hide in the Deletes local symbol name information property System library file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category Default No MEMory High How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes MEMory Low Reduces the memory occupancy No MEMory High Does not reduce the memory occupancy Changes the warning level messages to information level mes sages Selects whether to change the warning level messages to information level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes All Changes all warning level messages to the change_message i information level messages nformation Yes Specifies error Changes the warning level messages with the number specified error numbers to the information change_message i level messages nformation lt Error Number gt No Does not change the warning level messages to the information level messages Error number of warn ing level message Specifies error number of warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the
365. for ROM R13 base rom R13 Specifies R13 as the base register for ROM R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 109 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Base register for RAM Specifies the general register used as a fixed base address throughout the program When base ram register B is specified accesses to initialized variables and unini tialized variables are all performed relative to the specified register B Note that the total RAM data size must be within 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes This corresponds to the base option of the compiler and library generator base option of the assembler Default None How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction None Does not specify the base register for RAM R8 base ram R8 Specifies R8 as the base register for RAM R9 base ram R9 Specifies R9 as the base register for RAM R10 base ram R10 Specifies R10 as the base register for RAM R11 base ram R11 Specifies R11 as the base register for RAM R12 base ram R12 Specifies R12 as the base register for RAM R13 base ram R13 Specifies R13 as the base register for RAM Address value of base Specifies the Address value of base register that sets the address value register that sets the This corresponds to the base option of the compiler and library generator base address value option of the assembler Default
366. formation Yes debug E List Outputs an assemble list file Nof nolistfile E Optimization Outputs additional information for inter module optimization Additional include paths Specifies Additional include paths The path uses the project folder as the reference point R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 154 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Source The detailed information on the source is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option o
367. formation on the output file check is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assembly source file Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source This corresponds to the output src option of the compiler Output assembly Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source file source This corresponds to the output src option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes output src Outputs the assembly source file of the com pile result for the C source No Does not output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a source file file This corresponds to the output prep noline option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes output prep Outputs the execution result of preprocess ing for the source file to a file Yes Suppress line Outputs the execution result of preprocess output prep noline ing suppress line for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of pre processing for the source file to a file 6 Others Other detailed information on compilati
368. function refer to Application Startup instead of Startup For the PIC function also refer to Usage of PIC PID Function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 449 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE pid lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format pid 16 32 Default The constant area sections C C_2 and C_1 the literal section L and the switch statement branch table sections W W_2 and W_1 are not handled as PID position independent data Description The constant area sections C C_2 and C_1 the literal section L and the switch statement branch table sections W W_2 and W_1 are handled as PID position independent data PID can be accessed through a relative address from the PID register This allows PID to be located at a desired address after linkage Asingle general register is used to implement the PID function lt PID register gt Based on the rules in the following table one register from among R9 to R13 is selected according to the spec ification of the fint_register option If the fint_register option is not specified R13 is selected Table B 10 Correspondences between fint_register Options and PID Registers fint_register Option PID Register No fint_register specification fint_register 0 fint_register 1 fint_register 2 fint_register 3 fint_register 4 The PID reg
369. g point tion of the operation expression order of a floating Specifying the float_order option generally improves the object performance com point expression pared to when not specifying it However the accuracy of operations may differ from that when float_order is not specified This corresponds to the float_order option of the compiler This property is valid only when 2 optimize 2 or Max optimize max in the Optimization level property is specified Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes float_order Optimizes modification of the operation order in a floating point expression No Does not optimize modification of the operation order in a floating point expres sion 5 Output File The detailed information on the output file check is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assembly Select whether to output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source file source This corresponds to the output src option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes output src Outputs the assembly source file of the com pile result for the C source No Does not output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the s
370. ge Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Outputs debugging information Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No node Does not output debugging information to object module bug files Section name of pro gram area Specifies the section name of program area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of con stant area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the section name of constant area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction ztENESAS Up to 32767 characters Page 226 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Section name of initial ized data area Specifies the section name of initialized data area This correspon
371. ge If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level messages to warning level messages property is specified Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level and warning level messages to error level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to change the information level and warning level messages to error level messages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_message e rror Changes all information level and warning level messages to error level messages Yes Specifies error number change_message e rror lt ErrorNum ber gt Changes the information level and warning level messages with the specified error num bers to error level messages No Does not change the warning level messages to information level messages ztENESAS
372. ge Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show defini tions Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement No Does not output the information before DEFINE replacement Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the assembler macro expansion statements This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show expan sions Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No Does not output the assembler macro expan sion statements ztENESAS Page 231 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 4 Optimization A WINDOWS REFERENCE The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Optimization level Selects optimization level This corresponds to the optimize option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 0 optimize 0 Does not optimize the program 1 optimize 1 Partially optimizes the program by auto matically allocating variables to regis
373. h comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message error lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Deletes local symbol name information May 20 2014 Selects whether This correspond to delete local symbol name information s to the hide option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Hide Deletes local symbol name information No Does not delete local symbol name informa tion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 177 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Displays the total sizes Selects whether to display the total sizes of sections of sections This corresponds to the total_size option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Total_size Displays the total sizes of sections No Does not display the total sizes of sections Displays the copyright Selects whether to di
374. h destina tions Execution in 4 bytes instalign4 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Execution in 4 bytes Contains each loop head instalign4 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 4 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign4 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Execution in 8 bytes instalign8 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Execution in 8 bytes Contains each loop head instalign8 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 8 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign8 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to generate divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction This corresponds to the nouse_div_inst option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code in which DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used No
375. h emphasis on execution performance Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Optimizes with emphasis on code size Loop expansion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to optimize the loop expansion for while and do while This corresponds to the loop option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level and optimi zation type options Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion loop lt numeric value gt ztENESAS Expands loop statements for while and do while Page 142 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Expansion maximum number A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies expansion maximum number This corresponds to the suboption of loop option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Expansion loop lt numeric value gt in the Loop expansion property is selected Default 2 decimal number How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 1 to 32 decimal number Performs inline expan sion automatically Selects whether to perform inline expansion automatically This option corresponds to the inline and noinline option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options How to Se
376. h the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specifies an output file name The default extensions depends on Output file type property when extension omitted The default extensions are as follows User library file FOrm Library U lib System library file FOrm Library S lib Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate rel The following placeholders are supported ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the output option of the linker Default When User library file FOrm Library U in the Output file type property is selected ProjectName lib When System library file FOrm Library S in the Output file type property is selected ProjectName lib When Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property is selected ProjectName rel How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 259 characters Enables information level message output Specifies wheth
377. han one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When multiple files are selected and the values of their common properties are different then the corresponding value fields are displayed blank This area has the following functions a Add files You can add files by one of the following procedure The files are added under the File node R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 89 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL lt 1 gt Add existing files Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Copy the file using windows explorer and the like and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu Drag files using windows explorer and the like and then drop them at the location in this area where you want to add the files to Remark If the files are dragged from the windows explorer and the like and then dropped in the blank space under the lower project tree it is regarded as dropped in the Main project lt 2 gt When new files are added Select either one of the Project node S
378. hange_message warning lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level messages to warning level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level and warning level messages to error level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to change the information level and warning level messages to error level messages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge error Changes all information level and warning level messages to error level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge error lt Erro rNumber gt Changes the information level and warning level messages with the specified error numbers to error level messages ztENESAS No Does not change the warning level messages to information level messages Page 247 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Error number of infor Specifies error number of information level and warning level message mation level and warn If multiple message numbers are s
379. hanges E0562310 to a warning level message so that linkage proceeds even if E0562310 is output change_message error This changes all information and warning messages to error level messages When a message is output the execution is aborted R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 571 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE hide lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format niae Description Deletes local symbol name information from the output file Since all the name information regarding local symbols is deleted local symbol names cannot be checked even if the file is opened with a binary editor This option does not affect the operation of the generated file Use this option to keep the local symbol names secret The following types of symbol names are hidden C source Variable or function names specified with the static qualifiers C source Label names for the goto statements Assembly source Symbol names of which external definition reference symbols are not declared Note The entry function name is not hidden This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Deletes local symbol name information in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Deletes local symbol name information in the Others category Examples The following is a C source ex
380. hanges not allowed change Outputs debugging Specifies whether debugging information is output information This corresponds to the nodebug sdebug and debug options of the linker Default Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs to the output file Outputs a debugging information to DEBug the output file Yes Outputs to lt output file Outputs a debugging information to name gt dbg file SDebug lt output file name gt dbg file No NODEBug Does not output a debugging infor mation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 164 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 ROM to RAM mapped section A WINDOWS REFERENCE Reserves ROM and RAM areas in the initialized data area and relocates a defined symbol in the ROM section with the specified address in the RAM section Specifies in the format of ROM section name RAM section name with one section name per line This corresponds to the rom option of the linker Default ROM to RAM mapped section number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified Divides load module file Selects whether to divide load module file Th
381. hat this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the max erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be imum number of restriction in the property that specified called this dialog box Button The placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed in a popup ascending order If a placeholder is selected the string will be surrounded with percentage signs and displayed in String Caution This button is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered characters to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 284 of 59
382. he Compile Options tab Outputs a source list file in the List category Remarks A linkage list cannot be output by this option In order to output a linkage list specify the list option of the optimizing linkage editor by using the Inkemd option Information output from the compiler is written to the source list For the source list file format refer to Assemble List File When you use lt path name gt create the folder in advance If the folder specified as lt path name gt does not exist the compiler will assume that lt file name gt is selected R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 381 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nolistfile lt Compile Options List Options gt Format nolistfile Description When the nolistfile option is specified no source list file is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs a source list file in the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 382 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE show lt Compile Options List Options gt Format Description This option sets the source list file contents The suboptions and specified contents are shown in the following table Table B 5 Suboption Specifications Suboption Description source Outputs the C C source file
383. he Optimization cate gory R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 393 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE file_inline lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format file_inline lt file name gt Default None Description This option is not available in V 2 00 Any specification of this option will simply be ignored and will not lead to an error due to compatibility with former versions Remarks For C C99 source files merge_files can be used instead of file_inline Add the file that was used with file_inline including the file path if file_inline_path was used together with it as one of the source files to be merged There are some points to be noted regarding merge_files Refer to Remarks of the merge_files option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 394 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Case lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format case ifthen table auto Default The default for this option is case auto Description This option specifies the expansion method of the switch statement When case ifthen is specified the switch statement is expanded using the if_then method which repeats for each case label comparison between the value of the evaluation expression in the switch statement and the case label value If they match execution jumps to t
384. he Verify category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others cate gory From the Librarian Options tab Input object module file Using libraries Input binary data file in the Input category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others category From the Library Generate Options tab Commands executed before library generate processing Com mands executed after library generate processing in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Include files at the head of compiling units Macro definition in the Source category Rule check exclusion in the MISRA C rule check category Commands executed before compile processing and Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Include files at the head of compiling units Macro definition in the Source category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Source category and Commands exe cuted before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the File Information tab Memo in the Notes category From the Category Information tab
385. he same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property 5 When a file is selected Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 96 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Compile A GENERAL Compiles the selected C source file Note that this menu is only displayed when a C source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Assemble Assembles the selected assembler source file Note that this menu is only displayed when an assembler source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see r Run the editor Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Selected Applica tion Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated application Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to a
386. he Property panel Note See 2 12 1 Import the build options of other project for details about the import function of the build options 4 When the File node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension The file is added directly below this node Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the cate gory Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in t
387. he Specify the rule number dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction ztENESAS Up to 259 characters Page 239 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Rule check exclusion Specifies rule check exclusion file file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This option corresponds to the ignore_files_misra option of the compiler This option is not display when Not apply rule in the Apply rule property has been specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Outputs message of Selects whether to output message of The the enhanced key word and extended The the enhanced key specifications word and extended This option corresponds to the check_language_extension option specifications This option is not display when Not apply rule in the Apply rule property has been specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Enables complete checking against the check_language_
388. he code performance may be lowered This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables C exceptional handling function try catch and throw in the CPU category Remarks In order to use the C exceptional handling function among files perform the following Specify rttizon Do not specify the noprelink option in the optimizing linkage editor The exception option can be specified only at C compilation The exception option is ignored when lang cpp has not been specified and the input file extension is c or p R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 441 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noexception lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format noexception Default The C exceptional handling function try catch throw is disabled Description The C exceptional handling function try catch throw is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables C exceptional handling function try catch and throw in the CPU category Remarks In order to use the C exceptional handling function among files perform the following Specify rttizon Do not specify the noprelink option in the optimizing linkage editor The noexception option can be specified only at C compilation The noexception o
389. he created subproject to the proj ect The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Active Project Set selected subproject as Sets the selected subproject to an active project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property on the Property panel R20UT2998E
390. he location of the file in the popup display after install ing the link order specification file Edit the link order specification file Open the link order specification file with a editor and then change the description order of the file names The code example of the link order specification file is shown below CubeSuitet t Vx xx xx Link order specification file SampleProject XXXXXX XX XXXX file0l obj file03 o0bj file02 obj The following points should be noted when describing the link order specification file Describe one file name on one line Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the file name If the line begins with the line is interpreted as a comment A space or tab is ignored R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 49 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 c Import the link order specification file Click the Import button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Import File dialog box Figure 2 77 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File Look in sample DefaultBuild 2 LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents 5 Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Files of type Link order specification file mtls j In the dialog box select the link order specification file and click the Open button The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specification fil
391. he statement of the case label This method increases the object code size depending on the number of case labels in the switch statement When case table is specified the switch statement is expanded by using the table method where the case label jump destinations are stored in a branch table so that a jump to the statement of the case label that matches the expression for evaluation in the switch statement is made through a single access to the branch table With this method the size of the branch table increases with the number of case labels in the switch statement but the performance in execution remains the same The branch table is output to a section for areas holding switch state ments for branch tables When case auto is specified the compiler automatically selects the if_then method or table method This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Expansion method of the switch statement in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Expansion method of the switch statement in the Optimization cate gory Remarks The branch table created when case table has been specified will be output to section W when the nostuff option is specified and will be output to section W W_2 or W_1 according to the size of the switch statement when the nos tuff option is not specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 395 of 596 May 20 2014
392. hen the scope option is specified the optimizing ranges of the large size function are divided into many sections before compilation Use this option at performance tuning because it affects the object performance depending on the program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Divides the optimizing ranges into many sections before compilation in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Divides the optimizing ranges into many sections before compilation in the Optimization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 403 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noscope lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format noscope Default The default for this option is noscope when the optimize max option has been specified Description When the noscope option is specified the optimizing ranges are not divided before compilation When the optimizing range is expanded the object performance is generally improved although the compilation time is delayed However if registers are not sufficient the object performance may be lowered Use this option at performance tuning because it affects the object performance depending on the program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Divides the optimizing ranges into man
393. hich appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System library file Changes the specified order of the library files which the system set during linking The specified system library files are displayed This corresponds to the library option of the linker Default System library file number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the system library files can be changed Input binary data file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies an input binary data file Specifies in the format of file name section name boundary alignment section attri bute symbol name with one file name per line The boundary alignment section attribute or symbo name part can be omit ted 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 can be specified for the boundary alignment When the boundary alignment specification is omitted 1 is used as the default CODE or DATA can be specified for the section attribute When section attribute specification is omitted the write read and execute attri butes are all enabled by default The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name
394. his option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs the linkage list file in the List category From the Librarian Options tab Outputs the linkage list file in the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 540 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE show lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options List Options gt Format Description Specifies output contents of a list Table B 16 lists the suboptions For details of list examples refer to Linkage List and Library List in the user s manual Table B 16 Suboptions of show Option Output Format Suboption Name Description form library or symbol Outputs a symbol name list in a module when extract is specified extract is specified reference Not specifiable section Outputs a section list in a module xreference Not specifiable total_size Not specifiable vector Not specifiable all Not specifiable when extract is specified Outputs a symbol name list and a section list in a module when form library Other than symbol Outputs symbol address size type and optimization contents form library and extract is not speci reference Outputs the number of symbol references fied section Not specifiable xreference Outputs the cross reference information total_size Shows the total sizes of sect
395. his option is ignored R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 548 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE section_forbid lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format Description Disables optimization for the specified section If an input file name or library module name is also specified the opti mization can be disabled for a specific file not only the entire section This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section to disable optimization in the Optimization category Remarks If optimization is not applied at linkage this option is ignored To disable optimization for an input file with its path name type the path with the file name when specifying section_forbid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 549 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE absolute_forbid lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format absolute_forbid lt address gt lt size gt Description Disables optimization regarding address size specification This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Address range to disable optimization in the Optimization category Remarks If optimization is not applied at linkage this option is ignored
396. his option is unavailable If form lib or form rel is specified while the C template function and run time type test are used do not specify noprelink R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 516 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Output Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt The following output options are available form debug sdebug nodebug record rom output map space message nomessage msg_unused byte_count Crc padding vecin vect jump_entries_for_pic R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 517 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE form lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format form Absolute Relocate Object Library S U Hexadecimal Stype Binary Default When this option is omitted the default is form absolute Description Specifies the output format Table B 14 lists the suboptions Table B 14 Suboptions of form Option Suboption Description absolute Outputs an absolute file relocate Outputs a relocatable file object Outputs an object file This is specified when a module is extracted as an object file from a library with the extract option library Outputs a library file When libraryss is specified a system library is output
397. his property is displayed only when an assembler source file is selected on the Proj ect Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property in the Build category Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project set tings to the selected assembler source file No Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file File type Display the type of the selected file Default C source when C source file is selected C source when C source file is selected Assembly source file when assembler source file is selected Object when object module file is selected Library when library file is selected Changes not allowed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 218 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Individual Compile Options C tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab If the settings are changed from the Compile Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected 1
398. ic representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OxXXXX The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Document Name Document No CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be Start R20UT2865E V850 Design R20UT2134E RL78 Design R20UT2684E 78KOR Design R20UT2137E 78KO Design R20UT2138E RX Coding R20UT2999E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT2659E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT2774E 78K0 Coding R20UT2141E RX Build This manual V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT2142E RL78 78KOR Build R20UT2623E 78K0 Build R20UT0783E RX Debug R20UT2875E V850 Debug R20UT2446E RL78 Debug R20UT2867E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78K0 Debug R20UT0731E Analysis R20UT2868E Message R20UT2871E sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 GENERAL otic rib termite oR he Biro Loti Aad hla Mh BIS LA nice a Gat GO ta beg 8 1 1 OVENVICW nian d Pests Aurela neta ge oles edd ae Wut as inde ee y ame coset ts ae eka ahi te
399. ically Maximum increasing rate of function size Specifies maximum increasing rate of function size For example when 100 is specified inline expansion will be performed until the func tion size has increased by 100 size is doubled This option corresponds to the inline option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes inline lt numeric value gt in the Performs inline expansion automatically property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction 1 to 65535 decimal number Expansion method of the switch statement Selects expansion method of the switch statement This corresponds to the case option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction if_then method Expands the switch statement using the case ifthen if_ then method Jumping to a table Expands the switch statement by using method case table the table method Compiler automatically Automatically selects the if_then method selects case auto or table method R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 233 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Handles external vari ables as if they are volatile qualified A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to handle all external variables as if they are volatile qualified This corre
400. ied one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered library files are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 48 Input library file Property After Setting Library Files aig aig ie Input library file Input libra 0 user lib To change the library files you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 35 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 7 2 Preparation for the use of the overlay section selection facility The optimizing linkage editor rlink used by the CC RX provides the start option which allows two or more sections defined in a program to be allocated to a single address Sections that have been allocated in this way are called overlay sections When the program is executed only one of the sections allocated to the same address in the load module is executed The debug tool provides the overlay section selection facility to select a particular overlay section to be debugged preferentially When overlay sections exist in a load module the overlay section selection facility allows you to choose the priority sec tion to be debugged before the load module is executed To use this facility the load module must be created in the following way 1 Copy the contents of the ROM into the RAM Within the program copy the contents of the ROM into the RAM Code and data wil
401. iew Figure A 2 Project Tree Panel Project Tree EJ A gt Bei sample Project R5F56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool S Ei File ral Build tool generated files abs sample abs mot sample mot map sample map cj main c B UR sub Subproject R5SF56108W xBG Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool gt RX Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E Ei File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree Description of each area 1 Project tree area Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node Node Description Project name Project Project name hereafter referred to as Project node Build too name Build tool The build tool compiler assembler etc used in the project hereafter referred to as Build tool node R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 88 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Node Description File The following files that are added to the project are displayed under hereafter referred to as File node the root of this node C source file c C source file cpp cc cp Assembler source file src
402. ified Optimization information as shown below ch Symbol modified by optimization cr Symbol created by optimization mv Symbol moved by optimization 3 2 6 Symbol Deletion Optimization Information The size and type of symbols deleted by symbol deletion optimization optimize symbol_ delete are output The following figure shows an example of symbol deletion optimization information output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 72 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS x Delete Symbols 1 SYMBOL _Version Description Deleted symbol name Deleted symbol size Deleted symbol type as shown below Data type func Function name data Variable name Declaration type g External definition Internal definition 3 2 7 Cross Reference Information The symbol reference information cross reference information is output when show xreference is specified The fol lowing figure shows an example of cross reference information output Cross Reference List 1 2 3 4 3 No Unit Name Global Symbol Location External Information 0001 a SECTION P _func 000100 _funcl 000116 _main 00012c 9 000136 000190 0001 00000140 0002 00000178 0003 0000018c P _funcdld 00000154 0001 00000148 _funcd2 00000166 0001 00000150 _func03 00000184 Item Description Num ber 1 Unit number which
403. ified this option is unavailable When section B is divided by cpusstride the size of section C BSEC increases by 8 bytes x number of divisions because this amount of information is required for initialization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 558 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE contiguous_section lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Verify Options gt Format contiguous_section lt section name gt Description Allocates the specified section to another available area of the same memory type without dividing the section when cpuzstride is valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Not divide the specified section in the Verify category Examples start P PA PB 100 cpu ROM 100 1FF ROM 300 3FF ROM 500 5FF cpu stride contiguous_section PA Section P is allocated to address 100 If section PA which is specified as contiguous_section is over address 1FF section PA is allocated to address 300 without being divided If section PB which is not specified as contiguous_section is over address 3FF section PB is divided and allocated to address 500 Remarks When cpusstride is invalid this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 559 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Other Options lt Optimizing Li
404. ign8 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Execution in 8 bytes Contains each loop head instalign8 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 8 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign8 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to generate divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction This corresponds to the nouse_div_inst option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code in which DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used No nouse_div_inst 7tENESAS Generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used Page 229 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an output assembly lan guage file 3 List A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an output assembly language file This corresponds to the outcode option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code out code euc Outpu
405. iguration For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 102 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Common Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Build Mode CPU PIC PID Output File Type and Path Frequently Used Options for Compile Frequently Used Options for Assemble Frequently Used Options for Link Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Frequently Used Options for Librarian 0 Build Method 1 Version Select 2 Notes 3 Others Remark If the property in the Frequently Used Options category is changed the value of the property having the same name contained in the corresponding tab will be changed accordingly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 Category from Common Options Tab Corresponding Tab Frequently Used Options for Compile category Compile Options tab Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Assemble Options tab Frequently Used Options for Link category Link Options tab Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Hex Output Options tab Frequently Used Options for Librarian category Librarian Options tab Figure A 4 Pro
406. ild a library file option changed Creates a latest standard library file only when an option is changed regardless of whether Build or Rebuild Do not add a library file Does not add a library file The detailed information on standard library are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the Generation mode of the standard library property in the Mode category Library configuration Selects which functions are to be usable in the C standard library This corresponds to the lang option of the library generator Default C C839 lang c How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction C C839 lang c Includes only the functions conforming to the C89 standard in the C standard library C99 lang c99 Includes the functions conforming to the C89 standard and the functions conform ing to the C99 standard in the C standard library Configuration library Selects the configuration library This corresponds to the head option of the library generator Default Custom head lt SubOption gt How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Custom head lt SubOption gt Specifies a configuration library All enable head all Specifies all library functions and runtime library All disable head runtime Does not specify a c
407. ild process and others Build Project Builds the project The subproject is also built when it is added in the proj ect Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the project The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Cleans the project The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid Build Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Update Dependencies Updates the dependency of the file in the project to build The dependency of the file in the subproject to build is also updated when the subproject is added to the project Build active project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Update Dependencies of Updates the dependency of th
408. ild tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list select Yes listfile on the Outputs a assemble list file property in the List category Figure 2 25 Outputs a assemble list file Property Outputs a assemble list file Yes listfile utputs In conditional assembly E Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement No Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No Remark See 3 1 Assemble List File for the assemble list Output map information The map information i e information on the result of linkage is output to the linkage list file 1 2 For the load module file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output the linkage list file is made with the List category Figure 2 26 Outputs the linkage list file Property Zj Outputs the linkage list file Yes List contents specify LISt Outputs a symbol name list in a module No Outputs the number of symbol references No Outputs the cross reference information No Shows the total sizes of sections No Outputs vector information No To output the linkage list file select Yes List contents specify LISt in the Outputs the linkage list file property When outputting the linkage list file you can select the contents of the linkage list output by the linker When outputting a
409. ile pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Def
410. in the program This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction in the Object category Remarks This option calls the equivalent runtime functions instead of DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions This may lower code effi ciency in terms of required ROM capacity and speed of execution R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 379 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE List Options lt Compile Options List Options gt The following list options are available listfile nolistfile show R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 380 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE listfile lt Compile Options List Options gt Format listfile lt file name gt lt path name gt Description These options specify whether to output a source list file When the listfile option is specified a source list file is output lt file name gt can also be specified An existing folder can also be specified as lt path name gt instead of lt file name gt In such a case a source list file with the file extension lst and the name of the source file being compiled or assembled is output to the folder selected as lt path name gt This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From t
411. inProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before build processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed after build processing R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the command to be executed after build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The follo
412. infor change_messa mation level messages ge information Yes Specifies Changes the warning level messages with the error number specified error numbers to the information level change_messa messages ge informa tion lt Error Number gt No Does not change the warning level messages to the information level messages Error number of warn Specifies error number of warning level message ing level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message information lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the warning level messages to information level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 222 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Changes the informa tion level messages to warning level mes sages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to change the information level messages to warning level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler
413. ing compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 1 Using compiler package version Property E Yersion Select Remarks 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can collectively change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property Remarks 2 If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed Remarks 3 If the options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the project file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options are changed in accordance with the following rules Information about changes is displayed in the Output panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 12 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and con verted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inherited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values 2 3 Set Build Target Files Before r
414. ings specified by a command line or a subcommand file are output The following figure shows an example of option information output when rlink subcommand test sub list show is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 75 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS test sub contents form library in adhry obj output test lib kK Options sub test sub form library in adhry obj 1 output test lib 2 list show Description Outputs option strings specified by a command line or a subcommand in the specified order Subcommand in the test sub subcommand file 3 3 3 Error Information Messages for errors or warnings are output The following figure shows an example of error information output xx Error Information xx WO561200 W Backed up file main lib into main 1lbk 1 Description Outputs a warning message 3 3 4 Library Information The library type is output The following figure shows an example of library information output Library Information LIBRARY NAME test lib CPU RX610 ENDIAN Big ATTRIBUTE system NUMBER OF MODULE 1 Description Library name CPU name Endian type R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 76 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Library file attribute either sys
415. initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sectic No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment se No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary aligny No groon Adjustment for instruction in branch None noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIY DIVU and the FDI ins Yes Character code of an output assembly lanquage file SJIS code outcode siis E List Language of the C source fle Selects language of the C source file This option corresponds to the lang option of the compiler id File Information You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab by default Build Settings When setting assemble options for an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual assemble option property the message dialog box Fig ure 2 71 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 70 Set individual assemble option Property E Build Set individual assemble option File type Assembly source tile R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 45 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 71 Message Dialog B
416. ion Neither the names of the LLVM Team University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign nor the names of its contribu tors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTRIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS WITH THE SOFTWARE R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 10 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the build procedure using CubeSuite and about the main build functions 2 1 Overview This section describes how to create a load module and user library 2 1 1 Create a load module The procedure for creating a load module is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 12 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no
417. ion This option specifies the assembler options to pass to asrx with a subcommand file Example ccrx isa rxvl asmcmd file sub sample c The above description has the same meaning as the following two command lines ccrx isa rxvl output src sample c asrx isa rxvl subcommand file sub sample src Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified subcommand files are valid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 456 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Inkcmd lt Compile Options Assemble and Linkage Options gt Format iInkcmd lt file name gt Description This option specifies the linkage options to pass to rlink with a subcommani4 file Example ccrx isa rxvl output abs tp abs lnkcmd file sub tpl c tp2 c The above description has the same meaning as the following three command lines ccrx isa rxvl output sre tpl c tp2 c asrx isa rxvl tpl srce tp2 srce rlink subcommand file sub form abs output tp tpl obj tp2 obj Remarks If this option is specified for more than one time all specified subcommand files are valid Refer to the subcommand option of the optimizing linkage editor for the contents of the subcommand file passed to the Inkemd option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 457 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B
418. ion Description Source Options include Specifies the names of folders that hold include files define Specifies macro definitions chkpm Checks for a privileged instruction chkfpu Checks for a floating point operation instruction chkdsp Checks for a DSP instruction Object Options output Specifies the relocatable file name debug Debugging information is output to the object files nodebug Debugging information is not output to the object files goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization fpu Generates a relocatable file which is capable of containing FPU instructions nofpu Generates a relocatable file which is not capable of containing FPU instructions List Options listfile An assembler list file is output nolistfile An assembler list file is not output show Specifies the contents of the source list file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 470 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Classification B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Microcontroller Options isa Selects the instruction set architecture cpu Selects the microcontroller type endian Selects the endian type fint_register Selects a general register for exclusive use with the fast interrupt function base Specifies the base registers
419. ion address This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Section start address in the Section category Examples This example shows how sections are allocated when the objects are input in the following order names enclosed by parentheses are sections in the objects tp1 obj A D1 E gt tp2 obj B D3 F gt tp3 obj C D2 E G gt lib lib E start A B E 400 C D F G 8000 0x400 0x8000 A B E tp1 E tp3 E lib C D1 D3 D2 F G Sections C F and G separated by colons are allocated to the same address wee Sections specified with wildcards the input order in this example the sections whose names start with D are allocated in Objects in the sections having the same name E in this example are allocated in the input order An input library s section having the same name E in this example as those of input objects is allocated after the input objects Start A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G 400 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 552 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE 0x400 A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G The sections that come immediately after the colons A D2 and G in this example are selected as the start and allocated to the same address start A B C D1 D2 D3 E F G 400 0x400 A B C D1 E F D2 D3 G
420. ion file No Conversion file name Outputs the 9 record at the end No This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark When Yes on the Divides the conversion file property is selected the S record file is split into multiple files When changing the binary data file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Conversion file name property in the Convert Load Module File category Figure 2 20 Conversion file name Property For Binary Data File E Convert Load Module Fie Load module file convert format Binary data file FOrm Binary Divides the conversion file No Conversion file name This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark When Yes on the Divides the conversion file property is selected the binary data file is split into multiple files When changing the user library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in
421. ion of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction C Compiles as an EC source file lang cpp EC Compiles as a C source file lang ecpp Additional include paths Specifies the name of the path to the folder that stores the include file The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter
422. ion on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output additional infor mation for inter mod ule optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not output additional information for inter module optimization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS May 20 2014 Page 268 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 5 Others Other detailed information on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed Checks for a privileged Selects whether to check for a privileged instruction instruction This corresponds to the chkpm option of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes chkpm Checks for a privileged instruction No Does not check for a privileged instruction Checks for a floating Selects whether to check for a floating point operation instruction point operation instruc This corresponds to the chkfpu option of the assembler tion Default Configuration of
423. ion option of the compiler Default W How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters ztENESAS Page 137 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff B Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Selects whether to allocate initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff D Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections No Does not allocates initialized variables to 4 byte bound ary alignment sections Allocates const quali fied variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Selects whether to allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections This corresponds
424. ions allocated to the ROM and RAM areas vector Outputs vector information all If form rel the linkage editor outputs the same information as when show symbol xreference total_size is specified If form rel data_stuff have been specified the linkage editor outputs the same information as when show symbol total_size is specified If form abs the linkage editor outputs the same information as when show symbol reference xreference total_size is specified If form hex stype bin the linkage editor outputs the same information as when show symbol reference xreference total_size is speci fied If form obj all is not specifiable This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 541 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE From the Link Options tab Outputs the linkage list file Outputs a symbol name list in a module Outputs the number of symbol references Outputs the cross reference information Shows the total sizes of sections Outputs vector information in the List category From the Librarian Options tab Outputs the linkage list file Outputs a symbol name list in a module Out puts a section list in a module Outputs the cross reference information Shows the total sizes of sections Outputs vector information in the List category Remarks The following table shows whether suboptions will
425. ions of this option and the input or output file format are unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 565 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE rename lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format a rename lt suboption gt F lt suboption gt lt file gt lt name gt lt name gt lt module gt lt name gt lt name gt Description Modifies an external symbol name or a section name Symbol names or section names in a specific file or library in a module can be modified For a C C variable name add an underscore _ at the head of the definition name in the program When a function name is modified the operation is not guaranteed If the specified name matches both section and symbol names the symbol name is modified If there are several files or modules of the same name the priority depends on the input order Examples rename _syml data Modifies _syml to data rename libl1 P P1 Modifies the section P to Pl in the library module libl Remarks When extract or strip is specified this option is unavailable When form absolute is specified the section name of the input library cannot be modified Operation is not guaranteed if this option is used in combination with compile option merge_files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 566 of 596 May 20 2014 Cube
426. ipt The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Inputs the compile options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 The specified option is displayed Default Configuration of the compile option How to change 2tENESAS Changes not allowed Page 263 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Individual Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on an assemble source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Assemble Options tab When the settings are changed from these tabs the properties are displayed in boldface Remark This tab is displayed when Yes in the Set indivi
427. is an identification number in object units R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 73 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Object name which specifies the input order at linkage Symbol name output in ascending order of allocation addresses for every section Symbol allocation address which is a relative value from the beginning of the section when form relocate is specified Address of an external symbol that has been referenced Output format lt Unit number gt lt address or offset in section gt lt section name gt 3 2 8 Total Section Size The total sizes of ROM RAM and program sections are output The following figure shows an example of total section size output x Total Section Size RAMDATA SECTION 00000660 Byte s ROMDATA SECTION 00000174 Byte s PROGRAM SECTION 000016d6 Byte s Description Total size of RAM data sections Total size of ROM data sections Total size of program sections 3 2 9 Vector Information The contents of the variable vector table are output when show vector is specified The following figure shows an example of vector information output xxx Variable Vector Table List 1 C2 NO SYMBOL ADDRESS Sfdummy Sfa oo0off8800 fdummy lt Omitted gt Description Vector number Symbol When no symbol is defined for the vector number the addres
428. is corresponds to the output option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Divides load module file No Does not divide load module file Path of the output folder Specifies path of the output folder The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies an output file name If the extension is omitted abs is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName abs has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker Default ProjectName abs How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction ztENESAS Up to 259 characters Page 165 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE
429. is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project main proj ect and subproject has Remark Order of the batch build follows the build order of the project which the subproject comes before the main project When more than one build mode is selected for a main project or a subproject all the selected build modes are built and then the next subproject or main project is built Figure A 34 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area Show the combination list of the names of the main project and the subproject which the currently opening project has and build modes which they have a Project Show the main project and the subproject which the currently opening project has Select the combination of the main project and subproject to build and the build modes When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained b Build mode Show build modes which the main project and subproject have R20
430. ist Specifies the display format of the build option list see 2 12 4 Display a list of build options This applies to the options of the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the options of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that TargetFiles Program Options will be set automatically Default TargetFiles Program Options How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 127 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Commands executed before build process ing A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the command to be executed before build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name Ma
431. ister can be used only for the purpose of PID access lt Parameters gt The parameter selects the maximum bit width of the offset when accessing the constant area section from the PID register as 16 bits or 32 bits The default for this option when the offset width is omitted is pid 16 When pid 16 is specified the size of the constant area section that can be accessed by the PID register is limited to 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes varies depending on the access width When pid 32 is specified there is no limitation of the size of the constant area section that can be accessed by the PID register but the size of the code accessing PID is increased Note that when pid 32 and the map option with valid external symbol allocation information are specified at the same time the allocation information causes code the same as if pid 16 was specified to be generated if access by the PID register is possible This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables the PID function in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 450 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Examples Accessing an externally referenced symbol that is const qualified extern const int pid int work void funcl work pid Without pid _funcl MOV li ch L With pid 1 only _funcl OV L OV L MOV L RTS glb With pid 32
432. it dialog box will open R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 7tENESAS Page 34 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 47 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line g user lib Browse C Subfolders are automatically included Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder v lt Enter an library file per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 247 characters per line up to 256 line Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line Remarks 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Specify Using Library File dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder Remarks 3 Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specif
433. items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Section to disable opti mization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the Section to disable optimization Specifies in the format of file name Section namef or module name section name with one per line The file name or module name part can be omitted The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This option corresponds to the section_forbid option of the linker This property is not displayed when No optimize NOOPtimize in the Optimization type property is selected Default Section to disable optimization number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction ztENESAS Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Page 172 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Address range to dis Specifies an address range where optimization is disabled abl
434. ject as Active Project Sets the selected project to an active project Save Project and Develop ment Tools as Package Saves a set of the this product and the project by copying them in a folder Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected project Property Displays the selected project s property on the Property panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 94 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL 2 When the Subproject node is selected Build active project Builds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add t
435. kage editor Stack information file sni Motorola S format file mot CalfValker Stack display tool Chex Intel hex format file Binary file bin R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 9 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 1 GENERAL 1 2 Copyrights This LLVM based software was developed in compliance with the LLVM Release License Copyrights of other software components are owned by Renesas Electronics Corporation University of Illinois NCSA Open Source License Copyright c 2003 2012 University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign All rights reserved Developed by LLVM Team University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign http Ilvm org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated docu mentation files the Software to deal with the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following dis claimers Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribut
436. kage list file Shows the total sizes of sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to show the total sizes of sections This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is not displayed when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Shows the total sizes of sections allocated to the ROM and RAM areas Restriction Yes SHow Total_ size No Does not show the total sizes of sections ztENESAS Page 169 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs vector infor Selects whether to output vector information mation This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is not displayed when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs vector information to the linkage list SHow VECTOR file No Does not output vector information to the linkage list file 4 Optimization The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Optimization type Specifies optimization type This corresponds to the nooptimize and optimize options of the linker Default No optimize NOOPtimize How to
437. l variables noconst_copy Disables constant propagation of const qualified external variables const_div Divisions and remainders of integer constants are converted into instruction sequences noconst_div Divisions and remainders of integer constants are not converted into instruction sequences library Selects the method for the execution of library functions scope Selects division of the ranges for optimization into multiple sections before compilation noscope Selects non division of the ranges for optimization into multiple sections before compilation schedule Pipeline processing is considered in scheduling instruc tions noschedule Scheduling is not applied to instruction execution map All access to external variables is optimized smap Access to external variables is optimized as defined in the file to be compiled nomap Access to external variables is not optimized approxdiv Division of floating point constants is converted into multi plication enable_register R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Variables with the register storage class specification are given preference for allocation to registers Page 345 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Classification Option Description Optimize Options simple_float_conv Part of the type conversion processi
438. l allocation information file is not the same as the order of the declaration of variables found when the object was read after compilations an error will be output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs the external symbol allocation information file in the Output category Remarks This option is valid only when form absolute hexadecimal stype binary is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 526 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE space lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format spac lt numerical value gt Random Description Fills the unused areas in the output ranges with random values or a user specified hexadecimal value The following unused areas are filled with the value according to the output range specification in the output option When section names are specified for the output range The specified value is output to unused areas between the specified sections When an address range is specified for the output range The specified value is output to unused areas within the specified address range A1 2 or 4 byte value can be specified The hexadecimal value specified to the space option determines the output data size If a 3 byte value is specified the upper digit is extended with 0 to use it as a 4 byte value If an
439. l be allocated to the RAM 2 Set build options In order to support the overlay section selection facility set up sections and overlay sections to be mapped from the ROM to the RAM Select the build tool node on the project tree and select on the Link Options tab in the Property panel a Setup sections to be mapped from the ROM to the RAM This setting can be made through the ROM to RAM mapped section property under the Output category Reserve a RAM section as large as the ROM section and relocate the symbols defined in the ROM to the corre sponding addresses in the RAM section Figure 2 49 ROM to RAM mapped section Property E Output Output file type Outputs debugging information a ROM to Load module file FOrm Absolute d d d OOF d d RAM mapped section OM to RAM mapped section 3 Clicking on the button opens the Text Edit dialog box Figure 2 50 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit PsectO1 ram01 PsectO2 ram02 PsectO3 ram03 Psectl1 ram11 Psect12 ram12 Psect 3 ram13 Dsect01 Bsect01 Dsect02 BsectO2 DsectO3 BsectO3 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 36 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 In the Text field enter pairs of section names in the form of ROM section name RAM section name Write one pair on each line Up to 30 lines can be listed each consisting of up to 256 characters Then click on the OK button The entered section names will be displayed as sub p
440. l be ignored and code will always be generated as if alias noansi has been selected R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 418 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE float_order lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format float_order Default If this option is omitted optimization of modification of the operation order in a floating point expression is not performed Description This option is not available in V 2 00 Any specification of this option will simply be ignored and will not lead to an error due to compatibility with former versions R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 419 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE ip_optimize lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format ip_optimize Description This option applies global optimization including optimization that utilizes interprocedural alias analysis and propagation of constant parameters and return values Example Examples 1 lt C source code gt static int funcl int a int b a 0 b 1 return a x 2 func2 return funcl x x 1 lt Output assembly code without ip_optimize gt optimize 2 size __ Sfuncl MOV L 00000000H R1 MOV L 00000001H R2 MOV L R1 R1 RTS _f une2 MOV L _x R1 ADD 04H R1 R2 BRA _ func1 lt Output assembly code with ip_optimize gt optimize
441. l node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Conversion file name property in the Convert Load Module File category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 22 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 5 Figure 2 18 Conversion file name Property For Hex File E Convert Load Module File Load module file convert format Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal Unifies the record size No Divides the conversion file No 5 Conversion file name test hex peches byte count for data recor 0 Outputs the calculation result of CAC No This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Remark When Yes on the Divides the conversion file property is selected the hex file is split into multiple files When changing the S record file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Conversion file name property in the Convert Load Module File category Figure 2 19 Conversion file name Property For S Record File E Convert Load Module File Load module file convert format S record file FOrm Stype Unifies the record size No Divides the convers
442. l or build target files are changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure 2 97 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build is valid When a rapid build is invalid Build Build Em Build Project F7 Build Project F7 E Rebuild Project Shift F7 E Rebuild Project Shift F7 eq Clean Project J Dependencies d clean Project 2 Rapid Build e Dependencies T Build sample T Build sample ira Rebuild sample H Rebuild sample p Clean sample p Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample ag Update Dependencies of sample A A T Build Mode Settings T Build Mode Settings El Batch Build El Batch Build T Build Option List TP Build Option List Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key Remarks 2 Enabling disabling a rapid build is set for the entire project main project and subprojects Remarks 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time Caution This function will also be enabled in an external text editor if the Observe registered files changing checkbox is selected in the Build Debug category of the Option dialog box 2 13 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch wi
443. le No Does not output a hex file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 191 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Output folder Specifies path of the output folder The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Res
444. le Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 505 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE big5 lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format big5 Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in BIG5 code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in big5 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 506 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE gb2312 lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format gb2312 Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in GB2312 code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in gb2312 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 507 of 596 May 20 2
445. le is not selected this button will be disabled Opens the Select Import File dialog box The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specification file and then they are reflected in File If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Opens the Select Export File dialog box Outputs the list of the file names displayed in File to the specified link order speci fication file If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Remark See 2 12 2 Set the link order of files for the method of using the link order specification file Function buttons Button Function Sets the input order of the files to the linker as the display order in File and closes this dialog box Cancels the link order settings and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 296 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 33 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to Al Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Duplicate ial The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons
446. le list to be input to the linker a File The names of the following files are listed in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproj ect Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject The default order is the order that the files are added to the project By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names Remarks 1 When the mouse cursor is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the differ ent drive then it appears as the absolute path Remarks 2 Object module files which are generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 295 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 3 When the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together b Button Moves the selected file to up If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Moves the selected file to down If any fi
447. le options If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Compile Options C tab will be displayed Figure 2 66 Property Panel Individual Compile Options C Tab Property j main c Property E Source Language of the C source file C C89 lang c Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Include files at the head of compiling units Include files at the head of compiling units 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output No nomessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Changes the warming level messages to information level messages No Changes the information level messages to warning level messages No Changes the information level and waring level messages to error No Permits comment nesting No comment nonest Checks the compatibility with an existing program No Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis Object Output file type Object module file output obj Object file name Outputs debugging information Yes debug Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sectior No Allocates initialized v
448. lect from the drop down list change Restriction Depends on the optimi Depends on the optimization level and zation level and optimi optimization type options zation type options Yes inline lt numeric Performs inline expansion automatically value gt No noinline Does not perform inline expansion auto matically Maximum increasing rate of function size Specifies maximum increasing rate of function size For example when 100 is specified inline expansion will be performed until the func tion size has increased by 100 size is doubled This option corresponds to the inline option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes inline lt numeric value gt in the Performs inline expansion automatically property is selected Default 100 decimal number How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction 1 to 65535 decimal number Expansion method of the switch statement Selects expansion method of the switch statement This corresponds to the case option of the compiler Default Compiler automatically selects case auto How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction if_then method Expands the switch statement using the case ifthen if_ then method Jumping to a table Expands the switch statement by using method case table the table method Compiler automatically Automatically selects the if_then method se
449. lect the predefined macros to disable to set to the area that opened this dialog box via check boxes Remark In the area that opened this dialog box if a predefined macros to disable is already set the check box for that macro will be selected by default Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and specifies the selected macros to the area that opened this dialog box Cancel Cancels the macros selecting and closes the dialog box R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 323 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Button Function Enable All Select all the macros in Select items Disable All Deselect all the macros in Select items Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 324 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the rule number dialog box This dialog box is used to select numbers of the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 50 Specify the rule number Dialog Box Specify the rule number Select items Function buttons Enable All Disable All Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Compile
450. lects case auto or table method R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 143 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Handles external vari ables as if they are volatile qualified A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to handle all external variables as if they are volatile qualified This corresponds to the volatile and novolatile option of the compiler Default No novolatile How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes volatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile qualified No novolatile Does not handle external variables as if they were volatile qualified Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Selects whether to perform the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Const qualified variables in a C source file cannot be controlled by this option con stant propagation is always performed This corresponds to the const_copy and noconst_copy option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization level options How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level options Depends on the optimization level options Yes const_copy Enables constant propagation of const qualified external variables No noconst_copy Disables constant propagation of const qualified ext
451. ler source file src Text file txt Empty C source file File name main c File location D work sample ic In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file is added below the File node The project tree after adding the file will look like the one below Figure 2 5 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree 2 sample Project RSF56108W xBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 15 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 6 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree LT sample Project RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File Lez iz Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 3 5 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order Cautions 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the setting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the
452. les of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Misra2004 rule file rde Misra2004 rule file default All files All the formats Function buttons Button Function Open Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 328 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Figure A 52 Save As Dialog Box Save in sample A 4 My Recent sample ib Documents Output Build Tool txt Sae i P Lie Function buttons Text Files txt The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Save file name As from the File menu Focus the Output panel and then select Save tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file The following folders are selected by default a In the Editor panel The folder that currently editing file is saved b In the Output panel The project folder is selected when the file is save for the first time The previou
453. level This corresponds to the optimize option of the compiler Default 2 optimize 2 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 0 optimize 0 Does not optimize the program 1 optimize 1 Partially optimizes the program by auto matically allocating variables to registers integrating the function exit blocks inte grating multiple instructions which can be integrated etc 2 optimize 2 Performs overall optimization Max optimize max Performs optimization as much as possi ble Outputs additional information for inter module optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not outputs additional information for inter module optimization Optimization type Selects optimization type This corresponds to the speed and size option of the compiler Default Optimizes with emphasis on code size size How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Optimizes with emphasis on execution perfor mance speed Optimizes wit
454. level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt ErrorNumbers gt in the Changes the information level messages to warning level messages property is specified Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level and warning level messages to error level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to change the information level and warning level messages to error level messages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge error Changes all information level and warning level messages to error level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge error lt Erro rNumber gt Changes the information level and warning level messages with the specified error numbers to error level messages ztENESAS No Does not change the warning level messages to inform
455. lias noansi is specified This corresponds to the alias option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes alias ansi Performs optimization considering the type of the data indicated by the pointer No alias noansi Does not perform optimization consider ing the type of the data indicated by the pointer R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 260 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Optimizes modifica Selects whether to optimize modification of the operation order of a floating point tion of the operation expression order of a floating Specifying the float_order option generally improves the object performance com point expression pared to when not specifying it However the accuracy of operations may differ from that when float_order is not specified This corresponds to the float_order option of the compiler This property is valid only when 2 optimize 2 or Max optimize max in the Optimization level property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes float_order Optimizes modification of the operation order in a floating point expression No Does not optimize modification of the operation order in a floating point expres sion 5 Output File The detailed in
456. ling a function only for branch 32 void func sub Without pic _func MOV L JMP With pic _func _sub L11 R14 uiis R14 Acquiring a function address void funcl void void f_ptr void void func2 void f_ptr funcl R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 448 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Without pic _func2 MOV L _f ptr R4 MOV L _funcl R4 RTS With pic _func2 MOV L _f_ptr R4 L11 MVFC PC R14 ADD _func1 L11 R14 MOV L R14 R4 RTS Remarks In C or EC compilation the pic option cannot be selected If selected message W0523039 is output as a warn ing and the selection of the pic option is disabled The address of a function which is PIC should not be used in the initialization expression used for static initialization If used error E0523026 will occur lt Example of using a PIC address for static initialization gt void pic_funcl void pic_func2 int pic_func3 int void fptrli_for_pic pic funci struct PIC_funcs int code void fptr int F struct PIC_funcs pic_funcs t 2 pic funca Becomes PIC Uses PIC address in static initialization Uses PIC address in static initialization S 3 pic_func3 Uses PIC address in static initialization When creating a code for startup of the application program using the PIC
457. litary including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products who distributes disposes of or otherwise places the product with a third party to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2012 4 How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment fo
458. lity with an existing program No Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis E Object Output file type Object module file output obj Object file name Outputs debugging information Yesf debug Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sectic No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment se No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary aligny No Adjustment for instruction in branch None noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIY DIVU and the FDI ins Yes Character code of an output assembly lanquage file SJIS code outcode siis Language of the C source fle Selects language of the C source file This option corresponds to the lang option of the compiler Build Settings File Information Description of each category 1 Source The detailed information on the source is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 243 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Language of the C source file Selects language of the C source file This option corresponds to the lang opt
459. log Edit menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive to the Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Search tab target Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Whole Replace tab target Context menu copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on this panel R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 277 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and col umn Help for Message Shows the help with regard to the message at the current caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 278 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 23 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file stc Text file txt Empty C
460. mation Yes debug Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Optimization type Outputs a source list file 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble gt Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition 4 Frequently Used Options for Link gt Using libraries Outputs debugging information Optimization type Section start address 4 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Common Options 4 Environment Variables Command Prompt Environment variables are listed below Table B 2 Environment Variables Environment Variable Compile Options 4 AssembleOptions Link Options Optimizes with emphasis on code size size No nolistfile Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug No optimize NOOPtimize B_1 R_1 B_2 R_2 B R SU S1 04 PResetPRG OFFFFE000 C_1 C_2 C CSDSEC Description Hex Output Options Library Generate Options Default When Specification is Omitted path Specifies a storage directory for the execution file Specification cannot be omitted BIN_RX Specifies the directory in which ccrx is stored lt ccrx storage directory gt Specification cannot be omitted when the lbgrx command is used ISA_RX 1 Selects an instruction set archi tec
461. may lead to an error in compilation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 422 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE whole_program lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format whole_program Description This option makes the compiler perform optimization on the assumption that all source files have been input Remarks When this option is specified do not include C language source files among the input files When this option is specified do not specify lang cpp or lang ecpp Specifying this option also makes the ip_optimize option effective and if multiple source files are input the merge_files option is also effective When this option is specified compilation is on the assumption that the conditions listed below are satisfied Correct operation is not guaranteed otherwise Values and addresses of extern variables defined in the target source files will not be modified or referred to by other files Functions within the target source file will not be called from within other files although functions in other files can be called from within the target source files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 423 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Example wp c extern void g void int func void static int att g return a a 0 Without whole_program The compiler assumes
462. mbly language files tp1 src and tp2 src in asrx to generate relocatable files tp1 obj and tp2 obj Link the relocatable files tp1 obj and tp2 obj in rlink to generate an absolute file tp abs Command description ccrx isa rxvl output sre tpl c tp2 c asrx tpl srce tp2 src rlink form abs output tp abs subcommand cmd sub tpl obj tp2 obj Remark When the output src option is specified in cerx cerx generates assembly language files Assemble and Linkage by One Command Perform all steps below by a single command Assemble assembly language files tp1 src and tp2 src in asrx After assemble link the files in rlink to generate an absolute file tp abs Command description ccrx isa rxvl output abs tp abs tpl srce tp2 sre Remark Object files that are to be linked are allocated from address 0 The order of the sections is not guaranteed In order to specify the allocation address or section allocation order specify options for the optimizing linkage editor using the Inkemd and Inkopt options Assemble and Linkage by Separate Commands Individually perform each step below by a single command Assemble assembly language files tp1 src and tp2 src in asrx to generate relocatable files tp1 obj and tp2 obj Link the relocatable files tp1 obj and tp2 obj in rlink to generate an absolute file tp abs Command description 1 ccrx isa rxvl output obj tpl sre
463. me with one file name per line Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation example file2 mot 400 ffff To define multiple sections use a colon to separate each entry written as in file name section name section name example file1 mot stack istack The default extensions depends on Load module file convert format property when extension omitted The default extensions are as follows Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal hex S record file FOrm Stype mot Binary data file FOrm Binary bin The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only
464. message output property is specified Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Fills in padding data at the end of a section Selects whether to fill in padding data at the end of a section This corresponds to the padding option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes PAD DING Fills in padding data at the end of a section No Does not fill in padding data at the end of a section Address setting for specified vector num ber Specifies the address setting for specified vector number Specifies in the format of vector number symbol or vector number address with one vector number per line Specifies a decimal value from 0 to 255 for vector number Specifies the external name of the target function for symbol Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the vecin option of the linker Default Address setting for specified vector number number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Address
465. mmand Options Object Options gt Format debug Default If this option is not specified no debugging information is output to the relocatable file Description When the debug option is specified debugging information is output to the relocatable file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 480 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nodebug lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt Format nodebug Default If this option is not specified no debugging information is output to the relocatable file Description When the nodebug option is specified no debugging information is output to the relocatable file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 481 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE goptimize lt Assembler Command Options Object Options gt Format goptimize Default If this option is not specified additional information for the inter module optimization is not output Description This option outputs the additional information for the inter module optimization
466. mode see 2 12 7 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 53 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 12 7 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 85 Build Mode Property H i i noe Build mode DefaultBuild v 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box opens Figure 2 86 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selecte
467. modules When form absolute relocate hexadecimal stype binary has been specified this option deletes external sym bols R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 569 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE strip lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format strip Description Deletes debugging information in an absolute file or library file When the strip option is specified one input file should correspond to one output file Examples input filel abs file2 abs file3 abs strip Deletes debugging information of file1 abs file2 abs and file3 abs and outputs this information to file1 abs file2 abs and file3 abs respectively Files before debugging information is deleted are backed up in file1 abk file2 abk and file3 abk Remarks When form object relocate hexadecimal stype binary is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 570 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE change_message lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format change_message lt suboption gt lt suboption gt lt error level gt lt error number gt lt error number gt lt error level gt Information Warning Error Description Modifies the level of information warning and error messages S
468. mpresses the debugging information prop erty in the Verify category Default No MEMory High How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes MEMory Low Reduces the memory occupancy No MEMory High Does not reduce the memory occupancy R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 175 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Changes the warning level messages to information level mes sages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to change the warning level messages to information level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_message i nformation Changes all warning level messages to the information level messages Yes Specifies error number change_message i nformation lt Error Number gt Changes the warning level messages with the specified error numbers to the information level messages No Does not change the warning level messages to the information level messages Error number of warn ing level message Specifies error number of warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker This property is displayed
469. n How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes scope Divides the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation No noscope Does not divide the optimizing ranges before compilation Schedules the instruc tion taking into consid eration pipeline processing Selects whether to schedule the instruction taking into consideration pipeline process ing This corresponds to the schedule and noschedule option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes schedule Schedules instructions taking into consid eration pipeline processing No noschedule Does not schedule instructions Optimizes accesses to external variables Selects whether to optimize accesses to external variables This corresponds to the nomap smap and map option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Optimizes the inner module smap Optimizes accesses to external variables which are defined in the file to be com piled Yes Optimizes the inter m
470. n Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow SYmbo Outputs a symbol information to the linkage list file No Does not output a symbol information to the linkage list file Outputs the number of symbol references Selects whether to output the number of symbol references This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is not displayed when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Reference Outputs the number of symbol references to the linkage list file No Does not output the number of symbol refer ences to the linkage list file Outputs the cross ref erence information Selects whether to output the cross reference information This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is not displayed when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Xreference Outputs the cross reference information to the linkage list file No Does not output the cross reference informa tion to the lin
471. n corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the cat egory name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Sets selected project or sub project as Active Project Set the selected project or subproject as an active project Close Project Closes the current project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 85 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file sys tem Save Project and Develop Saves a set of this product and the project by copying them in a folder ment Tools as Package b Build The Build menu shows menu items for the bu
472. n display the list of build options set currently on the Property panel for the project main project and subproject If you select Build Options List from the Build menu the current settings of the options for the project are displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order Remark You can change the display format of the build option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the Others category Figure 2 79 Format of build option list Property emporary folder Commands executed before build processing Commands executed before build processing 0 Commands executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing 0 TargetFiles TargetFiles Program Options is set by default Remark TargetFiles Program and Options are placeholders They are replaced with the file name being built program name under execution and command line option under build execution 2 12 5 Change the file build target project When running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu R20UT2998EJ0100 Re
473. n does not exceed the 8 byte boundary In 8 byte boundary alignment of instructions the address will not be changed unless the target instruction exceeds the 8 byte boundary Therefore only the address of function f2 is actually aligned TALIGN 8 AD 01H R1 RTS INSTALIGN 8 _a R4 0 R4 TALIGN 8 ION P CODE ALIGN 8 Function f1 address 2 bytes 1 byte Function 2 address 0008H Note Alignment is performed When a 6 byte instruction is placed at 0003H it exceeds the 8 byte boundary Thus alignment is performed 6 bytes 3 bytes 1 byte Function 3 address 0012H R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 377 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noinstalign lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format noinstalign Description This option does not aligns instructions at branch destinations This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Adjustment for instruction in branch in the Object category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 378 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nouse_div_inst lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format nouse_div_inst Description This option generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used for division and modular division operations
474. n list change Restriction Yes output src Outputs the assembly source file of the com pile result for the C source No Does not output the assembly source file of the compile result for the C source Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a source file file This corresponds to the output prep noline option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes output prep Outputs the execution result of preprocess ing for the source file to a file Yes Suppress line Outputs the execution result of preprocess output prep noline ing suppress line for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of pre processing for the source file to a file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 237 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 MISRA C rule check A WINDOWS REFERENCE The detailed information on the MISRA C 2004 rules check is displayed and the configuration can be changed Apply rule Selects to apply MISRA C rule This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Apply all rules misra2004 all Checks the source code against all of the rules that
475. n1 utf8 big5 and gb2312 option of the com piler option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code euc Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using EUC SJIS code sjis Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using SJIS ISO Latin1 code latin1 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using ISO Latin1 UTF 8 code utf8 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using UTF 8 This item is not available when C C89 lang c in the Language of the C source file property is selected Traditional Chi nese character big5 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Traditional Chi nese character Simplified Chi nese character gb2312 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Simplified Chinese character The detailed information on object is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects the type of the output file to be generated during a build This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change S
476. name of con stant area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the section name of constant area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction ztENESAS Up to 32767 characters Page 250 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Section name of initial ized data area Specifies the section name of initialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of unini tialized data area Specifies the section name of uninitialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of literal area Specifies the section name of literal area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of switch statement branch table area Specifies the section name of switch statement branch table area This corresponds to the section option of the compil
477. nated file to the area that this dialog box is called from Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 309 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to select the target project file for import the build options Figure A 40 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import Build Options O sample DB DefaultBuild sample mtpj My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents gs My Computer File name iles of type Project File mtpi The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Function buttons On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the target project file for import the build options exists The current project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type 3 File name area Specify the name of the project file 4 Files of type area Select the type of the project file Project file mtpj Project file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 310 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFER
478. nclude file Optional Input A file referenced by the source file and written in C C99 C or assembly language This file is created by the user Preprocessor expansion file for the C program Output A file output as a result of preprocessing applied to an input C language or the C99 language source pro gram An ASCII image file This is output when the output prep option is speci fied Preprocessor expansion file for the C program Output A file output as a result of preprocessing applied to an input C language source program An ASCII image file This is output when the output prep option is speci fied Assembly source program file An assembly language file generated from a C C99 or C source file through compilation A source file written in assembly language List file for the assembly program A list file containing the assembly result information This is output when the listfile option is specified The output contents are selected with the show option Relocatable object program file An ELF format file that contains the machine language information the relocation information about the allo cation addresses of machine language instructions and symbol information Absolute load module file Output An ELF format file for the object code generated as a result of linkage This is an input file when a hex file is output Linkage list file Output
479. nd long double type are handled as the single precision floating type 4 bytes When dbl_ size 8 is specified the double type and long double type are handled as the double precision floating type 8 bytes This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Precision of the double type and long double type in the CPU category Remarks When dbl_ size 4 is selected among the standard functions the mathf h and math h functions having the same specifications as each other e g sqrtf and sqrt are integrated to configure a standard library Because of this phe nomena such as the following example will occur when dbl_size 4 is selected When the RX simulator or emulator traces single step execution the calling of sqrtf which is a mathf h header function it appears as if not sqrtf but sqrt which is a math h header function with the same specifications has been called R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 431 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE int_to_short lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format int_to_short Default Before compilation the int type is not replaced with the short type and the unsigned int type is not replaced with the unsigned short type in the source file Description Before compilation the int type is replaced with the short type and the unsigned int type is replaced with th
480. ndled as unsigned Description When signed_bitfield is specified the value is handled as signed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Sign of the bit field type in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 435 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE unsigned_bitfield lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format unsigned_bitfield Default When unsigned_bitfield is omitted the value is handled as unsigned Description When unsigned_bitfield is specified the value is handled as unsigned This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Sign of the bit field type in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 436 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE auto_enum lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format auto_enum Default The default for this option is to process the enumeration type size as the signed long type Description This option processes the enumerated data qualified by enum as the minimum data type with which the enumeration value can fit in The possible enumeration values correspond to the data types as shown in the following table Table B 6 Correspondences between Possible Enumeration Values and Data Types Enumera
481. nerates an assembly language source file Preprocessor This processes the preprocessing directives in the source program Only when the P option is specified it outputs the preprocessed file Parsing section This parses the C source program and then converts it to the internal data representation for the compiler Optimizing section This optimizes the internal data representation converted from the C source program Code generating section This converts the internal data representation to an assembly language source program Assembler This converts the assembly language source program to machine language instructions and generates a relocat able object module file Optimizing linkage editor This links object module files link directive files and library files and generates an object file load module file executable in the target system B 1 1 Input Output Files The following shows the files input to and output from the RX family C C compiler R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 337 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Table B 1 File Type Extension 1 0 B COMMAND REFERENCE Input Output Files for the RX Family C C Compiler Description C source program file Input A source file written in C99 language This file is created by the user C source program file cpp cp and CC Input A source file written in C language This file is created by the user I
482. ng between the float ing point type and the integer type is omitted fpu Floating point calculation instructions are used nofpu Floating point calculation instructions are not used alias Optimization is performed in consideration of the types of data indicated by pointers float_order The orders of operations in floating point expressions are modified for optimization ip_optimize Selects global optimization merge_files The results of compiling multiple source files are output to a single object file whole_program Makes the compiler perform optimization on the assump tion that all source files have been input Microcontroller Options isa Selects the instruction set architecture cpu Selects the microcontroller type endian Selects the endian type round Selects the rounding method for floating point constant operations denormalize Selects the operation when denormalized numbers are used to describe floating point constants dbl_ size Selects the precision of the double and long double types int_to_short Replaces the int type with the short type and the unsigned int type with the unsigned short type signed_char Variables of the char type are handled as signed char unsigned_char Variables of the char type are handled as unsigned char signed_bitfield The sign bits of bit fields are taken as signed unsigned_bitfield The sign bits
483. ng function Enables the C exceptional handling function dynamic_cast and typeid Selects whether to enable the C exceptional handling function dynamic_cast and typeid This corresponds to the rtti option of the compiler and library generator Default No rtti off How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rtti on Enables dynamic_cast and typeid No rtti off Disables dynamic_cast and typeid General registers used only in fast interrupt functions Selects registers used only for fast interrupts This corresponds to the fint_register option of the compiler and library generator fint_register option of the assembler Default None fint_register 0 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction None fint_register 0 No registers are used only for fast inter rupts R13 fint_register 1 R13 is used only for fast nterrupts R12 R13 fint_register 2 R13 and R12 are used only for fast inter rupts R11 to R13 fint_register 3 R13 to R11 are used only for fast inter rupts R10 to R13 fint_register 4 R13 to R10 are used only for fast inter rupts Branch width size R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects branch width size This corresponds to the branch option of the compiler and library generator Default Compiles within 24 bits branch 24
484. nitialized variables to 4 byte boundary tuff B alignment sections No Does not allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment Selects whether to allocate initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler sections f Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary align tuff D ment sections No Does not allocates initialized variables to 4 byte bound ary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 227 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Allocates const quali fied variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes nos Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary tuff C alignment sections No Does not allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates switch state ment branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections Selects whether to
485. nkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt The following other options are available s9 stack compress nocompress memory rename delete replace extract strip change_message hide total_size R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 560 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE S9 lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format s9 Description Outputs the S9 record at the end even if the entry address exceeds 0x10000 This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Outputs the S9 record at the end in the Hex Format category Remarks When form stype is not specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 561 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE stack lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Other Options gt Format stack Description Outputs a stack consumption information file The file name is lt output file name gt sni This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs a stack use information file in the Others category Remarks When form object relocate library or strip is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS P
486. nly when the instruction at the specified location exceeds the address which is a multiple of the alignment value 4 1 The following three types of branch destination can be selected by specifying the suboptions of instalign4 No specification Head of function and case and default labels of switch statement inmostloop Head of each inmost loop head of function and case and default labels of switch statement loop Head of each loop head of function and case and default labels of switch statement When this option is selected the alignment value of the program section is changed from 1 to 4 for instalign4 or 8 for instalign8 This option aims to efficiently operate the instruction queues of the RX CPU and improve the speed of program exe cution by aligning the addresses of branch destination instructions This option has specifications targeting the following usage instalign4 When attempting to improve the speed of CPUs with a 32 bit instruction queue mainly RX200 Series This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Adjustment for instruction in branch in the Object category Notes 1 This is when the instruction size is equal to or smaller than the alignment value If the instruction size is greater than the alignment value alignment is performed only when the number of exceeding points is two or more Notes 2 Alignment is adjusted only for the branch des
487. nouse_div_inst 7tENESAS Generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used Page 253 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an output assembly lan guage file 3 List A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an output assembly language file This corresponds to the outcode option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code out code euc Outputs characters in strings and character constants using EUC SJIS code out codessjis Outputs characters in strings and character constants using SJIS UTF 8 code out code utf8 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using UTF 8 This item is not available when C C839 lang c in the Language of the C source file property in the Source category is selected Traditional Chinese character out code big5 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Traditional Chinese charac ter Simplified Chinese character out code gb231 2 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Simplified Chinese charac ter The detailed information on list file is displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs a source list file Selects whether to output a source list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolisifile option
488. ns Remarks 4 Object files that are to be linked are allocated from address 0 The order of the sections is not guaranteed In order to specify the allocation address or section allocation order specify options for the optimizing linkage editor using the Inkemd and Inkopt options Compilation and Assemble by One Command Perform all steps below by a single command and initiate the linker with another command to generate tp abs Compile C C source files tp1 c and tp2 c in cerx After compilation assemble the files in asrx to generate relocatable files tp1 obj and tp2 ob Command description ccrx isa rxvl output obj tpl c tp2 c rlink form abs output tp abs subcommand cmd sub tpl obj tp2 obj Remarks 1 When the output obj option is specified in cerx ccrx generates relocatable files Remarks 2 In order to change relocatable file names their C C source files have to be input in cerx one file each R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 340 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Remarks 3 When the form option in rlink is changed to form sty the file after linkage will be generated as a Motorola S type file Compilation Assemble and Linkage by Separate Commands Individually perform each step below by a single command Compile C C source files tp1 c and tp2 c in cerx to generate assembly language files tp1 src and tp2 src Assemble the asse
489. ns are categorized as follows with the overall size of each being output Executable program sections Non program sections allocated to the ROM area Sections allocated to the RAM area This option makes it easy to see the total sizes of sections allocated to the ROM and RAM areas This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Displays the total sizes of sections in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Displays the total sizes of sections in the Others category Remarks The shows total_size option must be used if total sizes of sections are to be output in the linkage listing When the ROM support function rom option has been specified for a section the section will be used by both the source ROM and destination RAM of the transfer The sizes of sections of this type will be added to the total sizes of sections in both ROM and RAM R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 574 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand File Option lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Subcommand File Option gt The following subcommand file option is available subcommand R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 575 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE subcommand lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Subcommand File Option gt Format
490. ns cannot be controlled by the noconst_div option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 401 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE library lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format library function intrinsic Default The default for this option is library intrinsic Description When library function is specified all library functions are called When library intrinsic is specified instruction expansion is performed for abs fabsf and library functions which can use string manipulation instructions This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Expansion method of the library function in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Expansion method of the library function in the Optimization cate gory Remarks When library intrinsic and isa rxv2 are selected at the same time calls of the sqrtf function or the sqrt function when dbl_size 4 are expanded as FSQRT instructions Note however that no value is set for errno in such cases R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 402 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE scope lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format scope Default The default for this option is scope when the optimize max option has been specified Description W
491. nstall folder This option corresponds to the ignore_files_misra option of the compiler This option is not display when Not apply rule in the Apply rule property has been specified Default Rule check exclusion file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Outputs message of Selects whether to output message of the enhanced key word and extended specifi the enhanced key cations word and extended This option corresponds to the check_language_extension option specifications This option is not display when Not apply rule in the Apply rule property has been specified Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Enables complete checking against the check_language_ext MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code ension where it would otherwise be suppressed due to individual extensions from the C C lan guage specification Disables complete checking against the MISRA C 2004 rules for parts of the code where it would otherwise be suppressed due to individual extensions from the C C lan guage specification 7 Others Other detailed information on compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs the copyright
492. nstruction code to be generated When cpu rx600 is specified an instruction code for the RX600 Series is generated When cpu rx200 is specified an instruction code for the RX200 Series is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Microcontroller type in the CPU category Remarks This option is for compatibility with earlier products For upcoming RX family MCUs the isa option will be used instead of the cpu option to select an instruction set archi tecture In developing new applications use the isa option where possible The cpu option can be replaced by the isa fpu and nofpu option as follows cpu rx600 gt isa rxv1 fpu cpu rx200 gt isa rxv1 nofpu When cpu rx200 is specified the nofpu option is automatically selected cpu rx200 and the fpu option cannot be specified at the same time When cpu rx600 is specified while neither the nofpu option nor the fpu option has been specified the fpu option is automatically selected Omitting the cpu option will lead to an error if neither the isa option nor one of the environment variables CPU_RX or ISA_RX is specified The cpu and isa options cannot be specified at the same time R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 427 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE endian lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt
493. nstruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after
494. o Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs additional information for inter module goptimize optimization No Does not output additional information for inter module optimization 3 List The detailed information on the list is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Outputs a assemble Selects whether to output an assemble list file list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolistfile option of the assembler This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Default No nolistfile How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes listfile Outputs an assemble list file No nolistfile Does not output an assemble list file Outputs the state Specifies the contents of the assemble list file ments unsatisfied in Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show con Outputs the statements unsatisfied in conditional ditionals assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied
495. o the out mot file OxFF is used in CRC for calculation of the free areas but will not be filled into these areas Notes 1 The address where the result of CRC will be output cannot be included in the target range Notes 2 The address where the result of CRC will be output must be included in the output range speci fied with the output option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 532 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE rlink obj form stype start P1 1000 P2 1800 P3 2000 space 7F crc 2FFE 1000 17FF 2000 27FF output out mot 1000 2FFF ere option crce 2FFE 1000 2FFD 2000 27FF In this example CRC will be calculated for the two ranges 0x1000 to 0x17FF and 0x2000 to 0x27FF and the result will be output to address Ox2FFE Two or more non contiguous address ranges can be selected as the target range for CRC Space option space 7F The value of the space option 0x7F is used for CRC in free areas within the target range output option output out mot 1000 2FFF Since the space option has been specified the free areas are output to the out mot file Ox7F will be filled into the free areas Notes 1 The order that CRC is calculated for the specified address ranges is not the order that the ranges have been specified CRC proceeds from the lowest to the highest address Notes 2 Even if you wish to use the cre and space options at the same time the space option cannot be set as
496. odd number of digits are specified the upper digits are extended with 0 to use it as an even number of digits If the size of an unused area is not a multiple of the size of the specified value the value is output as many times as possible then a warning message is output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Fills the unused areas in the output ranges with the value and Output pad ding data in the Convert Load Module File category Remarks When no suboption is specified by this option unused areas are not filled with values This option is available only when form binary stype hexadecimal is specified When no output range is specified by the output option this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 527 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE message lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format message Description When message is specified information level messages are output When this option is omitted the output of information level messages is disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Enables information level message output in the Output category From the Librarian Options tab Enables information level message output in the Output category R
497. oducts For upcoming RX family MCUs the isa option will be used instead of the cpu option to select an instruction set archi tecture In developing new applications use the isa option where possible The cpu option can be replaced by the isa fpu and nofpu options as follows cpu rx600 gt isa rxv1 fpu cpu rx200 gt isa rxv1 nofpu Suboptions will be added depending on the microcontroller products developed in the future When cpu rx200 is specified the nofpu option is automatically selected and writing floating point operation instructions which are not supported by the RX200 Series or writing FPSW in control registers will cause an error cpu rx200 and the fpu option cannot be specified at the same time When cpu rx600 is specified while neither the nofpu option nor the fpu option has been specified the fpu option is automatically selected Omitting the cpu option will lead to an error if neither the isa option nor one of the environment variables CPU_RX or ISA_RX is specified The cpu and isa options cannot be specified at the same time R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 491 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE endian lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format endian big little Default The default for this option is endianz little Description When endian big is specified
498. odule map Optimizes accesses to external variables No nomap Disables optimization for accesses to external variables Perform inter module optimization R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specify the level of inter module optimization such as function merging This correspon ds to the ip_optimize option of the ccrh command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Level 1 Perform ip_optimize Performs inter module optimization for each file No ztENESAS Does not perform inter module optimiza tion Page 235 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Converts floating point Selects whether to convert floating point constant division into multiplication of the constant division into corresponding reciprocals as constants multiplication This corresponds to the approxdiv option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes approxdiv Converts floating point constant division into multiplication No Does not convert floating point constant division into multiplication Omits a check of the Selects whether to omit a check of the range for conversion between the floating type range for conversion and unsigned integer type between the floating When Yes is specified
499. odule files This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No nodebug Does not output debugging information to object module files The detailed information on the list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs a assemble list file Selects whether to output an assemble list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolistfile option of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes listfile Outputs an assemble list file No nolistfile Does not output an assemble list file Outputs the state ments unsatisfied in conditional assembly Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show con Outputs the statements unsatisfied in conditional ditionals assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfi
500. of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked F Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 294 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer object module files and library files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Figure A 32 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order File file01 obj fileO2 obj file03 obj Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File list display area This area displays the fi
501. of bit fields are taken as unsigned auto_enum Selects whether or not the sizes for enumerated types are automatically selected bit_order Selects the order of bit field members pack Specifies one as the boundary alignment value for struc ture members and class members unpack Aligns structure members and class members to the alignment boundaries for the given data types exception Enables the exception handling function noexception Disables the exception handling function rtti Selects enabling or disabling of C runtime type informa tion dynamic_cast or typeid fint_register Selects a general register for exclusive use with the fast interrupt function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 7tENESAS Page 346 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Classification B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Microcontroller Options branch Selects the maximum size or no maximum size for branches base Specifies the base registers for ROM and RAM patch Selects avoidance or non avoidance of a problem specific to the CPU type pic Enables the PIC function pid Enables the PID function nouse_pid_register The PID register is not used in code generation Save_acc The contents of ACC are saved and restored in interrupt functions Assemble and Linkage Options asmcmd Specifies a subcommand file for asrx options
502. ol Window Help Rar SAJ X B lo o B A So Ss i SD dD ie e Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze g File Fall Build tool generated File abs sample abs mot sample mot map sample map J main c Build mode CPU PIC PID Frequently Used Options for Compie dditional include paths system include paths Macro definition Outputs debugging information Optimization level Optimization type Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths ystem include paths Macro definition Outputs debugging information Frequently Used Options for Link Outputs debugging information Optimization type Section start address DefaultBuild Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Yes debug 2 optimize 2 Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Yes debug Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug No optimize NOOPtimize P oo000000 Build Method Version Select Start build all Saturday October 08 2011 2 04 12 AM Start build sample DefaultBuild Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Saturday October 08 2011 2 04 12 AM gt allMessages Build Tool Rapid Build FY s FE Fle DISCONNECT The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open
503. ol allocation information file must be created This option is only valid for the compilation of C C source programs It does not apply to programs that have been compiled with the output src specification or to programs written in assembly language When the map option and smap option are specified simultaneously the map option is valid When continuous data sections are allocated after a program section optimization of external variable accesses may be disabled or may not be performed sufficiently For performing optimization to a maximum extent in a case in which multiple sections are allocated continuously allocate the program section at the end An example is shown below Address 0x100 Address 0x400 P c1 c2 C3 Note P Program section C1 C2 C3 Data section In the above example section P is allocated from address 0x100 sections C1 and C2 are allocated immediately after section P and section C3 is allocated from address 0x400 Since sections C1 and C2 are allocated continuously after section P section P should be allocated behind section C2 Section C3 is not involved because it is not allocated con tinuously R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 408 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE smap lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format snap Description When the smap option is specified a base address is set for global or static variable
504. omToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 131 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 System include paths A WINDOWS REFERENCE Changes the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compil ing This corresponds to the include option of the compiler Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Specifies include files at the head of compiling units
505. ompile Options Description of each category 1 Input Assemble Options A Hex Output Options Library Generate Options The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 161 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Input object module Specifies an input object module file file Add one file in one line The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the Input option of the linker The specified file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Input object module file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Using libraries Specifies an input library file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder This corresponds to the library option of the linker The library file name is displayed as the s
506. on is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 261 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the copyright Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the nologo option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright Outputs the cross ref Selects whether to output cross reference information erence information It is necessary to change the setting of the property of Program Analyzer to change this option Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Xcref Outputs the cross reference information No Does not output of the cross reference information Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed before compile processing before compile pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces
507. on name of program area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default P How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of con stant area Specifies the section name of constant area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default C How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of initial ized data area Specifies the section name of initialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default D How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of unini tialized data area Specifies the section name of uninitialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default B How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of literal area Specifies the section name of literal area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default L How to change Up to 32767 characters Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of switch statement branch table area R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the section name of switch statement branch table area This corresponds to the sect
508. on that outputs a jump table to branch to external definition symbols number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified The detailed information on the list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs the linkage list file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to output the linkage list file This corresponds to the list and show option of the linker Default Yes List contents specify LISt How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes List contents not specify LISt SHow Outputs the default information associated with a output file type to a linkage list file Yes List con tents ALL LISt SHow ALL Outputs all information associated with a output file type to a linkage list file Yes List con tents specify LISt Outputs the specified information to a link age list file ztENESAS No Does not output a linkage list file Page 168 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs a symbol name list in a module A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to output a symbol name list in a module This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is not displayed whe
509. ond time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type 3 File name area Specify the name of a link order specification file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 333 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the link order specification file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Function buttons Button Function Open Imports the specified file to the Link Order dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 334 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Export File dialog box This dialog box is used to generate a link order specification file Figure A 55 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File O sample DefaultBuild My Recent Documents 3 Desktop My Documents 98 My Computer File name a Link order specification file mtls The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Export button Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder for outputting a link order specification file Cancel Function buttons The project folde
510. onfiguration library Enables runtime Selects whether to enable runtime library library This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default Yes head runtime How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes head runtime Enables the runtime library No Disables the runtime library R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 199 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Enables ctype h C89 Selects whether to enable ctype h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head ctype Enables the ctype h C89 C99 and run time library No Disables the ctype h C89 C99 Enables math h C89 Selects whether to enable math h C89 C99 C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configu ration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head math Enables the math h C89 C99 an
511. only _funcl ADD MOV L MOV L MOV L RTS glb Acquiring the address of an externally defined symbol that is const qualified extern const int pid const int ptr void func2 ptr amp pid Without pid _func2 MOV L MOV L RTS pid R4 R4 R5 _work R4 R5 R4 when the PID register is R13 _pid __PID_TOP 16 R13 R5 _work R4 R5 R4 __PID_TOP when the PID register is R13 _pid __PID_TOP R13 R6 R6 R5 _work R4 R5 R4 __PID_TOP 1000 _ptr R4 _pid R4 With pid only when the PID register is R13 _func2 ADD MOV L MOV L RTS glb Remarks _pid __PID_TOP R13 R5 _ptr R4 R5 R4 __PID_TOP The address of an area which is PID should not be used in the initialization expression used for static initialization If used error E0523027 will occur R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 451 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE lt Example of using a PID address for static initialization gt extern const int pid_datal Becomes PID const Error const const int ptrl_for_pid amp pid_datal Uses PID address in static initialization a int pid_data4 1 2 3 4 Becomes PID int ptr2_for_pid pid_data4 Uses PID address in static initialization ad Error When creating a code for startup of the application program using the PID function refer to Application
512. only when Yes Specifies error number change_message information lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the warning level messages to information level messages property is specified Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Changes the informa tion level messages to warning level mes sages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to change the information level messages to warning level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_message warning Changes all information level messages to warning level messages Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt Error Number gt Changes the information level messages with the specified error numbers to warning level messages No Does not change the information level mes sages to warning level messages ztENESAS Page 176 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Error number of infor mation level message A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies error number of information level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen exampl
513. ons Tab Property A CC RX Property E Input Input object module file Input object module file 0 Input library file Input library file 0 System library file System library file O Initiates the prelinker Automatic control Output Output file type User library file FOrm Library U Path of the output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame lib Enables information level message output No NOMessage Suppresses the number of information level messages E List Outputs the linkage list file No Others Input object module fle Specifies an input object module file in the format of input lt library name gt lt module name gt with one per line This option corresponds to the Input option Common Options lt Compile Options Assemble Options 2 8 1 Set the output of a library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library file is made with the Output category Figure 2 60 Output Category Uutout file tupe er library file FOrm BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame lib hables information level message outpul Suppresses the number of information level messages 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Path of the output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the te
514. operty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Inputs the assemble options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 The specified option is displayed Default Command line number of defined items How to change ztENESAS Changes not allowed Page 160 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Link Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the link phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Input 2 Output 3 List 4 Optimization 5 Section 6 Verify 7 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 7 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Input Input object module file Using libraries Syst
515. operty is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property is selected Default No nolistfile How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes listfile Outputs an assemble list file No nolistfile Does not output an assemble list file ztENESAS Page 118 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Outputs the state ments unsatisfied in conditional assembly A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes show con ditionals Outputs the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly Outputs the informa tion before DEFINE replacement Specifies the contents of the assemble list file Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement This corresponds to the show option of the assembler This property is displayed only when Yes listfile in the Output a assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction
516. option is noconst_copy when the optimize 1 or optimize 0 option has been specified Description When noconst_copy is specified constant propagation is disabled for const qualified global variables This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external variables in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables in the Optimization category Remarks const qualified variables in a C source file cannot be controlled by this option constant propagation is always per formed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 399 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE const_div lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format const_div Default The default for this option is const_div when the speed option has been specified Description When const_div is specified calculations for division and remainders of integer constants in the source file are con verted into sequences of multiplication or bitwise operation shift or bitwise AND operations instructions This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants in the Optimization category
517. or information such as the section s allocation addresses 3 2 1 Structure of Linkage List Table 3 3 shows the structure and contents of the linkage list Table 3 2 Structure and Contents of Linkage List Output Information Contents When show Option When show Option is Note ig Specified not Specified Option information Option strings specified by a com None Output mand line or subcommand R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 69 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Output Information Contents When show Option Note ig Specified 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS When show Option is not Specified Error information Error messages None Output Linkage map infor mation Section name start end addresses size and type None Output Symbol information Static definition symbol name show symbol Not output address size and type in the order of address When show reference is speci show reference fied Symbol reference count and opti mization information in addition to the above information Not output Symbol deletion optimization infor mation Symbols deleted by optimization show symbol Not output Cross reference show xreference information Symbol reference information Not output Total sizes of RAM ROM and program sections Total section size showstotal_size Not output Vector numbers and address show vecto
518. ord ing to program allocation information No Does not optimize branch instruction size R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 171 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Unreferenced symbol that disables deletion by optimization A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the unreferenced symbol that disables deletion by optimization Specifies in the format of symbol name with one symbol name per line This option corresponds to the symbol_forbid option of the linker This property is not displayed when No optimize NOOPtimize in the Optimization type property is selected Default Unreferenced symbol that disables deletion by optimization number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Same code that dis ables unification regarding optimization Specifies the same code that disables unification regarding optimization Specifies in the format of function name with one function name per line This option corresponds to the samecode_forbid option of the linker This property is not displayed when No optimize NOOPtimize in the Optimization type property is selected Default Same code that disables unification regarding optimization number of defined
519. ot specify execution start address R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 163 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Execution start Specifies the execution start address address Specifies in the format of symbol name or address Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the entry option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes ENTry in the Specifies execution start address property is selected Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Initiates the prelinker Selects whether to initiate the prelinker The automatic generation of C template instance This corresponds to the noprelink option of the linker Default Automatic control How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Automatic control Disables the prelinker initiation if there is no ii file in a file to be input to linker Yes Enables the prelinker initiation No NOPRElink Disables the prelinker initiation 2 Output The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type The output file type is displayed This corresponds to the form option of the linker Default Load module file FOrm Absolute How to C
520. ource file to a source file file This corresponds to the output prep noline option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes output prep Outputs the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file Yes Suppress Outputs the execution result of preprocessing line output prep Suppress line for the source file to a file noline No Does not output the execution result of pre processing for the source file to a file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 148 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 MISRA C rule check A WINDOWS REFERENCE The detailed information on the MISRA C 2004 rules check is displayed and the configuration can be changed Apply rule Selects to apply MISRA C rule This option corresponds to the misra2004 option of the compiler Default Not apply rule How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Apply all rules misra2004 all Checks the source code against all of the rules that are supported Apply specified rule number misra2004 apply Checks the source code against the rules with the selected numbers Ignore specified rule number misra2004 ignore Checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers Apply rules that are classified as required
521. output file DE Bug Path of the output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName abs Outputs the external symbol allocation information file No Enables information level message output No NOMessage Suppresses the number of information level messages Fills in padding data at the end of a section No Address setting for specified vector number Address setting for specified vector number 0 Address setting for unused vector area Outputs the jump table No O List Outputs the linkage list file Yes List contents specify LISt Outputs a symbol name list in a module No Outputs the number of symbol references No Outputs the cross reference information No Shows the total sizes of sections No Outputs vector information No Optimization Optimization type No optimize NOOPtimize Show variable properties Input object module fle Specifies an input object module file in the format of input lt library name gt lt module name gt with one per line This corresponds to the Input option of the linker Common Options Compile Options Assemble Options Li i Hex Output Options lt Library Generate Options Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output hex file Specifies whether hex file is output Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs a hex fi
522. ox Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of unini tialized data area Specifies the section name of uninitialized data area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default B How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of literal area Specifies the section name of literal area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default L How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section name of switch statement branch table area Specifies the section name of switch statement branch table area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default W How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sec tions This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff B Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections ztENESAS
523. ox If a folder is selected the path will be added in Path One path per one line c Permit non existent path When this check box is selected the existence of the path specified in Path One path per one line or the valid ity of the character string specified in the path is not checked d Include subfolders automatically Select this check box and then click the Browse button to specify the path The path will be added including subfolders to Path One path per one line up to five levels deep Caution This item is displayed only when adding the path 2 Placeholder area The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in the path edit area a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered path to
524. ox Question Q0 203002 Are you sure you want to set the current assemble options to the individual 2 assemble options If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Assemble Options tab will be displayed Figure 2 72 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property aai main stc Property B E Source Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Character code of an input program SJIS code sjis E Object Object file name Outputs debugging information Yes debug E List Outputs an assemble list file Nof nolistfile E Optimization Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Others Additional include paths Specifies Additional include paths The path uses the project folder as the reference point Build Setti N File Information You can set assemble options for the assembler source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Assemble Options tab by default R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 46 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 12 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Import the build options of other project Set the link order of files Change the file build order of subprojects Display a list of build options
525. ox is used to select the application to open the file selected in Project Tree Figure A 53 Open with Program Dialog Box Open with Program My Recent Documents Look in Program Files J O eepe Adobe O altime300 common Files ComPlus Applications BDF IO hjghMAT CD Writing Wizard InstallShield Installation Information intel internet Explorer Lhasa Maruo Messenger microsoft frontpage Movie Maker msn Gaming Zone NEC Electronics Tools NetMeeting Network Associates online Services outlook Express SQ TTERMPRO Uninstall Information Windows Media Connect 2 Windows Media Player windows NT _ WindowsUpdate 9 WinMerge xerox msn PFile name Function buttons _ Cancel iles of type Program exe The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Selected Application from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the application to open the file is stored Program folder for Windows XP C Program Files is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the executable file name of the application to open the
526. pe Property Code Size Precedence E Optimization Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization type property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 27 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the execution speed precedence select Optimizes with emphasis on execution perfor mance speed on the Optimization type property in the Optimization category Figure 2 31 Optimization type Property Execution Speed Precedence E Optimization Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on execution performance speed v Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization type property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 3 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Source category Figure 2 32 Additional include paths Property E Sou
527. pecified Inline Expan sion Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses Optimiza tion Consid ering the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer noinline noconst_div nosched ule noconst_ copy alias noansi R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 390 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE loop lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format loop lt numeric value gt Default The default for this option is loop 2 Description This option specifies whether to optimize loop expansion When the loop option is specified the compiler expands loop statements for while and do while The maximum expansion factor can be specified by lt numeric value gt An integer from 1 to 32 can be specified for lt numeric value gt If no lt numeric value gt is specified 2 will be assumed The default for this option is determined based on the optimize option and speed or size option specifications For details refer to the speed or size option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Loop expansion and Expansion maximum number in the Optimization cate
528. pecified delimit them with comma example ing level message 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message error lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Permits comment Selects whether to permit comment nesting nesting This corresponds to the comment option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes com Does not permit comment nesting ment nest No com Permits comment nesting ment nonest Checks the compatibil Selects whether to check the compatibility with an existing program ity with an existing pro This corresponds to the check option of the compiler gram Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes NC com Checks the compatibility with the R8C and M16C piler family C compilers check nc
529. pecifies the execution continuation or abort at the message output When a message number is specified the error level of the message with the specified error number changes to the given level A range of error message numbers can be specified by using a hyphen Each error number must consist of a component number 05 phase 6 and a four digit value e g 2310 in the case of E0562310 If no error number is specified all messages will be changed to the specified level This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Changes the warning level messages to information level messages Error num ber of warning level message Changes the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of information level message Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages Error number of information level and warning level message in the Others category From the Librarian Options tab Changes the warning level messages to information level messages Error number of warning level message Changes the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of information level message Changes the information level and warning level messages to error level messages Error number of information level and warning level message in the Others category Examples change_message warning 2310 This c
530. perform inline expansion auto matically Maximum increasing rate of function size Specify maximum increasing rate of function size This option corresponds to the inline option of the library generator This property is displayed only when Yes inline lt numeric value gt in the Performs inline expansion automatically property is selected Default 100 decimal number How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 1 to 65535 decimal number Expansion method of the switch statement R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects expansion method of the switch statement This corresponds to the case option of the library generator Default Compiler automatically selects case auto How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction if_ then method case ifthen Expands the switch statement using the if_ then method Jumping to a table method case table Expands the switch statement by using the table method Compiler automatically selects case auto ztENESAS Automatically selects the if_then method or table method Page 209 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Handles external vari ables as if they are volatile qualified A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to handle all external variables as if they are volatile qualified This corresponds to the volatile and novolatile option of the library generator
531. perty Panel Common options Tab Property amp A CC RX Property 4 Build Mode DefaultBuild gt CPU gt PIC PID 4 Output File Type and Path Output file type Execute Module Load Module File Intermediate file output folder BuildModeName Frequently Used Options for Compile gt Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 gt System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Outputs debugging information Yes debug Optimization level 2 optimize 2 Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Optimization type Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Outputs a source list file No nolistfile Frequently Used Options for Assemble gt Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 gt System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Frequently Used Options for Link gt Using libraries Using libraries 0 Outputs debugging information Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug Optimization type No optimize NOOPtimize Section start address B_1 R_1 B_2 R_2 B R SU SI 04 PResetPRG OFFFFEO00 C_1 C_2 C CSDSEC lt _4 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output __ Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Link Options 7 t Opti Library Generate Options R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 103 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Description of each
532. pile option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 246 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Changes the informa tion level messages to warning level mes sages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to change the information level messages to warning level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_messa ge warning Changes all information level messages to warn ing level messages Yes Specifies error number change_messa ge warn ing lt Error Number gt Changes the information level messages with the specified error numbers to warning level mes sages No Does not change the information level messages to warning level messages Error number of infor mation level message Specifies error number of information level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number c
533. piler Default No nodebug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No node Does not output debugging information to object bug module files Optimization level Selects optimization level This corresponds to the optimize option of the compiler Default 2 optimize 2 How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction 0 optimize 0 Does not optimize the program 1 optimize 1 Partially optimizes the program by automat ically allocating variables to registers inte grating the function exit blocks integrating multiple instructions which can be inte grated etc 2 optimize 2 Performs overall optimization Max optimize max Performs optimization as much as possible Outputs additional Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization information for inter At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been module optimization specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Object module file output obj in the Output file type property in the Object category Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes gopti Outputs additional information for inter module opti mize mization No
534. places with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the include option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Use whole include paths specified for build tool Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths property in the Source category from the Assemble Options tab of the build tool to be used The include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths in the Source category from the Assemble Options tab This corresponds to the inclu
535. pported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default When Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Load module file con vert format property is selected ProjectName hex When S record file FOrm Stype in the Load module file convert format property is selected ProjectName mot When Binary data file FOrm Binary in the Load module file con vert format property is selected ProjectName bin How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 123 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Division output file Specifies the division conversion file Specifies in the format of file name start address end address or file name section name with one file name per line Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation example file2 mot 400 ffff To define multiple sections use a colon to separate each entry written as in file name section name section name example file1 mot stack istack The default extensions depends on Load module file convert format property when extension omitted The default
536. ption Section name Start address End address Section size Section boundary alignment value 3 2 5 Symbol Information When show symbol is specified the addresses sizes and types of externally defined symbols or static internally defined symbols are output in the order of address When show reference is specified the symbol reference counts and optimization information are also output The following figure shows an example of symbol information output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 71 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS x Symbol List SECTION 1 FILE 10 12 SYMBOL J COUNTS OPT SECTION P FILE test obj 00000428 _main 2 _malloc 32 FILE mvn3 00000490 3 0 Description Section name File name Start address of a section included in the file indicated by 2 above End address of a section included in the file indicated by 2 above Section size of a section included in the file indicated by 2 above Symbol name Symbol address Symbol size Symbol type as shown below Data type func Function name data Variable name entry Entry function name none Undefined label assembler symbol Declaration type g External definition Internal definition Symbol reference count only when show reference is specified is output when show reference is not spec
537. ption cannot be specified when lang cpp has not been specified and the input file extension is c or p If specified an error will occur R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 442 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE rtti lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format reti on off Default The default for this option is rtti off Description This option enables or disables runtime type information When rtti on is specified dynamic_cast and typeid are enabled When rtti off is specified dynamic_cast and typeid are disabled This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Enables the C exceptional handling function dynamic_cast and typeid in the CPU category Remarks Do not define relocatable files obj that were created by this option in a library and do not output files in the relocat able format rel through the optimizing linkage editor A symbol double definition error or symbol undefined error may occur rttizon can be specified only at C compilation rttizon is ignored when lang cpp has not been specified and the input file extension is c or p R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 443 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE fint_register lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format fint_register 0
538. ptions head Specifies a configuration library output Specifies an output library file name nofloat Creates a simple I O function lang Selects the set of functions available from the C standard library simple_stdio Creates a functionally cut down version of the set of I O functions logo Outputs the copyright nologo Disables output of the copyright R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 582 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Library Options lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt The following library options are available head output nofloat lang simple_stdio logo nologo R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 583 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE head lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format head lt sub gt lt sub gt all runtime ctype math mathf stdarg stdio stdlib string ios new complex cppstring c99_complex fenv inttypes wchar wctype Default The default for this option is head all Description This option specifies a configuration file with a header file name When heade all is specified all header file names will be configured The runtime library is always configured This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library
539. put dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line The specified option is displayed Default Command line number of defined items How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 197 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Library Generate Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the library generate phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Mode 2 Standard Library 3 Object 4 Optimization 5 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 10 Property Panel Library Generate Options Tab Property a CC RX Property E Mode Generation mode of the standard library Build a library file option changed Standard Library B Object Path of the output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName lib Creates a functional cutdown version of 1 0 functions No Creates the reentrant library No Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified varia
540. put format the compiler also generates blank files that have the names of the other source files with the given filename extension attached Example ccrx merge_files output src files obj filel c file2 c file3 c files obj is the object file Blank files file1 obj file2 obj and file3 obj are also generated Remarks This option is invalid when only one source file is to be compiled or when the output option has been used to specify prep as the output format Inter file in line expansion is applied when this option is used with the inline option This option is not available for files to be compiled in C or EC The following restrictions apply to programs that include static functions or static variables If you wish to use the Watch window of the debugger to view a static variable that has the same name as a variable in another file specify the variable name as well as the filename The debugger cannot identify the vari able without a filename When two or more files contain static variables with the same name and rlink is used to overlay sections to which the files belong the debugger s facility to display overlay sections taking precedence over other sections is not available The names of static variables and static functions written in the link map file map are those converted by the compiler i e not original ones Any differences e g type specifier in declarations of the same variable
541. quivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimization level in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimization level in the Optimization category Remarks If the default is not included in the description of an optimize option this means that the default varies depending on the optimize option and speed or size option specifications For details on the default refer to the speed or size option R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 385 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE goptimize lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format goptimize Description This option generates the additional information for inter module optimization in the output file At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Outputs additional information for inter module optimization in the Optimiza tion category From the Library Generate Options tab Outputs additional information for inter module optimization in the Optimization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 386 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 speed B COMMAND REFERENCE lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format speed De
542. r information Vector information Not output CRC information CRC calculation result and output None addresses Always output when the CRC option is specified Note The show option is valid when the list option is specified 3 2 2 Option Information The option strings specified by a command line or a subcommand file are output The following figure shows an exam ple of option information output when rlink subcommands test sub list show is specified test sub contents INPUT test obj kK Options sub test sub INPUT test obj list show Description Outputs option strings specified by a command line or a subcommand in the specified order Subcommand in the test sub subcommand file 3 2 3 Error Information Error messages are output The following figure shows an example of error information output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 70 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description 1 Outputs an error message 3 2 4 Linkage Map Information The start and end addresses size and type of each section are output in the order of address The following figure shows an example of linkage map information output Mapping List CL 2 33 ECTION START END 00001000 00001000 00001004 00001007 00001008 000014dd 000014de 000050b3 Descri
543. r endian option of assembler Default Little endian data endian little How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Big endian data endian big Arranges data bytes in big endian Little endian data endian little Arranges data bytes in little endian Rounding method for floating point constant operations R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects rounding method for floating point constant operations This option does not affect the method of rounding for floating point operations during program execution This corresponds to the round option of the compiler and library generator Default round to nearest round nearest How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction round to zero round zero Rounds values to zero round to nearest round nearest ztENESAS Rounds values to the nearest value Page 105 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Handling of denormal Selects handling of denormalized numbers in floating point constants ized numbers in float This option does not affect the method of rounding for floating point operations during ing point constants program execution This corresponds to the denormalize option of the compiler and library generator Default Handles as zeros denormalize off How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction
544. r Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder Remarks 3 Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 34 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths E Source C C89 lang c Additional include paths 2 LANC ProjectDir To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 4 Seta macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tabon the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Source category Figure 2 35 Macro definition Property E Source Language of the C source file C C89 lang c Language of the C source file C lang cpp Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 If you click the button the Text Edi
545. r developing applications and systems for RX families and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for RX families integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions Related Documents This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units 1 GENERAL 2 FUNCTIONS 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS A WINDOW REFERENCE B COMMAND REFERENCE It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numer
546. r is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area 3 File name area Specify the name of a link order specification file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS May 20 2014 Page 335 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area This area displays the following file type Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Function buttons Button Function Save Generates a link order specification file as the specified name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 336 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE B COMMAND REFERENCE This appendix describes the detailed specifications of each command included in the build tool B 1 RX Family C C Compiler The RX family C C compiler generates a file executable in the target system from the source program written in C lan guage C99 language C language or assembly language In this compiler a single driver controls multiple phases from preprocessing to linkage The following describes processing in each phase 1 2 Compiler This processes preprocessing directives comments and optimization for the C source program and ge
547. r the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional Inputs the link options to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the link options group Default Blank How to Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Command line The specified option is displayed Default Command line number of defined items How to Changes not allowed change R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 190 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Hex Output Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the link phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Hex Format 3 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 9 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Input Input object module file Input object module file 0 Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Input binary data file Input binary data file 0 Symbol definition Symbol definition 0 Specifies execution start address No Initiates the prelinker Automatic control Output Output file type Load module file FOrm 4bsolute Outputs debugging information Yes Outputs to the
548. r type in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Omits a check of the range for conversion between the floating type and unsigned integer type in the Optimization category Example lt a Type conversion from 32 bit floating type to unsigned integer type gt unsigned long funcl float f return unsigned long f When this option is not specified _funcl FCMP 4F000000H R1 BLT EIZ FADD 0CF800000H R1 FTOI R1 R1 RTS lt b Type conversion from unsigned integer type to 32 bit floating type gt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 413 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE float func2 unsigned long u return float u When this option is not specified _func2 BIST 31 R1 BEQ L15 SHLR 1 R1 R14 AND 1 R1 OR R14 R1 ITOF R1 R1 FADD R1 R1 BRA L16 L15 ITOF R1 R1 L16 RTS lt Type conversion from integer type to 64 bit floating type via 32 bit floating type gt Note Does not apply when the dbl_size 8 specification is not valid double func3 long 1 return double float 1 When this option is not specified _func3 ITOF R1 R1 BRA __COM_CONVfd When this option is specified BRA __COM_CONV32sd Remarks When this option is specified code performance of the relevant type conversion processing is improved The conversion result may however differ from C
549. r use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations etc or may cause serious property damages nuclear reactor control systems military equipment etc You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radi
550. random or a value of 2 bytes or more Only 1 byte values are valid rlink obj form stype start P 1 P2 1000 P3 2000 crc 1FFE 1000 1FFD 2000 2FFF output flmem mot 1000 1FFF ere option crc 1FFE 1000 1FFD 2000 2FFF In this example CRC will be calculated for the two ranges 0x1000 to 0x1FFD and 0x2000 to Ox2FFF and the result will be output to address 0x1FFE When the space option has not been specified space 0xFF is assumed for calculation of free areas within the target range output option output flmem mot 1000 1 FFF Since the space option has not been specified the free areas are not output to the flmem mot file OxFF is used in CRC for calculation of the free areas but will not be filled into these areas Remarks This option is invalid when two or more absolute files have been selected This option is valid only when form hexadecimal stype When the space option has not been specified and the target range includes free areas that will not be output the linkage editor assumes in CRC that OxFF has been set in the free areas An error occurs if the target range includes an overlay area Sample Code The sample code shown below is provided to check the result of CRC figured out by the ere option The sample code program should match the result of CRC by rlink When the selected polynomial expression is CRC CCITT R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 533 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSui
551. range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes Specifies error number change_message information lt ErrorNumber gt in the Changes the warning level messages to information level messages property is specified Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 186 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Changes the informa tion level messages to warning level mes sages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to change the information level messages to warning level mes sages This corresponds to the change_message option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes All change_message warning Changes all information level messages to warning level messages Yes Specifies error number change_message warning lt Error Number gt Changes the information level messages with the specified error numbers to warning level messages No Does not change the information level mes sages to warning level messages Error number of infor mation level message Specifies error number of information level messa
552. rary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before link processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified ztENESAS Page 178 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed after link processing Specifies the command to be executed after link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link process ing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of
553. rce Language of the C source file C C89 lang c anguage of the L sou onal include paths Additional include paths 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 33 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line A SINC ProjectDir Browse C Permit non existent path C Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name LJ MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite 3 mee PV b neem ad t o eee ela AL b te atl tle 2 8 C 14 i gt Enter an include path per line in Path One path per one line R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 28 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 You can specify up to 247 characters per line Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line Remarks 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse Fo
554. reated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list 2 Change the file display order By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker Change the file display order by one of the following procedures Move the file name by using the Up and Down buttons R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 48 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 a Drag and drop the file name Use a link order specification file Remark You can use a link order specification file to change the display order on a file basis The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generate a link order specification file Click the Export button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Export File dialog box Figure 2 76 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File Save in sample DefaultBuild EG My Recent Documents My Documents gs My Computer e E My Network Save as type Link order specification file mtls In the dialog box specify the file link order specification file that is output the list of the file names displayed in File in the Link Order dialog box Click the Save button to generate the link order specification file Caution Only the file names are output to the link order specification file If a file with the same name exists check t
555. redefined macro defined macro If multiple macro names are specified delimit them with a comma example __DBL4 __ SCHAR This corresponds to the undefine option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Specify The Predefined Macro dialog box which appears change when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters Enables information Specifies whether information level messages are output level message output This corresponds to the message and nomessage options of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes message Enables information message output No nomes Disables information message output sage R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 245 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Suppresses the num Specifies suppresses the number of information level message ber of information level If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with a comma example messages 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the nomessage option of the compiler This property is displayed only when No nomessage in the Enables information level message output property is specified Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text
556. ress is0 to FFFF eet address 2 bytes err 2 Byte count 1 _ _ _ gt Data 16 bytes max Record format Record header ii When the load address is10000to FFFFFF S 2 4 3 53 32 2e XX XX XXEXX E XX 6 XXi XX lt gt j4 gt lt gt lt P lt gt es address 3 bytes a 2 Byte count 1 gt Data 16 bytes max Record format Record header R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 78 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Figure 3 2 S Type File Format cont iii When the load address is 1000000 to FFFFFFFF 3 53 33 Xx xXx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Xx xx L Load address 4 bytes ee 2 Byte count 1 Data 16 bytes max Record format Record header c End record S9 S8 and S7 records i When the entry address is 0 to FFFF 3 3 Deed P Pee ers PS L O ordean 2 Entry address 2 bytes Byte count 1 Record format Record header ii When the entry address is 10000 to FFFFFF L Checksum 2 L Entry address 3 bytes Byte count 1 Record format Record header iii When the entry address is 1000000 to FFFFFFFF sa a7 20 as eaea L Entry address 4 bytes Checksum 2 Byte count 1 Record format Record header Notes 1 The number of bytes from the load address or the entry address to the checksum 2 1 s complement of the sum of the
557. ring the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer inline 10 0 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 const_div schedule const_copy ztENESAS alias noansi Page 387 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When optimize 0 or optimize 1 is specified Inline Expan sion Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses Optimiza tion Consid ering the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer noinline const_div nosched ule noconst_ copy alias noansi R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 388 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE size lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format size Description When the size option is specified optimization will be performed with emphasis on code size This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimization type in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimization type in the Optimization category Remarks When the size option is specified the following options are automatically specified based on the op
558. rings character constants and comments in euc code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 503 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE sjis lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format sjis Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in sjis code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in sjis code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character code of an input program in the Source category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 504 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE latin1 lt Assembler Command Options Other Options gt Format latinl Default This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in sjis code Description This option specifies the character code to handle the characters in strings character constants and comments in latin1 code This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemb
559. roperties Figure 2 51 ROM to RAM mapped section Property after Setting up Sections to be Mapped from the ROM to the RAM E Output Output file type Load module file FOrm Absolute ROM to RAM mapped section ROM to RAM mapped section 12 00 D A 01 D_1 F_1 02 D_2 F_2 03 Psect01 ram01 04 Psect02 ram02 05 Psect03 ram03 06 Psect11 ram11 07 Psect 2 ram12 08 Psectl3 ram13 09 Dsect01 Bsect01 10 Dsect02 Bsect02 11 Dsect03 B sect03 You can also change the name of each section by clicking on the button or directly entering a new name in the text box for the sub property b Setup ROM and RAM sections overlay sections Sections can be set up through the Section start address property under the Section category Figure 2 52 Section start address Property B_1 R_1 B_2 R_2 8 F SU_S1 01000 PResetPRG OFFFFS8000 C_1 C_2 0 C D_1 D_2 D P Pln Clicking on the button opens the Section Settings dialog box You can change the size of this dialog box by dragging the lower right corner Figure 2 53 Section Settings Dialog Box Section Settings Address Section PN D Modify New Overlay Remove lt 1 gt To add the address of a section Place the cursor over the Section area in the Section Settings dialog box and click on the Add button The Section Address dialog box will appear R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 37 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSui
560. rrrr FBV72rrrrrrrr 0000000 E371 00000010 00000012 00000013 00000013 00000015 00000016 00000016 00000018 0000001B 0000001B 0000001D 00000020 00000020 00000022 00000000 00000000 6126 18 6211 08 6221 39rrrr E371 3F6702 6211 02 01000000 glb_func0dl 5 6 LineNo C SOURCE STATEMENT SECTIONP CODE _func02 STACK_func02 12 3 1 include include h A 2 int funcOl int F 3 int funcO3 int 4 5 int funcO2 int z PUSHM R6 R7 MOV L R1 R6 6 7 7 x func01 z BSR _func01 MOV L _x R7 MOV L R1 R7 8 if z 2 CMP 02H R6 BNE L12 L11 bb3 9 x ADD 01H R1 BRA L13 L12 bb6 10 else 11 x funcO3 x 2 ADD 02H R1 BSR _func03 List bbls MOV L R1 R7 12 2 13 return x 14 RTSD 08H R6 R7 _func03 STACK_func03 4 R 15 R 16 int func03 int p L 18 return ptl ADD 01H R1 19 RTS SECTIOND ROMDATA ALIGN 4 Y lword00000001H END Description Location information LOC Location address of the object code that can be determined at assembly R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Object code information OBJ Object code corresponding to the mnemonic of the source code ztENESAS Page 67 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Line information OXMDA Resul
561. rti Output An object file including a definition specified with a file nition specified with a file having extension td having extension td Calling information file Output A calling information file This is output by CallWalker External symbol assign i Output An external symbol assignment information file ment information file This is output at linkage when the map option is spec ified Input An external symbol assignment information file This is specified as an input file for the map option at compilation Jump table file assembly j Output An assembler source file for the jump table that language branches the external definition symbol This is output when the jump_entries_for_pic option is specified Symbol address file fsy An assembler source file that describes the external assembly language definition symbol in an assembler directive This is output when the fsymbol option is specified C language function sup td ti pi and An information file that supports the C language port file ii function B 1 2 Operating Instructions This section describes how to operate the RX family C C compiler The commands will take options from left to right on the command line When two or more options with conflicted mean ings are selected and it will take neither error nor warning the right side option will be enabled This results are different according to each options For more
562. rule number besides required rule Exclusion rule number from required rule in the MISRA C rule check category Remarks misra2004 can be used multiple times If two or more types which follow misra2004 are specified however only the type of the last specification is valid misra2004 ignore 2 2 misra2004 apply 2 3 misra2004 required_add 4 1 misra2004 apply 4 2 misra2004 apply 5 2 In this example ignore apply and required_add are specified but only apply used in the last two cases is valid The compiler will check the source code against rules 4 2 and 5 2 When the number of an unsupported rule is specified for lt rule number gt the compiler detects error C0523031 and stops the processing R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 362 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When the file specified in misra2004 lt filename gt cannot be opened the compiler detects error C0523029 When rule numbers are not extractable from the specified file the compiler detects error C0523030 Processing by the com piler stops in both cases This option is ignored when cpp c99 or ecpp is selected for the lang option or when output prep is specified at the same time This option supports the MISRA C 2004 rules listed below Required 2 22 3 4 14 2 5 25 3 5 4 6 1 6 2 6 46 5 7 1 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 11 8 12 9 19 29 3 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 1 11 2 11 5 12
563. s aaa txt c 3 File location area Designate the location to create a file by directly entering its path or selecting from Refer button The default file location is the project folder path a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected a path is added in the text box Remarks 1 When the text box is left blank the project folder is regarded to be designated Remarks 2 When the relative path is used the path is regarded to be from the project folder Remark The number of characters that can be entered in the File name area and the File location area is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip in the File name area Message Description The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not The path includes the folder that does not exist exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated The char characters cannot be used lt gt acters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name Function buttons Function Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the
564. s in the Library category From the Librarian Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Individual Compile Options C tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category and Rule check exclusion file in the MISRA C 2004 Rule Check category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path edit area Edit or add the path or file name including the path a Path One path per one line Edit or add the path or file name including the path by directly entering it The path or file name including the path can be designated in multiple lines Designate the path or file name including the path at a line By default the current contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area The path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer The file names including the path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the file in the Add Excluding File dialog box Drag and drop the file using such as Explorer Caution If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when click ing the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Remark
565. s with the selected numbers When misra2004 ignore lt rule numbers lt rule numbers the compiler checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers When misra2004 required the compiler checks the source code against the rules of the required type When misra2004 required_add lt rule numbers lt rule numbers the compiler checks the source code against the rules of the required type and the rules with the selected numbers When misra2004 required_remove lt rule numbers lt rule numbers the compiler checks the source code against the rules other than those with the selected numbers among the rules of the required type When misra2004 lt filename gt the compiler checks the source code against the rules with the numbers written in the specified file One rule number is written per line in the file Each rule number must be specified by using a decimal value and a period When checking of a line of code against the MISRA C 2004 rules leads to detection of a violation a message in the following format will appear Filename line number M0523028 Rule number Message When misra2004 lt filename gt is used more than once only the last specification is valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Apply rule Rule number description file Rule number Exclusion rule num ber Check
566. s defined in the file to be com piled and a code that uses addresses relative to the base address for accesses to those variables is generated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimizes accesses to external variables in the Optimization cate gory Example lt C source file gt long A B C void func A B Cc _A R4 Sets the address of A as the base address 1 R4 2 4 R4 Accesses B using the address of A as the base 3 8 R4 Accesses C using the address of A as the base Remarks This option is only valid for the compilation of C C source programs It does not apply to programs that have been compiled with the output src specification or to programs written in assembly language When the map option and smap option are specified simultaneously the map option is valid R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 409 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nomap lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format nomap Default The default for this option is nomap when the optimize 0 optimize 1 or optimize 2 option has been specified Description When the nomap option is specified accesses to external variables are not optimized This option is
567. s dialog box select an address in the Address Section area and then click the New Overlay button R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 319 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Section name Enter a section name in this area You can directly enter the characters into the text box or select from the drop down list Only ASCII characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 _ and can be used as section names Use only the following char acters in the field except that 0 to 9 cannot be the first letter of a section name The following reserved sections will be preset in the drop down list by the linker ABS16B ABS16C ABS16D ABS8B ABS8C ABS8D INDIRECT B B 1 B 2 B 4 C C 1 C 2 C 4 C BSEC C DSEC C INIT C VTBL D D 1 D 2 D 4 L PS Function buttons Button Function Add Section Dialog Box Closes this dialog box and adds a new section to the bottom of the section group address in the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box Modify Section Dialog Box Closes this dialog box and replaces the currently selected section name in the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box with the one entered New Overlay Dialog Box Closes this dialog box and adds the Overlayn column n is a number starting with 1 to the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box Places
568. s is output 3 2 10 CRC Information The CRC calculation result and output address are output when the CRC option is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 74 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS we CRC Code CODE cb0b ADDRESS 00007ffe Item Description Num ber 1 CRC calculation result 2 Address where the CRC calculation result is output 3 3 Library List This section covers the contents and format of the library list output by the optimizing linkage editor 3 3 1 Structure of Library List Table 3 4 shows the structure and contents of the library list Table 3 3 Structure and Contents of Library List Note When show Option is not Specified Output Information Contents Suboption Option information Option strings specified by a com Output mand line or subcommand Error information Error messages Output Library information Library information Output Information of mod Module within the library Output ules sections and a symbols within library When showz symbol is specified show symbol Not output List of symbol names in a module within the library When showssection is specified show section Not output Lists of section names and sym bol names in a module within the library Note All options are valid when the list option is specified 3 3 2 Option Information The option str
569. s on the optimization level options Yes const_copy Enables constant propagation of const qualified external variables No noconst_copy Disables constant propagation of const qualified external variables Conversion method of the divisions and resi dues of integer con stants Selects conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants This corresponds to the const_div and noconst_div option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation type option Depends on the optimization type option Instruction sequence using multiplication const_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using multiplica tion Instruction sequence using division noconst_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using division Expansion method of the library function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects expansion method of the library function This corresponds to the library option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Calls library functions library function Calls all library functions Performs instruction expansion of several library functions library intrinsi
570. s specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property and Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow Total_ size Shows the total sizes of sections allocated to the ROM and RAM areas No Does not show the total sizes of sections Outputs vector infor mation Others Selects whether to output vector information This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property and Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property in the Output category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes SHow VECTOR Outputs vector information to the linkage list file No Does not output vector information to the linkage list file Other detailed information on library generators are displayed and the configuration can be changed May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 185 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Reduces the memory occupancy A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to reduce the memory occupancy This corresponds to the memory option of the linker This property is not displayed when any one of the
571. sage that is output from the build tool Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on the Editor panel Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to display object module files to input to the linker and configure these link order Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project has Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been pro gressed Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment
572. same The project has been created by CubeSuite with the same version Remarks 2 The target build options for importing are only the general options set in the properties of the build tool The setting of the standard build options see 2 12 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project and the individual options are not imported Remarks 3 All the build modes of the import target are imported However the build modes of the current project other than DefaultBuild are deleted Remarks 4 The version of the build tool to be used is imported 2 12 2 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order The procedures for performing this operation are described below 1 Open the Link Order dialog box On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link Order dialog box opens Figure 2 75 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order fileO2 obj fileO3 obj The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Remark The default order is the order the files are added to the project Object module files c
573. scription When the speed option is specified optimization will be performed with emphasis on execution performance This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Optimization type in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Optimization type in the Optimization category Remarks When the speed option is specified the following options are automatically specified based on the optimize option specification When optimize max is specified Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses Optimiza tion Consid ering the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer inline 25 0 Note const_div schedule const_copy noscope put mot has been specified for output For any other case the default is nomap When optimize 2 is specified Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses alias ansi The default is map when a C C source program has been specified for input and output abs or out Optimiza tion Consid e
574. size option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Optimizes with emphasis on execution perfor mance speed Optimizes with emphasis on execution performance Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Optimizes with emphasis on code size Loop expansion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to optimize the loop expansion for while and do while This corresponds to the loop option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level and optimi zation type options Depends on the optimization level and optimization type options Expansion loop lt numeric value gt ztENESAS Expands loop statements for while and do while Page 256 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Expansion maximum number A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies expansion maximum number This corresponds to the suboption of loop option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Expansion loop lt numeric value gt in the Loop expansion property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction 1 to 32 decimal number Performs inline expan sion automatically Selec
575. sly selected file is selected after the second time 2 File list area File list that matches the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name to save R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 329 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area a Inthe Editor panel The following file types are displayed depend on the file type of the currently editing file Text file txt Text format C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cp cc C language source file Header file h hpp inc Header file Assemble file src s Assembler source file Jump table file jmp Jump table file Symbol address file fsy Symbol address file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Map file map lbp Map file Hex file hex Hex file S record file mot b In the Output panel The following file types are displayed Text file txt Function buttons Button S record file Text format Function Save Saves the file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 330 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Program dialog box This dialog b
576. son expression with a constant greater than the maximum value of signed long Assignment of a constant outside the signed short range to the int or signed int type or assignment of a constant outside the unsigned short range to the int or unsigned int type while int_to_short is not specified Assignment of a constant outside both of the signed short and unsigned short ranges to the long or long long type Comparison expression between a constant outside the signed short range and the int short or char type except the signed char type For check shc the compatibility with the SuperH family C C compilers is checked Checking will be for the follow ing options and types Options unsigned_char unsigned_bitfield bit_order right endian little dbl_size 4 and round nearest pragma unpack volatile qualified variables Confirm the following notes for the displayed items Options The settings which are not defined in the language specification and depend on implementation differ in each compiler Confirm the settings of the options that were output in a message Extended specifications There is a possibility that extended specifications will affect program operation Confirm the descriptions on the extended specifications that were output in a message This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Checks the compatibility with an existing program in the Source category R20UT299
577. specified vector number in the vari able vector table for the RX Family and M16C Family vect Assigns an address to an unused area in the variable vector table for the RX Family and M16C Family jump_entries_for_pic Outputs a jump table file for the PIC function of the RX Fam ily List Options list A linkage list file is output show Selects the contents to be output in the linkage list file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 508 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Classification Option B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Optimize Options optimize Selects the items to be optimized at linkage nooptimize Selects no optimization at linkage samesize Specifies the minimum size for unification of the same codes symbol_forbid Specifies symbols for which unreferenced symbol deletion is disabled samecode_forbid Specifies symbols for which same code unification is disabled section_forbid Specifies a section where optimization is disabled absolute_forbid Specifies an address range where optimization is disabled Section Options start Specifies a section start address fsymbol Specifies the section where an external defined symbol will be placed in the output file aligned_section Specifies the section alignment value as 16 bytes Verify Options cpu Checks addre
578. splay the copyright information information This corresponds to the logo and nologo option of the linker Default No NOLOgo How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes LOgo Displays the total sizes of sections No NOLOgo Does not display the total sizes of sections Commands executed before link processing R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the command to be executed before link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link process ing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the tempo
579. sponds to the volatile and novolatile option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes volatile Handles all external variables as if they were volatile qualified No novolatile Does not handle external variables as if they were volatile qualified Performs the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Selects whether to perform the constant propagation of const qualified external vari ables Const qualified variables in a C source file cannot be controlled by this option con stant propagation is always performed This corresponds to the const_copy and noconst_copy option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level options Depends on the optimization level options Yes const_copy Enables constant propagation of const qualified external variables No noconst_copy Disables constant propagation of const qualified external variables Conversion method of the divisions and resi dues of integer con stants Selects conversion method of the divisions and residues of integer constants This corresponds to the const_div and noconst_div option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option
580. ss value R13 base lt address value gt R13 Specifies R13 as the base register that sets the address value Avoids a problem spe cific to the CPU type Selects avoid a problem specific to the CPU type This corresponds to the patch option of the compiler and library generator patch option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No The code generated in response to the call by the intrinsic function set_ipl will contain the MVTIPL instruction Yes for RX610 Group patch rx610 Does not use the MVTIPL instruction in the generated code Saves and restores ACC using the inter rupt function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to save and restore Accumulator ACC using the interrupt function The generated saved and restored code is the same code generated when acc is selected in pragma interrupt This corresponds to the save_acc option of the compiler and library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes save_acc Saves and restores ACC using the interrupt function function ztENESAS No Does not save and restore ACC using the interrupt Page 111 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 3 PIC PID The detailed information on the PIC PID function is displayed and the configuration can be changed
581. sses for consistency contiguous_section Specifies sections that will not be divided Other Options s9 Selects the output of an s9 record at the end of the file stack Selects the output of a stack usage information file compress Debugging information are compressed nocompress Debugging information are not compressed memory Selects the amount of memory to be used in linkage rename Specifies symbol names and section names to be modified delete Specifies symbol names and module names to be deleted replace Specifies library modules to be replaced extract Specifies modules to be extracted from library files strip Debugging information is deleted from absolute files and library files change_message Specifies changes to the levels of messages information warning and error hide Name information on local symbols is deleted total_size The total sizes of sections after linkage are sent to standard output Subcommand File Option subcommand Specifies a file from which to include command options Options Other Than Above logo Selects the output of copyright information nologo Selects the non output of copyright information end Selects the execution of option strings specified before END exit R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Specifies the end o
582. ssigns the specified address to the vector number to which no address has been assigned in the variable vector table section When this option is specified a variable vector table section is created by the linkage editor and the specified address is set in the table even if there is no interrupt function in the source code Specify the external name of the target function for lt symbol gt Specify the desired hexadecimal address for lt address gt The file name is lt output file gt jmp From the Link Options tab Address setting for unused vector area in the Output category Remarks This option is ignored when the user creates a variable vector table section in the source program because the vari able vector table is not automatically created in this case When the lt symbol gt lt address gt specification is started with 0 the whole specification is assumed as an address R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 537 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE jump_entries_for_pic lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format jump_entries_for_pic lt section name gt Description Outputs an assembly language source for a jump table to branch to external definition symbols in the specified sec tion The file name is lt output file gt jmp From the Link Options tab Outputs the jump table in the Output
583. stom head lt SubOption gt in the Configuration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head inttypes Enables the inttypes h C99 and runtime library No Disables the inttypes h C99 Enables wchar h C99 Selects whether to enable wchar h C99 This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when C99 lang c99 in the Library configuration property and Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configuration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head wchar Enables the wchar h C99 and runtime library No Disables the wchar h C99 Enables Selects whether to enable wctype h C99 wctype h C99 3 Object This corresponds to the head option of the library generator This property is displayed only when C99 lang c99 in the Library configuration property and Custom head lt SubOption gt in the Configuration library property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes head wctype Enables the wctype h C99 and runtime library No Disables the wctype h C99 The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the G
584. strings character con stants and comments by using SJIS ISO Latin1 code latin1 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using ISO Latin1 Traditional Chi nese character big5 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Traditional Chi nese character Simplified Chi nese character gb2312 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Simplified Chi nese character R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 266 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE 2 Object The detailed information on the object is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object module file name Specify the name of the object module file generated after assembling The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the output option of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Outputs debugging information 3 List Selects whether to output debugging information to object m
585. subcommand lt file name gt Description Specifies options with a subcommand file The format of the subcommand file is as follows lt option gt A lt suboption gt A amp lt comment gt The option and suboption are separated by an sign or a space For the input option suboptions are separated by a space One option is specified per line in the subcommand file Ifa subcommand description exceeds one line the description can be allowed to overflow to the next line by using an ampersand amp The subcommand option cannot be specified in the subcommanid file Examples Command line specification rlink filel obj sub test sub file4 obj Subcommand specification input file2 obj file3 obj This is a comment library libl lib amp Specifies line continued 1ib2 1lib Option contents specified with a supbcommand file are expanded to the location at which the subcommand is specified on the command line and are executed The order of file input is file1 obj file2 obj file3 obj and file4 obj R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 576 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Options Other Than Above lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Options Other Than Above gt The following options other than above are available logo nologo end exit R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 577 of 596 M
586. sumed when a module name is specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Input object module file in the Input category From the Librarian Options tab Input object module file in the Input category Examples input a obj lib1 e Inputs a obj and module e in 1libl 1lib input c obj Inputs all obj files beginning with c Remarks When form o bject or extract is specified this option is unavailable When an input file is specified on the command line input should be omitted R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 511 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE library lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Input Options gt Format library lt file name gt Description Specifies an input library file Two or more files can be specified by separating them with a comma Wildcards or can also be used for the specification String literals specified with wildcards are expanded in the alphabetical order Expansion of numerical values precedes that of alphabetical letters Uppercase letters are expanded before lowercase letters If an extension is omitted from the input file specification lib is assumed If form library or extract is specified the library file is input as the target library to be edited Otherwise after the linkage processing between fil
587. t J Save Project and Development Tools as Package Z Property R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 64 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 14 Estimate the Stack Capacity To estimate the stack capacity use the Call Walker The Call Walker performs a static analysis and displays the symbols called by a symbol in a tree format as well as stack information for each symbol symbol name attributes address size stack size and file name in list format To start the Call Walker select Windows start gt gt All Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Utilities gt gt Call Walker To exit the Call Walker from the Call Walker select the File menu gt gt Exit See the Call Walker help for details on the procedure for using it from the Call Walker select the Help menu gt gt Help Topics R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 65 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS This chapter describes the format and other aspects of files output by a build via each command 3 1 Assemble List File This section covers the contents and format of the assemble list file output by the assembler The source list file contains the compilation and assembly results Table 3 1 shows the structure and contents of the source list Table 3 1 Structure and Contents of Source List No Output Information Cont
588. t The boundary alignment value for structures and classes equals the maximum boundary alignment value for mem bers Description This option specifies the boundary alignment value for structure members and class members The boundary alignment value for structure members can also be specified by the pragma pack extension If both this option and a pragma extension are specified the pragma specification takes priority The boundary alignment value for structures and classes equals the maximum boundary alignment value for members This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Assumes the boundary alignment value for structure members is 1 in the CPU category Remarks The boundary alignment values for structure members and class members when these options are specified are shown in the following table Table B 7 Boundary Alignment Values for Structure Members and Class Members When the pack Option is Specified Member Type Not Specified signed char unsigned short unsigned int t unsigned long unsigned long long floating type and pointer type Note Becomes the same as short when the int_to_short option is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 439 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE unpack lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format unpack
589. t dialog box will open R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 29 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 36 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit ox ewe ee Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 65535 line The string part can be omitted and in this case the macro name is assumed to be defined If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 37 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros E Source Language of the C source file C C89 lang c Language of the C source file C lang cpp f Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include pahe System include paths 0 z nclude file Macro definition oon definition 2 0 TEST 1 1 TIME 10 To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 30 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 6 Set Assemble Options To set options for the assemble phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel
590. t do not require the conversion of floating point numbers ROM can be saved Target functions fprintf fscanf printf scanf sprintf sscanf vfprintf vprintf and vsprintf This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library Generate Options tab Generation mode of the standard library in the Object category Remarks In a library created with this option specified correct operation cannot be guaranteed when floating point numbers are input to or output from the target functions R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 586 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE lang lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format lang c c99 Default The default for this option is lang c Description This option selects which functions are to be usable in the C standard library When lang c is specified only the functions conforming to the C89 standard are included in the C standard library and the extended functions of the C99 standard are not included When lang c99 is specified the functions conform ing to the C89 standard and the functions conforming to the C99 standard are included in the C standard library This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library Generate Options tab Library configuration in the Standard Library category Remarks There are no changes in
591. t hak etka 8 1 2 GOpPYNiQhtS 2 ns sitek antes tye thee ats wee eeca eve bane Bite a Gada Ba dice Sages ot States 10 2 FUNCTIONS rnea dad R sce AEE aE don ellen anes ase ease ark ds Redhead EES ee 11 2 1 OVERVIEW coer comma seed pints RGiae dia EN nn See ares nau a a nies ea ea e i esta lage tie ga a aa a Peete 11 2 1 1 Greate a load Mod le sic jed ra siteon Scheele tke weeds Va ag de See eed 11 2 1 2 Create a user library ie ches ahd hee Ads ae Gnd ee edi de bb bade aed E 11 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version 0 0 0 00 c cect nett ent ee eee 12 2 3 Set Build Target FileS 2 e062 bi ecb pode pk ee EA ee ee Sl ee ee a 13 2 3 1 Add a file to a Project reni 5 bees ae eee ede a eke ene ee a ns pee pleas 13 2 3 2 Remove a file from a project 0 2 aea a aa nents 17 2 3 3 Remove a file from the build target 6 0 0 0 ett eee 17 2 3 4 Classify a file into acategory ciena E A tenets 17 2 3 5 Change the file display order 1 0 0 cece cee teens 18 2 3 6 Update file dependencies 0 2 cee eee eet eens 19 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 0 0 0 cee tenn ete 21 2 4 1 Change the output file name 6 0 0 tenet eee 22 2 4 2 Output an assemblelist crs0 eis eh win eee ed ee de ee Pa Pe i Bee 24 2 4 3 Output map information 0 0 tte eens 25 2 4 4 Output library information 0 eee e eet eee 26 2 5 Set Compile Options rars ee tet ed th ee dete ate EA eed wedi ean tee wih a ache A se 27 2 5
592. tENESAS Page 128 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Other additional Input the option to be added additionally options The options set here are added at the end of the cx options group Default Blank How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dia change log box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 129 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the compile phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Source 2 Object 3 List 4 Optimization 5 Output File 6 MISRA C rule check 7 Others Figure A 5 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Source Language of the C source file Language of the C source file Additional include paths System include paths Include files at the head of compiling units Macro definition Invalidates the predefined macro Enables information level message output Changes the warning level messages to information level messages Changes the information level messages to warning level messages Changes the information level and warning level messages to errorlevel messages Path to the folder that stores a file for inter file inline expansion Permits comment nesting Che
593. te V2 02 00 check lt Compile Options Source Options gt Format check ne ch38 she Description This option checks the specified options and source file parts which will affect the compatibility when this compiler uses a C C source file that has been coded for the R8C and M16C family C compilers H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compilers and SuperH family C C compilers For check nc the compatibility with the R8C and M16C family C compilers is checked Checking will be for the fol lowing options and types Options signed_char signed_bitfield bit_order left endian big and dbl_size 4 inline enum type pragma BITADDRESS pragma ROM pragma PARAMETER and asm Assignment of a constant outside the signed short range to the int or signed int type or assignment of a constant outside the unsigned short range to the int or unsigned int type while int_to_short is not specified Assignment of a constant outside both of the signed short and unsigned short ranges to the long or long long type Comparison expression between a constant outside the signed short range and the int short or char type except the signed char type For check ch38 the compatibility with the H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compilers is checked Checking will be for the following options and types Options unsigned_char unsigned_bitfield bit_order right endian little and dbl_size 4 __asm and pragma unpack Compari
594. te V2 02 00 lt 3 gt Figure 2 54 Section Address Dialog Box Section Address Address Enter the address of the section that you wish to add in the Address field and click on the OK button The added address will be displayed in the Address area of the Section Settings dialog box To add a ROM section Place the cursor over the Address area in the Section Settings dialog box and click on the Add button The Add Section dialog box will appear Figure 2 55 Add Section Dialog Box Add Section Section name Psec0 Enter the name of the section that you wish to add in the Section name field and click on the OK button The added section will be displayed in the Section area of the Section Settings dialog box To add RAM sections overlay sections Place the cursor over the Address area in the Section Settings dialog box and click on the New Overlay button The Add Overlay dialog box will appear Figure 2 56 Add Overlay Dialog Box Add Overlay Section name ram0t Enter the name of the section that you wish to add in the Section name field and click on the OK button The added section will be displayed in the Section area of the Section Settings dialog box Repeat this procedure for the number of overlay sections that you wish to add The added sections will be dis played in the Overlay n area n Number beginning with 1 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 38 of 596
595. te V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Using compiler pack Selects the version of the compiler package to be used age version This setting is common to all the build modes Default Always latest version which was installed How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Always latest version Uses the latest version in the installed which was installed compiler packages Versions of the installed Uses the selected version in the compiler compiler packages package Latest compiler pack The version of the compiler package to be used when Always latest version which age version which was was installed is selected in the Using compiler package version property is dis installed played This setting is common to all the build modes This property is displayed only when Always latest version which was installed in the Using compiler package version property is selected Default The latest version of the installed compiler packages How to Changes not allowed change 12 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Adds memos to the build tool Adds one item in one line This setting is common to all the build modes The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can us
596. te V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Cpu lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Verify Options gt Format cpu lt memory type gt lt address range gt STRIDE lt memory type gt ROm RAm FIX lt address range gt lt start address gt lt end address gt Description When cpuzstride is not specified a section larger than the specified range of addresses leads to an error When cpuzstride is specified a section larger than the specified range of addresses is allocated to the next area of the same memory type or the section is divided This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Checks the section larger than the specified range of addresses Address range of the memory type Allocates to the next area of the same memory type or the section is divided in the Verify category Examples When the stride suboption is not specified start D1 D2 100 cpu ROM 100 1FF RAM 200 2FF The result is normal when D1 and D2 are respectively allocated within the ranges from 100 to 1FF and from 200 to 2FF If they are not allocated within the ranges an error will be output When the stride suboption is specified start D1 D2 100 cpu ROM 100 1FF RAM 200 2FF ROM 300 3FF cpu stride The result is normal when D1 and D2 are allocated within the ROM area regardless of whether the section is divided
597. te V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE typedef unsigned char uint8_t typedef unsigned short uintl6_t typedef unsigned ong uintsz2 t uintl6_t CRC_CCITT uint8_t pData uint32_t iSize uint32_t ui32_ i uint8_t pui8_Data uintl 6_t uil6_CRC OxFFFFu pui8_Data uint8_t pData for ui32_i 0 ui32_i lt iSize ui32_i uil6_CRC uintl6_t uil6_CRC gt gt 8u uint1l6_t uint32_t uil6_CRC il CRC pui8_Data ui32_i uil6_CRC uint16_t uil6_CRC amp OxFFu gt gt 4u uil6_CRC uint1l6_t uil6_CRC lt lt 8u lt lt 4u uil6_CRC uint16_t uil6_CRC amp OxFFu lt lt 4u lt lt lu uil6_CRC uint1l6_t 0x0000FFFFul amp uint32_t uint32_t uil6_CRC return uil6_CRC When the selected polynomial expression is CRC 16 define POLYNOMIAL 0xa001 Generated polynomial expression CRC 16 typedef unsigned char uint8_t typedef unsigned short uint1l6_t typedef unsigned long uint32_t uintl6_t CRC16 uint8_t pData uint32_t iSize uintl6_t crcedData uintl6_t 0 uint32_t data 0 uint32_t i cycLoop for i 0 i lt iSize itt data uint32_t pData i crcdData crcdData data for cycLoop 0 cycLoop lt 8 cycLoop t 4 if crcdData amp 1 ercdData crcdData gt gt 1 POLYNOMIAL else crcdData crcdData gt gt 1 return crcdData R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 534 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B
598. te boundaries Execution in 4 bytes Contains each loop head instalign4 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 4 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign4 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Execution in 8 bytes instalign8 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Execution in 8 bytes Contains each loop head instalign8 loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each loop Execution in 8 bytes Contains each inmost loop head instalign8 inmost loop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to generate divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction This corresponds to the nouse_div_inst option of the compiler Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code in which DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used No nouse_div_inst 7tENESAS Generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used Page 139 of 596 CubeSuite V2 0
599. te path of the product install folder This corresponds to the binary option of the linker The binary data file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Specify binary data file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Symbol definition Specifies the symbol name to be defined Specifies in the format of symbol name symbo name or symbol name numerical value with one symbol name per line Specifies the numerical value in the hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the define option of the linker Default Symbol definition number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Specifies execution start address Selects whether to specify the execution start address Specifies in the format of symbol or address Specifies an address in the hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the entry option of the linker Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes ENTry Specifies execution start address No Does n
600. tem library or user library Number of modules within the library 3 3 5 Module Section and Symbol Information within Library A list of modules within the library is output When show symbol is specified the symbol names in a module within the library are listed When show section is specified the section names and symbol names in a module within the library are listed The following figure shows an output example of module section and symbol information within a library Library List 2 ULE LAST UPDATE 3 ECTION 4 SYMBOL adhry 29 Feb 2000 12 34 56 P _main _Proc0 _Version _IntGlob _CharGlob Description Module name Module definition date If the module is updated the latest module update date is displayed Section name within a module Symbol within a section R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 77 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 S Type and HEX File Formats This section describes the S type files and HEX files that are output by the optimizing linkage editor 3 4 1 S Type File Format Figure 3 1 S Type File Format a Header record SO record 3 ne address sesame 2 Byte count 1 File format extension 3 characters 6 bytes Record format Body of file name 8 characters 16 bytes Record header b Data record S1 S2 and S3 records i When the load add
601. ter assemble processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assem bling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subpr
602. ters 81 we None 82 83 Returns 84 an None 85 gt 86 WR we ewww wn wn wn ww wn wn wn ww wn wn wn wn ww wn wn ww wn wn wn ww wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn ww wn wn wn ww ww ww ww es 87 88 void main void 89 Ai 90 8 Start user code Do not edit comment generati 91 92 int local_a locai_b local_c 93 int result 94 unsigned long i v lt gt R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 275 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A GENERAL Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool Figure A 22 Output Panel Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sample c gt DefaultBuild sample abs DefaultBuild sample mot Optimizing Linkage Editor Completed Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 All Messages Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Output panel Edit menu only available for the Output panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Display messages and the search results output from each tool In build result search result batch search display a new message is displayed deleting the previous message every time build search is done but not the
603. ters Path of the output folder Specifies the output destination folder for the output file The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the product install folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Outputs debugging information Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes debug Outputs debugging information to object module files No node Does not output debugging information to object module bug files Section name of pro gram area Specifies the section name of program area This corresponds to the section option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 32767 characters Section
604. ters integrating the function exit blocks inte grating multiple instructions which can be integrated etc 2 optimize 2 Performs overall optimization Max optimize max Performs optimization as much as possi ble Outputs additional information for inter module optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization At linkage inter module optimization is applied to files for which this option has been specified This corresponds to the goptimize option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not outputs additional information for inter module optimization Optimization type Selects optimization type This corresponds to the speed and size option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Optimizes with emphasis on execution perfor mance speed Optimizes with emphasis on execution performance Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Optimizes with emphasis on code size Loop expansion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to optimize the loop expansion for while and do while This corresponds to the
605. th error c main c The file with warning c main c Remarks 1 The file with both the error and the warning is highlighted in red Remarks 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source files that have not been compiled after edited The source files after cleaning has been executed The source files after build tool options have been changed The source files after any build mode has been changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is opened The boldface dis play is canceled after building is executed 0 Highlight non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Build target file Non build target file p Highlight the project that has been changed The file component that is added to the project and the property of the project component are changed the proj ect name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed LR sample Project The project that has been changed UR sample Project q Highlight the active project The active projects is underlined Non active project LR sample Project Active project R sample Project r Run the editor Open th
606. th the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 13 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild See 2 13 2 Run a build of all files Clean See 2 13 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box opens R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 60 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 98 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project C sample sub C sub Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild BuildMode2 DefaultBuild BuildMode2 In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to runa batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Caution This build tool does not support the display of Defined macros Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run
607. the approxdiv option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes approxdiv Converts floating point constant division into multiplication No Does not convert floating point constant division into multiplication Omits a check of the Selects whether to omit a check of the range for conversion between the floating type range for conversion and unsigned integer type between the floating When Yes is specified code performance of the relevant type conversion process type and unsigned ing is improved integer type The conversion result may however differ from C C language specifications so take care on this point This corresponds to the simple_float_conv option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes simple_float_conv Omits part of the type conversion pro cessing for the floating type No Does not omit part of the type conversion processing for the floating type Performs optimization Selects whether to perform optimization considering the type of the data indicated by considering the type of the pointer the data indicated by Although the performance of object code is generally better than when alias noansi the pointer is specified the results of execution may differ according to whether alias ansi or a
608. the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output category Figure 2 23 Output file name Property For Relocatable Module File E Output Output file type Relocatable module file FOrm Relocate Outputs debugging information a Dutputs to He output file DEBug Output file name test_rel nables informationtevel message outpul Suppresses the number of information level messages This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name 2 4 2 Output an assemble list The results of the assembly are output to the assemble list file 1 Fora C source file and C source file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list select Yes listfile on the Outputs a source list file property in the List category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 24 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 2 4 3 Figure 2 24 Outputs a source list file Property Outputs a source list file Yes listfile E Outputs the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly No Outputs the information before DEFINE replacement No Outputs the assembler macro expansion statements No For an assembler source file Select the bu
609. the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes chkfpu Checks for a floating point operation instruction No Does not check for a floating point operation instruc tion Checks for a DSP Selects whether to check for a DSP instruction instruction This corresponds to the chkdsp option of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes chkdsp Checks for a DSP instruction No Does not check for a DSP instruction Outputs the copyright Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the logo and nologo option of the assembler Default Configuration of the assemble option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 269 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute
610. the functions included in the C and EC standard libraries When lang c99 is specified all functions including those specified by the C99 standard can be used Since the num ber of available functions is greater than when lang c is specified however generating a library may take a long time R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 587 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE simple_stdio lt Library Generator Options Library Options gt Format simple_stdio Description This option creates a functional cutdown version of I O functions The functional cutdown version does not include the conversion of floating point numbers same as the function not supported with the nofloat option the conversion of long long type and the conversion of 2 byte code When input ting or outputting files that do not require these functions ROM can be saved Target functions fprintf fscanf printf scanf sprintf sscanf vfprintf vprintf and vsprintf This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Library Generate Options tab Generation mode of the standard library in the Object category Remarks In a library created with this option specified correct operation cannot be guaranteed when a cutdown function is used in the target functions This function is disabled during C and EC program compilation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztEN
611. the linkage list output by the linker a When outputting a symbol name list in a module Select Yes SHow SYmbol in the Outputs a symbol name list in a module property b When outputting the cross reference information Select Yes SHow Xreference in the Outputs the cross reference information property c When outputting the total sizes of sections Select Yes SHow Total_size in the Shows the total sizes of sections property Remark See 3 2 Link Map File for the linkage list file 2 4 4 Output library information The library information i e information on the result of linkage is output to the library list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Librarian Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library list file is made with the List category Figure 2 28 Outputs the linkage list file Property Outputs a section list in a module No To output the library list file select Yes List contents specify LISt in the Outputs the linkage list file property When outputting the library list file you can select the contents of the library list output by the linker 1 When outputting a symbol name list in a module Select Yes SHow SYmbol in the Outputs a symbol name list in a module property 2 When outputting a section list in a module Select Yes SHow SEction in the Outputs a section list in a module property Remark See 3 3
612. the list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs the linkage list file Selects whether to output the linkage list file This corresponds to the list and show option of the linker Default Yes List contents specify LISt How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes List contents not Outputs the default information associated specify LISt SHow with a output file type to a linkage list file Yes List con Outputs all information associated with a tents ALL LISt output file type to a linkage list file SHow ALL Yes List con Outputs the specified information to a link tents specify LISt age list file No Does not output a linkage list file Outputs a symbol name list in a module Selects whether to output a symbol name list in a module This corresponds to the show option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes List contents specify LISt in the Out puts the linkage list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes SHow SYmbo Outputsa symbol name list in a module No Does not output a symbol name list in a module R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 184 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 4 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Outputs a section list in a module A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects
613. the text Restriction Up to 247 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Use whole include paths specified for build tool Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths property in the Source category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used The include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths in the Source category from the Compile Options tab This corresponds to the include option of the compiler Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 244 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Include files at the Specifies include files at the head of compiling units head of compiling The following placeholders are supported units ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces
614. the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 290 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Figure A 30 System Include Path Order Dialog Box System Include Path Order Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory and System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Source category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Source category From the Link Options tab System library file in the Input category Description of each area 1 Path list display area This area displays the list of the system include paths specified for the compiler a Path This area displays the list of th
615. ther than above Object file input library debug nodebug output hide Relocatable file rename delete noprelink msg_unused Binary file show symbol xreference Library file Object extract specified Library file library output Hexadecimal Object file input library binary cpu start rom entry output Stype Relocatable file map space optimize nooptimize samesize Binary Binary file symbol_forbid samecode_forbid section_forbid Library file absolute_forbid rename delete define fsymbol stack noprelink record s9N te 2 byte_countNot3 memory msg_unused show symbol reference xreference jump_entries_for_pic aligned_section Absolute file input output record s9N9t22 byte_countte3 show symbol reference xreference Library strip specified Library file library output memoryNote4 show symbol sec tion extract specified Library file library output Other than above Object file input library output hide rename delete replace Relocatable file noprelink memoryNote4 show symbol section Notes 1 message nomessage change_message logo nologo form list and subcommand can always be specified Notes 2 s9 can be used only when form stype is specified for the output format Notes 3 byte_count can be used only when form hexadecimal is specified for the output format Notes 4 memory cannot be used when hide is specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 519 of 596 May 20 20
616. timize option specification Note however that if one of the following options is specified otherwise explicitly that specified option becomes valid When optimize max is specified Inline Expan sion Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses Optimiza tion Consid ering the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer inline 0 Note noconst_div schedule const_ copy noscope put mot has been specified for output For any other case the default is nomap When optimize 2 is specified Inline Expan sion Converting Constant Division into Multiplica tion Schedul ing Instruc tions Constant Propaga tion of const Qual ified Vari ables Dividing Optimiz ing Ranges Optimiz ing Exter nal Variable Accesses alias ansi The default is map when a C C source program has been specified for input and output abs or out Optimiza tion Consid ering the Type of the Data Indi cated by the Pointer noinline noconst_div schedule const_ copy alias noansi R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 389 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE When optimize 0 or optimize 1 is s
617. tinations listed above alignment of the other destinations is not adjusted For example when loop is selected alignment of the head of a loop is adjusted but align ment is not adjusted at the branch destination of an if statement that is used in the loop but does not gen erate a loop R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 375 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE instalign8 lt Compile Options Object Options gt Format instalign8 loop inmostloop Description This option aligns instructions at branch destinations When the instalign8 option is specified the instruction at the location address is aligned to the 8 byte boundary Instruction alignment is performed only when the instruction at the specified location exceeds the address which is a multiple of the alignment value 8 The following three types of branch destination can be selected by specifying the suboptions of instalign4 and instalign8 No specification Head of function and case and default labels of switch statement inmostloop Head of each inmost loop head of function and case and default labels of switch statement loop Head of each loop head of function and case and default labels of switch statement When these options are selected the alignment value of the program section is changed from 1 to 4 for instalign4 or 8 for instalign8 These options aim to efficiently operate the
618. ting point operation instruction No Does not check for a floating point operation instruc tion ztENESAS Page 158 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Checks for a DSP Selects whether to check for a DSP instruction instruction This corresponds to the chkdsp option of the assembler Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes chkdsp Checks for a DSP instruction No Does not check for a DSP instruction Outputs the copyright Selects whether to output the copyright This corresponds to the logo and nologo option of the assembler Default No nologo How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes logo Outputs the copyright No nologo Disables output of the copyright Commands executed Specifies the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assem bling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path
619. tion among other addresses Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 321 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Unassigned Section dialog box This dialog box is used to select sections to be deleted Figure A 48 Unassigned Section Dialog Box Unassigned Section Select section __ Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Section Settings dialog box select an address in the Address Section area and then click the Remove but ton Description of each area 1 Select sections area Select sections to be deleted in this area You can select multiple section types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key Function buttons Button Function Deletes the section selected in the Select section area from the Address Section area in the Section Settings dialog box dialog box and closes the dialog box If no sections are left in the section group address after deletion the entire section group is deleted If no sections are left in the Overlayn column after deletion the column itself is deleted Cancel Cancels the file selecting and closes the dialog box Unassigned All Deletes all sections in the Sele
620. tive project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog change box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specifies the output file name The default extensions depends on Load module file convert format property when extension omitted The default extensions are as follows Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal hex S record file FOrm Stype mot Binary data file FOrm Binary bin The following placeholders are su
621. tloop Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 8 byte boundaries Contains head of each inmost loop None noin stalign Does not align instructions at branch destina tions Generates divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction 4 Optimization Selects whether to generate divisions and residues with DIV DIVU and the FDIV instruction This corresponds to the nouse_div_inst option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates code in which DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used No nouse_div_inst Generates code in which no DIV DIVU or FDIV instructions are used The detailed information on optimizations are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when Do not add a library file in the Generation mode of the standard library property in the Mode category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 2tENESAS Page 207 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Optimization level Selects optimization level A WINDOWS REFERENCE This corresponds to the optimize option of the library generator Default 2 optimize 2 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 0 optimize 0 Does not optimize the program 1 optimize 1 Partially optimizes the program by au
622. to matically allocating variables to registers integrating the function exit blocks inte grating multiple instructions which can be integrated etc 2 optimize 2 Performs overall optimization Max optimize max Performs optimization as much as possi ble Outputs additional information for inter module optimization Selects whether to output additional information for inter module optimization This corresponds to the goptimize option of the library generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes goptimize Outputs additional information for inter module optimization No Does not outputs additional information for inter module optimization Optimization type Selects optimization type This corresponds to the speed and size option of the library generator Default Optimizes with emphasis on code size size How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Optimizes with emphasis on execution perfor mance speed Optimizes with emphasis on execution performance Optimizes with emphasis on code size size Optimizes with emphasis on code size Loop expansion R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to optimize the loop expansion for while and do while This corresponds to the loop option of the library generator Default Depends
623. to 32767 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified The detailed information on the verify is displayed and the configuration can be changed Checks the section larger than the speci fied range of addresses Selects whether to check the section larger than the specified range of addresses This corresponds to the cpu option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes CPu Check CPU information No Does not check CPU information Address range of the memory type Specifies the address range of the memory type Specifies in the format of memory type start address end address with one mem ory type per line Specifies ROm RAm or FIX for memory type Specifies an address in hexadecimal notation This corresponds to the cpu option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes CPu in the Checks the section larger than the specified range of addresses property is selected Default Address range to disable optimization number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Allocates to the next area of the same memory type or the section is divided Selects whether to allocate to the n
624. to the define option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Invalidates the pre defined macro R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies invalidates the predefined macro If multiple macro names are specified delimit them with a comma example __DBL4 __SCHAR This corresponds to the undefine option of the compiler Default Blank How to change Edit by the Specify The Predefined Macro dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 32767 characters ztENESAS Page 132 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Enables information level message output Specifies whether information level messages are output This corresponds to the message and nomessage options of the compiler Default No nomessage How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes message Enables information message output No nomes Disables information message output sage Suppresses the num ber of information level messages Specifies suppresses the number of information level message
625. to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff C Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections Allocates switch state ment branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections Selects whether to allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary align ment sections This corresponds to the nostuff option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes nos tuff W Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Does not allocate switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS May 20 2014 Page 138 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Adjustment for instruc tion in branch Selects adjustment for instruction in branch This corresponds to the noinstalign instalign4 and instalign8 option of the compiler Default None noinstalign How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction None noinstalign Does not align instructions at branch destina tions Execution in 4 bytes instalign4 Aligns instructions at branch destinations to 4 by
626. to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Output category Remarks When form object library hexadecimal stype binary strip or extract is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 521 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE nodebug lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format nodebug Default When this option is omitted debugging information is output to the output file Description When nodebug is specified debugging information is not output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Output category From the Librarian Options tab Outputs debugging information in the Output category Remarks When form object library hexadecimal stype binary strip or extract is specified this option is unavailable R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 522 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE record lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Output Options gt Format record H16 H20 H32 S1 S2 S3 Default When this option is omitted various data records are output according to each address Description Outputs data with the specifie
627. tor Data Type Minimum Value Maximum Value 127 signed char 255 unsigned char 32767 signed short 65535 unsigned short Other than above Other than above signed long This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Selects the enumeration type size automatically in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 437 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE bit_order lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format bit_order left right Default The default for this option is bit_order right Description This option specifies the order of bit field members When bit_order left is specified members are allocated from the upper bit When bit_order right is specified members are allocated from the lower bit The order of bit field members can also be specified by the pragma bit_order extension If both this option and a pragma extension are specified the pragma specification takes priority This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Order of bit field members in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 438 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE pack lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format pack Defaul
628. tputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Program Replaces with the file name of the running program ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before librarian processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before librarian processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 189 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after librarian processing after librarian process Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the a
629. triction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specifies the output file name The default extensions depends on Load module file convert format property when extension omitted The default extensions are as follows Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal hex S record file FOrm Stype mot Binary data file FOrm Binary bin The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct This corresponds to the output option of the linker This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default When Hex file FOrm Hexadecimal in the Load module file con vert format property is selected ProjectName hex When S record file FOrm Stype in the Load module file convert format property is selected ProjectName mot When Binary data file FOrm Binary in the Load module file con vert format property is selected ProjectName bin How to Directly enter in the text box change Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 192 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Division output file Specifies the division conversion file Specifies in the format of file name start address end address or file name section na
630. ts characters in strings and character constants using EUC SJIS code out codessjis Outputs characters in strings and character constants using SJIS UTF 8 code out code utf8 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using UTF 8 This item is not available when C C839 lang c in the Language of the C source file property in the Source category is selected Traditional Chinese character out code big5 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Traditional Chinese charac ter Simplified Chinese character out code gb231 2 Outputs characters in strings and character constants using Simplified Chinese charac ter The detailed information on list file is displayed and the configuration can be changed Outputs a source list file Selects whether to output a source list file This corresponds to the listfile and nolisifile option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lisfile Outputs a source list file No nolistfile Disable output of a source list file Outputs the C C source file R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output the C C source file This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not display
631. ts of source code processing by the assembler The following shows the meaning of each symbol 0 X IM D JA Description Shows the nesting level of include files Shows the line where the condition is false in conditional assembly when show conditions is specified Shows the line expanded from a macro instruction when show expansions is specified Shows the line that defines a macro instruction when show definitions is specified Shows that branch distance specifier S is selected Shows that branch distance specifier B is selected Shows that branch distance specifier W is selected Shows that branch distance specifier A is selected Shows that a substitute instruction is selected for a conditional branch instruc tion Source information SOURCE STATEMENT Contents of the assembly language source file C C source line number LineNo C C source statement C SOURCE STATEMENT C C source statement output when the show source option is specified 3 1 3 Statistics Information The following figure shows an example of statistics information output formation List 1 AL ERROR S 00000 AL WARNING S 00000 AL LINE S 00071 LINE Section List 2 Attr Size CODE 0000000047 0000002F ROMDATA 0000000004 00000004 Description Numbers of error messages and warning messages and total number of source lines
632. ts whether to perform inline expansion automatically This option corresponds to the inline and noinline option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Depends on the optimi Depends on the optimization level and zation level and optimi optimization type options zation type options Yes inline lt numeric Performs inline expansion automatically value gt No noinline Does not perform inline expansion auto matically Maximum increasing rate of function size Specifies maximum increasing rate of function size For example when 100 is specified inline expansion will be performed until the func tion size has increased by 100 size is doubled This option corresponds to the inline option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes inline lt numeric value gt in the Performs inline expansion automatically property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction 1 to 65535 decimal number Expansion method of the switch statement Selects expansion method of the switch statement This corresponds to the case option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction if_then method Expands the switch statement using the c
633. ture lt Instruction set architectures gt RXV1 RXV2 No value is set when the speci fication is omitted INC_RX Specifies a directory in which an include file of the compiler is stored lt ccrx storage directory gt include INC_RXA Specifies a directory in which an include file of the assembler is stored No value is set when the speci fication is omitted TMP_RX Specifies a directory in which a temporary file is generated TEMP when the ccrx com mand is used R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 342 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Environment Variable Description B COMMAND REFERENCE Default When Specification is Omitted HLNK_LIBRARY1 HLNK_LIBRARY2 HLNK_LIBRARY3 Specifies a default library name for the optimizing linkage editor Libraries which are specified by a library option are linked first Then if there is an unresolved symbol the default libraries are searched in the order of 1 2 3 No value is set when the speci fication is omitted HLINK_TMP Specifies a folder in which the optimizing linkage editor gener ates temporary files If HLNK_TMP is not specified the temporary files are created in the current folder No value is set when the speci fication is omitted HLINK_DIR Specifies an input file storage folder for the optimizing linkage editor The search order for files which are specifie
634. ubproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to create Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to create Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box b Remove the file from a project You can remove files from the project by one of the following procedure The removed files are not deleted from the file system in this operation Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the Project menu Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the context menu c Move files You can move files by the following procedure The file are moved under the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option is retained when the file is dropped in the main project or subproject Remarks 2 The file is copied not moved when the file is dropped between the different project or in the main project or subproject in same project Note that this operation does not retain the individual option set in each file d Add categories You can add the category node by one of the following procedure
635. ubproperty Default Input library file number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified System library file The specified system library files are displayed This corresponds to the library option of the linker Default System library file number of defined items Restriction Changes not allowed R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 162 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Input binary data file Specifies an input binary data file Specifies in the format of file name section name boundary alignment section attri bute symbol name with one file name per line The boundary alignment section attribute or symbo name part can be omit ted 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 can be specified for the boundary alignment When the boundary alignment specification is omitted 1 is used as the default CODE or DATA can be specified for the section attribute When section attribute specification is omitted the write read and execute attri butes are all enabled by default The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolu
636. uence using multiplication const_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using multiplica tion Instruction sequence using division noconst_div Performs constant division residue by an instruction sequence using division Expansion method of the library function R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects expansion method of the library function This correspon ds to the library option of the library generator Default library intrinsic Performs instruction expansion of several library functions How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Calls library functions library function Calls all library functions Performs instruction expansion of several library functions library intrinsic ztENESAS Performs instruction expansion for abs fabsf and library functions which can use string manipulation instructions Page 210 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Divides the optimizing ranges into many sec tions before compila tion A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects whether to divide the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation This corresponds to the scope and noscope option of the library generator Default Depends on the optimization level option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi
637. ult The peculiar value for the target device How to Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Section Settings dialog box change which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 1022 characters 8 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output The detailed information on frequently used options during hex output is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the application project Output hex file Specifies whether hex file is output Default Yes How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs a hex file No Does not output a hex file Load module file con Selects the load module file convert format vert format This corresponds to the form option of the linker Default S record file FOrm Stype How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Intel expanded hex file Outputs a Intel expanded hex file FOrm Hexadecimal Motorola S type file Outputs a Motorola S type file FOrm Stype Binary file Outputs a binary file FOrm Binary R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 122 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Output folder Specifies path of the output folder The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the ac
638. unction should be matched between the objects that compose the application and master The procedure for setting build options for the application and master is given below Remark For details on the PIC PID function possible combinations of options and how to create a startup pro gram for the application or master refer to Chapter 7 Startup in CubeSuite Coding 1 Setting build options Build options related to the PIC PID function can be set in the Project Tree panel Select the build tool node for the master or application and set options in the PIC PID category on the Common Options tab of the Property panel Figure 2 63 PIC PID Category El Enables the PIC function No Enables the PID function No Uses the PID register for code generation Yes a Setting build options for the master Select No for the Enables the PIC function property default Select No for the Enables the PID function property default Select Yes for the Uses the PID register for code generation property default b Setting build options for the application Select Yes pic for the Enables the PIC function property Select The maximum bit width of the offset 16 bits pid 16 or Yes The maximum bit width of the offset No limitation pid 32 for the Enables the PID function property 2 11 Set Build Options Separately Build options are set at the project or file level Project level See 2 11 1 Set
639. unning a build you must add the build target files such as C source file assembler source file to the project This section explains operations on setting files in the project 2 3 1 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add individual files Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 2 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree O83 B Ei sample Project FE R5F56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Ei File Drop the file here b Add a folder Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When a folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 13 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 3 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File T
640. using Traditional Chinese character Simplified Chi nese character gb2312 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using Simplified Chinese character The detailed information on object is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Selects the type of the output file to be generated during a build This corresponds to the output option of the compiler Default Object module file output obj How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Object module file Outputs a relocatable file output ob Source file after pre processed out put prep Outputs a source file after preprocessed Source file after pre Disables line output at preprocessor expan processed Disables sion line output out put prep noline Outputs debugging Selects whether to output debugging information to object module files information This corresponds to the debug and nodebug options of the compiler Default Yes debug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs debugging information to object module files debug No node Does not output debugging information to object module bug files R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 136 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Section name of pro gram area A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies the secti
641. ut the C C source file Outputs the state Specifies the contents of the source list file ments unsatisfied in Selects whether to output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly conditional assembly This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show condition Outputs the statements unsatisfied in con als ditional assembly No Does not output the statements unsatisfied in conditional assembly Outputs the informa Specifies the contents of the source list file tion before DEFINE Selects whether to output the information before DEFINE replacement replacement This corresponds to the show option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes lisfile in the Outputs a source list file property is selected Default No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes show defini Outputs the information before DEFINE tions replacement No Does not output the information before DEFINE replacement R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 116 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Outputs the assem bler macro expansion statements Specifies the contents of the source list file Selects whether to output
642. utput file type Property User library file FOrm Library U ath o e output folder Output file name ProjectName lib Enables information level message output No NOMessage Suppresses the number of information level messages a When User library file FOrm Library U is selected default A user library file is generated b When System library file FOrm Library S is selected A system library file is generated c When Relocatable module file FOrm Relocate is selected A relocatable module file is generated If the extension of output files is changed the following message dialog box will open R20UT2998Ev0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 21 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 16 Message Dialog Box Question Q0291001 DY Do you change a file extension Clicking Yes in the dialog box replaces the current file extension with the one for the output file type Clicking No on the other hand does not replace the current file extension 2 4 1 Change the output file name The names of the load module file hex file S record file binary data file relocatable module file and library file output by the build tool are set to the following names by default Load module file name ProjectName abs Hex file name ProjectName hex S record file name ProjectName mot Binary data file name ProjectName bin Relocatable module file name ProjectName rel Library file nam
643. utput folder BuildModeN ame Outputs debugging information Yes debug Section name of program area Section name of constant area Section name of initialized data area Section name of uninitialized data area Section name of literal area Section name of switch statement branch table area Allocates uninitialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates initialized variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates const qualified variables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Allocates switch statement branch tables to 4 byte boundary alignment sections No Adjustment for instruction in branch None noinstalign Generates divisions and residues with DIY DIVU and the FDI instruction Yes Character code of an output assembly lanquage file SJIS code outcode sjis E List Outputs a source list file No E Optimization Optimization Common y Assemble Options Link Options Library Generate Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the code size precedence select Optimizes with emphasis on code size size on the Optimization type property in the Optimization category Figure 2 30 Optimization ty
644. v 1 00 ztENESAS Page 493 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE base lt Assembler Command Options Microcontroller Options gt Format rom lt register gt ram lt register gt lt address gt lt register gt lt register gt R8 to R13 Description This option outputs to the relocatable file the information about the general register that is specified to be used only as a base address register through the same name option in the compiler This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Base register for ROM Base register for RAM Address value of base reg ister that sets the address value Register of base register that sets the address value in the CPU category Remarks Be sure to set this option to the same value for all assembly processes in the project If a different setting is made correct operation is not guaranteed Do not use a general register specified by this option for other purposes than a base address register If such a regis ter is used for any other purpose correct operation is not guaranteed If a single general register is specified for different areas an error will be output Ifa general register specified by the fint_register option is also specified by this option an error will be output R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 494 of 596 May 20 2014
645. v 1 00 ztENESAS Page 51 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 80 Set selected project as Active Project Item E LR sub Subproject me RSFS610aW A CC RX Build J Rebuild sample RX Simulator p clean sample Ce Program 4na a a eas a File na pen Folder with Explorer Add gt al Build sample Re Set sub as Active Project gl Remove from Project Shift Del aa Paste tri4 a Rename F2 tas Property When a project is set as the active project that project is underlined Figure 2 81 Active Project Project Tree 3 2 a E sample Project J R5F56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool ild Tool S gt RX Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Ei File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project the main project is the active project Remarks 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project 2 12 6 Add a build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time The build mode prepared b
646. w to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes NC com Checks the compatibility with the R8C and M16C piler family C compilers check nc Yes H8 com Checks the compatibility with the H8 H8S and piler H8SX family C C compilers check ch38 Yes SH com Checks the compatibility with the SuperH family C piler C compilers check sh No Does not check the compatibility with an existing program R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 135 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Character code of an input program Object A WINDOWS REFERENCE Selects character code of an input program This corresponds to the euc sjis latin1 utf8 big5 and gb2312 option of the assembler Default SJIS code sjis How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction EUC code euc Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using EUC SJIS code sjis Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using SJIS ISO Latin1 code latin1 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using ISO Latin1 UTF 8 code utf8 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by using UTF 8 Traditional Chi nese character big5 Handles the characters in strings character con stants and comments by
647. which can use string manipulation instructions Divides the optimizing ranges into many sec tions before compila tion Selects whether to divide the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation This corresponds to the scope and noscope option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization level option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes scope Divides the optimizing ranges of the large size function into many sections before compilation No noscope Does not divide the optimizing ranges before compilation Schedules the instruc tion taking into consid eration pipeline processing R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 Selects whether to schedule the instruction taking into consideration pipeline process ing This corresponds to the schedule and noschedule option of the compiler Default Depends on the optimization level option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Depends on the optimi zation level option Depends on the optimization level option Yes schedule Schedules instructions taking into consid eration pipeline processing No noschedule ztENESAS Does not schedule instructions Page 145 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02
648. wing placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after build processing number of defined items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified 2
649. with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this prod uct ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the preinclude option of the compiler Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Macro definition Specifies the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name string with one macro name per line The string part can be omitted and in this case the macro name is assumed to be defined This corresponds to the define option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 32767 characters Up to 65536 items can be specified Invalidates the pre Specifies invalidates the p
650. wo or more selections C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file stc s Jump table file jmp Symbol address file fsy Library file lib Object module file obj Relocatable file rel Python script file py Text file txt Subfolder level to search In the dialog select the file types to add to the project specify the number of subfolder levels to add and then click the OK button Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The folder is added below the File node Note that on the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by drop ping the file onto the node see 2 3 4 Classify a file into a category for a category node 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box opens R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 14 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 4 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assemb
651. xt box This property supports the following placeholder BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name BuildModeName is set by default 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName lib is set by default 2 9 Set Library Generate Options To set options for the library generator select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Library Generate Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 40 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 61 Property Panel Library Generate Options Tab Property A CC RX Property E Mode Generation mode of the standard library Build a library file option changed Standard Library B Object Path of the output folder BuildModeName Output file name ProjectName lib Creates a functional cutdown version of 1 0 functions No Creates the reentrant library No Section name of program area P Section name of constant area
652. y pragma address is output as 0 R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 542 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimize Options lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt The following optimize options are available optimize nooptimize samesize symbol_forbid samecode_forbid section_forbid absolute_forbid R20UT2998EV0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 543 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE optimize lt Optimizing Linkage Editor rlink Options Optimize Options gt Format Default When this option is omitted the default is optimize Description When optimize is specified optimization is performed for the file specified with the goptimize option at compilation or assembly optimize no suboptions executes all optimization It has the same meaning as optimize symbol_delete same_code short_format branch optimize speed executes optimizations other than those reducing object speed It has the same meaning as optimize symbol_delete short_format branch optimize safe executes optimization other than those limited by variable or function attributes It has the same mean ing as optimize short_format branch Other suboptions mean optimization as the following table Table B 17 Suboptions of optimize Option Suboption Description Program to be Optimized RXC RX
653. y default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box opens R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 52 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Figure 2 82 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Apply to All Build mode list DefauitBuild Delete a ee nename Select the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box opens Figure 2 83 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String BuildMode2 oC Ca In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project Figure 2 84 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list n BuildMade2 Duplicate Delete Rename 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build
654. y file FOrm Library U How to Changes not allowed change Restriction User library file Outputs a user library file FOrm Library U This item is not available when Yes Notify unused symbol Message MSg_unused in the Enables infor mation level message output prop erty is selected System library file Outputs a system library file FOrm Library S This item is not available when Yes Notify unused symbol Message MSg_unused in the Enables infor mation level message output prop erty is selected Relocatble module file Outputs a relocatable module file FOrm Relocate Outputs debugging Specifies whether debugging information is output information This corresponds to the nodebug and debug options of the linker This property is displayed only when Relocatble module file FOrm Relocate in the Output file type property is selected Default Yes Outputs to the output file DEBug How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Outputs to the output file Outputs a debugging information to DEBug the output file No NODEBug Does not output a debugging infor mation R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 182 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOWS REFERENCE Path of the output folder Specifies path of the output folder The following placeholders are supported BuildModeName Replaces wit
655. y it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify Misra2004 Rule File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the MISRA C 2004 rule file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Add Excluding File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the files that will not be checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify Using Library File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the library file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a link order specification file to import to the Link Order dialog box Select Export File dialog box R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 This dialog box is used to generate a link order specification file ztENESAS Page 83 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Main window This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched This window is used to control the user program execution and open panels for the build process Figure A 1 Main Window sample CubeSuite Project Tree File Edit View Project Build Debug Test To
656. y sections before compilation in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Divides the optimizing ranges into many sections before compilation in the Optimization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 404 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE schedule lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format schedule Default The default for this option is schedule when the optimize 2 or optimize max option has been specified Description When the schedule option is specified instructions are scheduled taking into consideration pipeline processing This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Schedules the instruction taking into consideration pipeline processing in the Optimization category From the Library Generate Options tab Schedules the instruction taking into consideration pipeline process ing in the Optimization category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 405 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE noschedule lt Compile Options Optimize Options gt Format noschedule Default The default for this option is noschedule when the optimize 1 or optimize 0 option has been specified Description When the noschedule option is specified instructions are not scheduled Basically processing is perform
657. y this option has been specified by the base option an error will occur R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 444 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE branch lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format branch 16 24 32 Default The default for this option is branch 24 Description This option specifies the branch width When branch 16 is specified the program is compiled with a branch width within 16 bits When branch 24 is specified the program is compiled with a branch width within 24 bits When branch 32 is specified the branch width is not specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Branch width size in the CPU category R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 445 of 596 May 20 2014 CubeSuite V2 02 00 B COMMAND REFERENCE base lt Compile Options Microcontroller Options gt Format rom lt register gt ram lt register gt lt address value gt lt register gt lt register gt R8 to R13 Description This option specifies the general register used as a fixed base address throughout the program When base rom c lt register A gt is specified accesses to const variables are performed relative to the specified reg ister A Note that the total size of the constant area section must be within 64 Kbytes to 256
658. zes the inter module map in the Optimizes accesses to external variables property in the Optimization cate gory from the Compile Options tab tab is selected Yes Map Other than above No How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Map Divides load module file No Does not divide load module file Enables information level message output Specifies whether to enable information level message output This corresponds to the message msg_unused and nomessage options of the linker Default No NOMessage How to Select from the drop down list change Restriction Yes Message Outputs information level mes sages Yes Notify unused symbol Notifies the user of the externally Message MSg_unused defined symbol which is not refer enced No NOMessage Disables the output of information level messages R20UT2998EJ0100 Rev 1 00 May 20 2014 ztENESAS Page 166 of 596 CubeSuite V2 02 00 Suppresses the num ber of information level messages A WINDOWS REFERENCE Specifies suppresses the number of information level messages If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 4 200 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 4 200 203 1300 This corresponds to the nomessage option of the linker This property is displayed only when No NOMessage in the Enables information level

CubeSuite+ V2.02.00 User`s Manual: RX Build

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents